Good Document - GBSS Reconfiguration Guide (V900R011C00 - 06)

GBSS V900R011C00
Reconfiguration Guide
Issue Date 06 2010-05-31
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2010. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China http://www.huawei.com support@huawei.com
Website: Email:
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GBSS Reconfiguration Guide
About This Document
About This Document

Purpose
This document describes how to reconfigure the BSC6900 during network optimization and how to configure the optional features.
Product Versions
The following table lists the product version related to this document. Product Name BSC6900 BTS3900 BTS3000 BTS3012/BTS3012AE/BTS3012II/ BTS3006C/BTS3002E DBS3900 BTS3900/BTS3900A BTS3900B/BTS3900E BTS30/BTS312/BTS3012A BTS30 and macro BTS312 (EDGE) BTS30 and macro BTS312 (PCS1900) Macro BTS3X (AMR) Product Version V900R011C00 BTS3900V100R002C00SPC011 BTS3000V100R009C00SPC011 BTS3000V100R008C11SP03 and later versions BTS3000V100R008C11 and later versions BTS3000V100R008C11 and later versions V100R008 and later versions V302R007 and later versions G3BTS32V302R002C06SP05 and later versions G3BTS32V302R002C06SP05 and later versions G3BTS32V302R002C06SP05 and later versions
Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
Issue 06 (2010-05-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii
About This Document

l l l l
Technical support engineers Maintenance engineers Field engineers Network optimization engineers
Organization
1 Changes in GBSS Reconfiguration Guide This chapter describes the changes in the GBSS Reconfiguration Guide. 2 Introduction to Reconfiguration This chapter defines reconfiguration and describes the reconfiguration tools. 3 Checking the License This chapter describes how to check the newly granted license. 4 Reconfiguring the BSC6900 This chapter describes how to reconfigure the running BSC6900 or expand its capacity. 5 Reconfiguring the Transmission Mode This chapter describes how to reconfigure the transmission mode on the A, Gb, and Abis interfaces to optimize the network performance. 6 Reconfiguring a BTS This chapter describes how to reconfigure a BTS. In the case of traffic imbalance, you can adjust the distribution of hardware resources. Reconfiguring BTSs can help to balance the traffic. 7 Reconfiguring the GSM Network This chapter describes how to reconfigure the running base station subsystem (BSS) as required. 8 Configuring GSM Features This section describes how to configure the GSM features of the BSC6900 GSM.
Conventions
Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol Description Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided,will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
iv
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
About This Document
Symbol
Description Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided,could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.
General Conventions The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Times New Roman Boldface Italic Courier New Description Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman. Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. For example, log in as user root. Book titles are in italics. Examples of information displayed on the screen are in Courier New.
Command Conventions The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Boldface Italic [] { x | y | ... } [ x | y | ... ] { x | y | ... }* Description The keywords of a command line are in boldface. Command arguments are in italics. Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional. Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected. Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected. Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all items can be selected. Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.
[ x | y | ... ]*
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
About This Document
GUI Conventions The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Boldface > Description Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK. Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Keyboard Operations The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Format Key Key 1+Key 2 Key 1, Key 2 Description Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab. Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt +A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently. Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means the two keys should be pressed in turn.
Mouse Operations The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Action Click Double-click Drag Description Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the pointer. Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly without moving the pointer. Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer to a certain position.
vi
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
Contents
Contents
About This Document...................................................................................................................iii 1 Changes in GBSS Reconfiguration Guide............................................................................1-1 2 Introduction to Reconfiguration.............................................................................................2-1
2.1 Definition........................................................................................................................................................2-2 2.2 Tools................................................................................................................................................................2-2
3 Checking the License.................................................................................................................3-1 4 Reconfiguring the BSC6900......................................................................................................4-1

4.1 Changing Signaling Points..............................................................................................................................4-2 4.2 Changing the Work Mode of a Board.............................................................................................................4-2
5 Reconfiguring the Transmission Mode.................................................................................5-1

5.1 Changing the Transmission Mode on the A Interface.....................................................................................5-2 5.2 Changing the Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface...................................................................................5-4 5.3 Changing the Transmission Mode on the Abis Interface................................................................................5-5
6 Reconfiguring a BTS..................................................................................................................6-1
6.1 Changing Timeslot Assignment on a BTS......................................................................................................6-3 6.1.1 Changing the Multiplexing Mode of a BTS...........................................................................................6-3 6.1.2 Changing the Abis Timeslot Assignment Mode....................................................................................6-4 6.1.3 Manually Assigning the Abis Timeslots................................................................................................6-5 6.2 Changing the Transmission Port on a BTS.....................................................................................................6-5 6.3 Changing a BTS from Non-Separated Mode to Separated Mode...................................................................6-6 6.4 Changing the Networking Mode of the 3900 Series Base Stations................................................................6-7 6.4.1 Changing RXU Chains into an RXU Ring.............................................................................................6-7 6.4.2 Changing an RXU Ring into an RXU Chain.........................................................................................6-9 6.5 Changing the Combined Cabinets and Cabinet Groups Between BTSs.......................................................6-10 6.6 Changing the Frequency Hopping.................................................................................................................6-11 6.6.1 Changing None FH to RF FH..............................................................................................................6-12 6.6.2 Changing None FH to Baseband FH....................................................................................................6-12 6.6.3 Changing RF FH to Baseband FH........................................................................................................6-13 6.6.4 Changing Baseband FH to RF FH........................................................................................................6-14 6.6.5 Changing RF FH to None FH..............................................................................................................6-14 6.6.6 Changing Baseband FH to None FH....................................................................................................6-15 Issue 06 (2010-05-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii
Contents
GBSS Reconfiguration Guide 6.6.7 Setting FH Mode to Hybrid FH............................................................................................................6-15 6.6.8 Changing Hybrid FH to None FH........................................................................................................6-16
6.7 Changing the Non-Ring Topology to Ring Topology..................................................................................6-16 6.8 Adjusting the Multi-Carrier BTS Standard...................................................................................................6-17 6.9 Configuring Rehoming of the BTS with Static IP Address..........................................................................6-17 6.10 Moving BTS Data.......................................................................................................................................6-19 6.11 Configuring a Custom BTS Alarm..............................................................................................................6-20
7 Reconfiguring the GSM Network...........................................................................................7-1

7.1 Configuring the Network Optimization Parameters of Multiple Cells in Batches..........................................7-2 7.2 Reconfiguring a Cell.......................................................................................................................................7-2 7.2.1 Changing the TRX Power......................................................................................................................7-3 7.2.2 Changing TRX Assignment in a Cell.....................................................................................................7-3 7.2.3 Changing TRX Frequencies...................................................................................................................7-4 7.2.4 Changing Neighboring Cell Relations...................................................................................................7-5 7.3 Reconfiguring Channels..................................................................................................................................7-7 7.3.1 Converting TCHs and SDCCHs.............................................................................................................7-7 7.3.2 Converting TCHs Between Full Rate and Half Rate.............................................................................7-8
8 Configuring GSM Features......................................................................................................8-1

8.1 Overview of Feature Configuration..............................................................................................................8-11 8.2 Activating the GSM License.........................................................................................................................8-36 8.3 Configuring the Emergency Call Service (TS12).........................................................................................8-37 8.4 Configuring the IMSI Detach........................................................................................................................8-37 8.5 Configuring the Direct Retry.........................................................................................................................8-38 8.6 Configuring the Assignment and Immediate Assignment ...........................................................................8-39 8.7 Configuring the Call Reestablishment..........................................................................................................8-40 8.8 Configuring the TCH Re-assignment............................................................................................................8-42 8.9 Configuring Radio Link Management..........................................................................................................8-43 8.10 Configuring Combined Cabinets and Cabinet Groups of BTSs.................................................................8-45 8.11 Configuring Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSU Failure.................................................................8-48 8.12 Configuring the System Information Sending............................................................................................8-50 8.13 Configuring Daylight Saving Time.............................................................................................................8-51 8.14 Configuring Signaling Transport Point (STP)............................................................................................8-52 8.15 Configuring 14-Digit Signaling Point Code................................................................................................8-54 8.16 Configuring the DRX..................................................................................................................................8-55 8.17 Configuring BTS Power Management........................................................................................................8-56 8.18 Configuring Connection with TMA............................................................................................................8-57 8.19 Configuring Remote Electrical Tilt.............................................................................................................8-58 8.20 Configuring 2-Antenna Receive Diversity..................................................................................................8-59 8.21 Configuring Base Station Clock..................................................................................................................8-60 8.22 Configuring PBT(Power Boost Technology)..............................................................................................8-61 8.23 Configuring Transmit Diversity..................................................................................................................8-63 8.24 Configuring Four-Way Receive Diversity..................................................................................................8-64 viii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
Contents
8.25 Configuring Dynamic Transmit Diversity..................................................................................................8-65 8.26 Configuring Dynamic PBT.........................................................................................................................8-67 8.27 Configuring Co-BCCH Cell........................................................................................................................8-68 8.28 Configuring Multi-band Sharing One BSC.................................................................................................8-70 8.29 Configuring Enhanced Dual-Band Network...............................................................................................8-71 8.30 Configuring Flex MAIO..............................................................................................................................8-74 8.31 Configuring ICC..........................................................................................................................................8-75 8.32 Configuring EICC.......................................................................................................................................8-76 8.33 Configuring Frequency Hopping................................................................................................................8-77 8.34 Configuring BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping........................................................................................8-78 8.35 Configuring Antenna Frequency Hopping..................................................................................................8-80 8.36 Configuring BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing...................................................................................8-81 8.37 Configuring the IBCA.................................................................................................................................8-82 8.38 Configuring Soft-Synchronized Network...................................................................................................8-84 8.39 Configuring BTS GPS Synchronization.....................................................................................................8-86 8.40 Configuring HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm.................................................................................8-87 8.41 Configuring the DTX..................................................................................................................................8-91 8.42 Configuring TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown..........................................................................8-93 8.43 Configuring Intelligent Combiner Bypass..................................................................................................8-94 8.44 Configuring Active Backup Power Control................................................................................................8-95 8.45 Configuring Power Optimization Based on Channel Type.........................................................................8-96 8.46 Configuring PSU Smart Control.................................................................................................................8-97 8.47 Configuring Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization.............................................................8-98 8.48 Configuring Dynamic Cell Power Off........................................................................................................8-99 8.49 Configuring TRX Working Voltage Adjustment......................................................................................8-100 8.50 Configuring Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Adjustment......................................................................8-101 8.51 Configuring Flex Abis...............................................................................................................................8-101 8.52 Configuring BTS Local Switch.................................................................................................................8-104 8.53 Configuring the Abis Transmission Optimization....................................................................................8-105 8.54 Configuring Flex Ater...............................................................................................................................8-106 8.55 Configuring BSC Local Switch.................................................................................................................8-106 8.56 Configuring Ater Compression Transmission...........................................................................................8-108 8.57 Configuring BTS Ring Topology..............................................................................................................8-109 8.58 Configuring the TRX Mutual Aid.............................................................................................................8-110 8.59 Configuring the MSC Pool........................................................................................................................8-112 8.59.1 Configuring MSC Pool (A over TDM)............................................................................................8-112 8.59.2 Configuring MSC Pool (A over IP).................................................................................................8-114 8.60 Configuring the SGSN Pool......................................................................................................................8-116 8.61 Configuring Abis Bypass..........................................................................................................................8-117 8.62 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup...................................................................................................8-120 8.63 Configuring the BSC Node Redundancy..................................................................................................8-121 8.64 Configuring the TC Pool...........................................................................................................................8-123 Issue 06 (2010-05-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ix
Contents
GBSS Reconfiguration Guide 8.64.1 Configuring the TC Pool..................................................................................................................8-123 8.64.2 Verifying the TC Pool......................................................................................................................8-125
8.65 Configuring Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC)..............................................................................8-126 8.66 Configuring Fast Move Handover.............................................................................................................8-127 8.67 Configuring Chain Cell Handover............................................................................................................8-128 8.68 Configuring Multi-Site Cell......................................................................................................................8-128 8.69 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Interoperability...........................................................................................8-130 8.70 Configuring the Fast 3G Reselection at 2G CS Call Release...................................................................8-132 8.71 Configuring the Satellite Transmission.....................................................................................................8-133 8.71.1 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface..................................................................8-134 8.71.2 Configuring Satellite Transmission over A Interface.......................................................................8-135 8.71.3 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface..................................................................8-137 8.71.4 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Pb Interface.....................................................................8-138 8.71.5 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Gb Interface.....................................................................8-139 8.72 Configuring High Speed Signaling ..........................................................................................................8-140 8.73 Configuring Local Multiple Signaling Points...........................................................................................8-141 8.74 Configuring Semi-Permanent Connection................................................................................................8-143 8.75 Configuring End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing.......................................................................................8-144 8.76 Configuring Active Power Control...........................................................................................................8-145 8.77 Configuring Ciphering..............................................................................................................................8-146 8.78 Configuring Speech Version.....................................................................................................................8-147 8.79 Configuring Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR..........................................................................8-148 8.80 Configuring the Cell Broadcast.................................................................................................................8-150 8.80.1 Configuring Short Message Service Cell Broadcast........................................................................8-150 8.80.2 Configuring Simplified Cell Broadcast............................................................................................8-151 8.81 Configuring Automatic Level Control (ALC)..........................................................................................8-153 8.82 Configuring Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC)......................................................................................8-154 8.83 Configuring the ANR................................................................................................................................8-156 8.84 Configuring TFO.......................................................................................................................................8-157 8.85 Configuring Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC)...............................................................................8-158 8.86 Configuring Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC).................................................................8-158 8.87 Configuring the Voice Quality Index........................................................................................................8-160 8.88 Configuring of Enhanced Measurement Report........................................................................................8-161 8.89 Configuring Dynamic HRFR Adaptation.................................................................................................8-162 8.90 Configuring AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment............................................................8-163 8.91 Configuring the WB AMR........................................................................................................................8-166 8.92 Configuring Streaming QoS(GBR)...........................................................................................................8-167 8.93 Configuring QoS ARP/THP......................................................................................................................8-168 8.94 Configuring PS Active Package Management..........................................................................................8-169 8.95 Configuring PoC QoS...............................................................................................................................8-170 8.96 Configuring NC2.......................................................................................................................................8-171 8.97 Configuring the NACC.............................................................................................................................8-172 x Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
Contents
8.98 Configuring GPRS....................................................................................................................................8-174 8.99 Configruing Network Operation Mode I...................................................................................................8-175 8.100 Configuring Packet Performance Improvement......................................................................................8-176 8.101 Configuring the Feature of Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS Coding.......................................8-178 8.102 Configuring Packet Channel Dispatching...............................................................................................8-179 8.102.1 Configuring the Feature of EGPRS Special Channel Be Used by Only EGPRS Service.............8-180 8.102.2 Configuring EGPRS Preferred Channel.........................................................................................8-181 8.102.3 Configuring Channel Multiplexing in the E Down G Up Scenario...............................................8-182 8.103 Configuring BSS Paging Coordination...................................................................................................8-183 8.104 Configuring PS Handover.......................................................................................................................8-183 8.105 Configuring EDA....................................................................................................................................8-185 8.106 Configuring PDCH Dynamic Adjustment with Two Thresholds...........................................................8-187 8.107 Configuring DTM...................................................................................................................................8-187 8.108 Configuring Class11 DTM......................................................................................................................8-188 8.109 Configuring HMC DTM.........................................................................................................................8-189 8.110 Configuring 14.4 kbit/s Circuit Switched Data.......................................................................................8-190 8.111 Configuring Resource Reservation.........................................................................................................8-191 8.112 Configuring Enhanced Multi Level Precedence and Preemption (eMLPP)...........................................8-192 8.113 Configuring Guaranteed Emergency Call...............................................................................................8-193 8.114 Configuring Flow Control Based on Cell Priority..................................................................................8-195 8.115 Configuring Network Support SAIC.......................................................................................................8-196 8.116 Configuring the Location Service...........................................................................................................8-198 8.117 Configuring the Abis over IP..................................................................................................................8-198 8.118 Configuring the A over IP.......................................................................................................................8-201 8.119 Configuring UDP MUX for A Transmission..........................................................................................8-204 8.120 Configuring the Gb over IP.....................................................................................................................8-204 8.121 Configuring IP Fault detection based on BFD........................................................................................8-206 8.122 Configuring Ethernet OAM....................................................................................................................8-207 8.123 Configuring PICO/Compact BTS Automatic Configuration and Planning............................................8-208 8.124 Configuring PICO Synchronization........................................................................................................8-210 8.125 Configuring Compact BTS Automatic Capacity Planning.....................................................................8-210 8.126 Configuring VGCS/VBS.........................................................................................................................8-211 8.127 Configuring GSM-T Relay......................................................................................................................8-213 8.128 Configuring HUAWEI II Handover........................................................................................................8-214 8.129 Configuring Handover Re-establishment................................................................................................8-215 8.130 Configuring RAN Sharing......................................................................................................................8-216 8.131 Configuration the MSRD........................................................................................................................8-218 8.132 Configuring Dual Carriers in Downlink..................................................................................................8-219 8.133 Configuring the EGPRS2-A....................................................................................................................8-220 8.134 Configuring Latency Reduction..............................................................................................................8-221 8.135 Configuring the License Control for Urgency Function.........................................................................8-221 8.136 Configuring Access Control Class..........................................................................................................8-222 Issue 06 (2010-05-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xi
Contents
8.137 Configuring Load Based Handover Enhancement on Iur-g....................................................................8-224 8.138 Configuring 2G3G Co-Transmission by TDM Switching......................................................................8-226 8.139 Configuring Multiple CCCHs.................................................................................................................8-227
xii
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
Figures
Figures
Figure 6-1 RXU ring and RXU chain examples..................................................................................................6-8 Figure 6-2 RXU ring and RXU chain examples..................................................................................................6-9 Figure 8-1 Signaling Messages..........................................................................................................................8-41 Figure 8-2 Connections of the BTS3012 combined cabinets.............................................................................8-46 Figure 8-3 Connections of BTS3012 cabinet groups.........................................................................................8-46 Figure 8-4 Connections between the DTRU and DDPU in PBT mode.............................................................8-62 Figure 8-5 Network topology when Abis transmission backup is enabled......................................................8-120
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
xiii
Tables
Tables
Table 2-1 Reconfiguration tools...........................................................................................................................2-2 Table 6-1 Mapping between the cabinet group number and the port number of the BTS3012.........................6-10 Table 6-2 Mapping between the cabinet group number and the port number of the BTS3006C.......................6-10 Table 6-3 Mapping between the cabinet group number and the port number when cabinet groups are configured between the BTS3012 and BTS312....................................................................................................................6-11 Table 6-4 Data to be negotiated and planned for configuring a custom BTS alarm..........................................6-21 Table 8-1 GSM Basic Feature List.....................................................................................................................8-11 Table 8-2 GSM Optional Feature List................................................................................................................8-16 Table 8-3 Counters for verifying HUAWEI III power control...........................................................................8-88 Table 8-4 Description of bit values on the DIP switch S4...............................................................................8-118 Table 8-5 Description of bit values on the DIP switch S5...............................................................................8-118 Table 8-6 Number of WB AMR calls supported by each DSP in various scenarios.......................................8-166
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
xv
1 Changes in GBSS Reconfiguration Guide
Changes in GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

This chapter describes the changes in the GBSS Reconfiguration Guide.
06 (2010-05-31)
This is the sixth commercial release. Compared with issue 05 (2010-03-25) of V900R011C00, this issue includes the following new topics:
l l l l
6.10 Moving BTS Data 6.8 Adjusting the Multi-Carrier BTS Standard 6.9 Configuring Rehoming of the BTS with Static IP Address 6.11 Configuring a Custom BTS Alarm
Compared with issue 05 (2010-03-25) of V900R011C00, this issue incorporates the following changes. Item 5.1 Changing the Transmission Mode on the A Interface 5.2 Changing the Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface 5.3 Changing the Transmission Mode on the Abis Interface Change Description The description of the prerequisites are modified. The description of the prerequisites are modified. The description of the prerequisites are modified.
Compared with issue 05 (2010-03-25) of V900R011C00, this issue does not exclude any topic.
05 (2010-03-25)
This is the fifth commercial release. Compared with issue 04 (2010-01-30) of V900R011C00, this issue includes the following new topics:
Issue 06 (2010-05-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1-1

l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8.9 Configuring Radio Link Management 8.10 Configuring Combined Cabinets and Cabinet Groups of BTSs 8.11 Configuring Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSU Failure 8.18 Configuring Connection with TMA 8.19 Configuring Remote Electrical Tilt 8.20 Configuring 2-Antenna Receive Diversity 8.21 Configuring Base Station Clock 8.31 Configuring ICC 8.32 Configuring EICC 8.34 Configuring BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping 8.39 Configuring BTS GPS Synchronization 8.61 Configuring Abis Bypass 8.65 Configuring Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC) 8.115 Configuring Network Support SAIC 8.3 Configuring the Emergency Call Service (TS12) 8.4 Configuring the IMSI Detach 8.6 Configuring the Assignment and Immediate Assignment 8.7 Configuring the Call Reestablishment 8.5 Configuring the Direct Retry 8.12 Configuring the System Information Sending 8.8 Configuring the TCH Re-assignment 8.62 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup 8.113 Configuring Guaranteed Emergency Call 8.54 Configuring Flex Ater 8.13 Configuring Daylight Saving Time 8.75 Configuring End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing 8.102 Configuring Packet Channel Dispatching 8.110 Configuring 14.4 kbit/s Circuit Switched Data 8.15 Configuring 14-Digit Signaling Point Code 8.14 Configuring Signaling Transport Point (STP) 8.94 Configuring PS Active Package Management 8.79 Configuring Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR 8.107 Configuring DTM 8.108 Configuring Class11 DTM 8.109 Configuring HMC DTM 8.114 Configuring Flow Control Based on Cell Priority 8.90 Configuring AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment 8.89 Configuring Dynamic HRFR Adaptation
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
1-2

l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
8.88 Configuring of Enhanced Measurement Report 8.111 Configuring Resource Reservation 8.88 Configuring of Enhanced Measurement Report 8.40 Configuring HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm 8.76 Configuring Active Power Control 8.121 Configuring IP Fault detection based on BFD 8.119 Configuring UDP MUX for A Transmission 8.105 Configuring EDA 8.92 Configuring Streaming QoS(GBR) 8.93 Configuring QoS ARP/THP 8.95 Configuring PoC QoS 8.129 Configuring Handover Re-establishment 8.128 Configuring HUAWEI II Handover 8.86 Configuring Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC) 8.67 Configuring Chain Cell Handover 8.99 Configruing Network Operation Mode I 8.103 Configuring BSS Paging Coordination 8.137 Configuring Load Based Handover Enhancement on Iur-g 8.138 Configuring 2G3G Co-Transmission by TDM Switching
Compared with issue 04 (2010-01-30) of V900R011C00, this issue includes no changes. Compared with issue 04 (2010-01-30) of V900R011C00, this issue does not exclude any topic.
04 (2010-01-30)
This is the fourth commercial release. Compared with issue 03 (2009-12-05) of V900R011C00, this issue does not include any new topics. Compared with issue 03 (2009-12-05) of V900R011C00, this issue incorporates the following changes: The configurations for the optional features are optimized, and the verification operations are added for all the feature configurations. Compared with issue 03 (2009-12-05) of V900R011C00, this issue excludes the following topics:
l l l
Configuring the Monitoring Timeslot Configuring the Idle Timeslot Configuring the Exclusive Timeslot
03 (2009-12-05)
This is the third commercial release.
Compared with issue 02 (2009-10-30) of V900R011C00, this issue includes the following new topics:
l l l
Configuring the Monitoring Timeslot Configuring the Idle Timeslot Configuring the Exclusive Timeslot
Compared with issue 02 (2009-10-30) of V900R011C00, this issue includes no changes. Compared with issue 02 (2009-10-30) of V900R011C00, this issue does not exclude any topic.
02 (2009-10-30)
This is the second commercial release. Compared with issue 01 (2009-07-30) of V900R011C00, this issue includes the following new topics:
l l l l l l
7.1 Configuring the Network Optimization Parameters of Multiple Cells in Batches 8.81 Configuring Automatic Level Control (ALC) 8.82 Configuring Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC) 8.36 Configuring BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing 8.33 Configuring Frequency Hopping 8.38 Configuring Soft-Synchronized Network
Compared with issue 01 (2009-07-30) of V900R011C00, this issue incorporates the following changes: Item 5.1 Changing the Transmission Mode on the A Interface Change Description The change of the transmission mode from TDM to IP is described in BM/TC separated mode and BM/TC combined mode respectively. Verifying the BTS Ring Topology is added. Configuring the Antenna Frequency Hopping Quickly is added.
8.57 Configuring BTS Ring Topology 8.35 Configuring Antenna Frequency Hopping
Compared with issue 01 (2009-07-30) of V900R011C00, this issue does not exclude any topic.
01 (2009-07-30)
This is the first commercial release.
1-4
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
2 Introduction to Reconfiguration
Introduction to Reconfiguration
About This Chapter

This chapter defines reconfiguration and describes the reconfiguration tools. 2.1 Definition Reconfiguration refers to a process of adding, deleting, or modifying the data of the BSS system (consisting of at least one BSC6900 and one base station) after it starts operating. 2.2 Tools The Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT) and the Configuration Management Express (CME) can be used to configure the BSC6900.
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
2-1
2 Introduction to Reconfiguration
2.1 Definition
Reconfiguration refers to a process of adding, deleting, or modifying the data of the BSS system (consisting of at least one BSC6900 and one base station) after it starts operating. The BSS is reconfigured in the following scenarios:
l
Network optimization Network optimization is a process of adjusting and optimizing the network performance based on the data that is obtained from performance measurements or drive tests when the network is in service.
System capacity expansion System capacity expansion enables the BSC system to serve more users through hardware addition or configuration modification in the existing network.
Feature configuration Feature configuration is a process of activating an optional feature by configuring its key parameters.
This document focuses on the data to be prepared and reconfiguration procedures. However, it does not focus on the data analysis process of network optimization and the number of boards and links for capacity expansion that are subject to actual network conditions. Feature configuration provides guidelines for activating a feature, but it cannot guarantee the optimum feature performance in the network.
2.2 Tools
The Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT) and the Configuration Management Express (CME) can be used to configure the BSC6900. Table 2-1 describes the tools used in reconfiguration. This document only describes the data reconfiguration through MML commands on the web LMT (hereinafter referred to as LMT). Table 2-1 Reconfiguration tools Data Configuration Tool LMT CME Function Online or offline configuration of the BSC6900 can be performed through MML commands. BSC6900 configuration can be performed through the CME graphic user interface.
l
In integrated mode, the configuration data can be sent to the BSC6900 through the M2000 immediately or at a specified time. This mode is used for data reconfiguration. In standalone mode, the configuration file needs to be exported after the configuration and then loaded to the BSC6900 through the LMT or M2000 for the data to take effect. This mode applies to BSC6900 initial configuration.
2-2
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
3 Checking the License
3
Prerequisite
l l l
Checking the License
This chapter describes how to check the newly granted license.
A new license is granted. The BSC6900 is in the minimum configuration. The license file is loaded. For details, see FTP Server.
Context
A new license is required in the following situations:
l l
A network is deployed. New license control items are introduced to the C version to be upgraded. These license control items, however, are not defined in the license file of the earlier version. New license control items are introduced to the C version to be upgraded. These license control items are defined in the license file of the earlier version, but their values are incorrect. The R version is upgraded. The Equipment Serial Number (ESN) is changed. The functions restricted by the license need to be enabled. The license is about to expire.
l l l l
Procedure
Step 1 Run the CHK DATA2LIC command to check the license. In this step, set File Name. ----End
Example
/*Check the license file named ON1020691_GU2.dat*/
CHK DATA2LIC: FN="ON1020691_GU2.dat"
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
3-1
3 Checking the License
Postrequisite
After checking the license, run the ACT LICENSE command to activate the license.
3-2
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
4 Reconfiguring the BSC6900
4
About This Chapter
Reconfiguring the BSC6900
This chapter describes how to reconfigure the running BSC6900 or expand its capacity. 4.1 Changing Signaling Points When the BSC6900 is relocated or network optimization is performed, the destination signaling point code (DPC) and originating signaling point code (OPC) are changed. In this case, you need to change the related settings. 4.2 Changing the Work Mode of a Board To improve the reliability of a BSC6900 board, you can change the work mode of the board in ineffective mode.
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
4-1
4.1 Changing Signaling Points

When the BSC6900 is relocated or network optimization is performed, the destination signaling point code (DPC) and originating signaling point code (OPC) are changed. In this case, you need to change the related settings.
Prerequisite
l l l l l
The LMT runs normally. The LMT communicates with the BSC6900 properly. The new DPC and OPC are planned. The ESN corresponding to the new DPC and OPC is used. The license for the new ESN is granted.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the MOD OPC command. In this step, change OSP name, OSP code bits, or The host type of signalling point. Step 2 Run the MOD N7DPC command. In this step, change DSP name, DSP code, or Adjacent flag. ----End
Example
/*Change an OPC*/
MOD OPC: SPX=1, NAME="MBSC_01", HOSTTYPE=SINGLEHOST;
/*Change a DPC*/
MOD N7DPC: DPX=0, SPDF=WNF, DPC=500;
Postrequisite
You can run the ACT LICENSE command to activate the newly granted license. All the links and adjacent nodes mapping to the original signaling points are mapped to the new signaling points.
4.2 Changing the Work Mode of a Board

To improve the reliability of a BSC6900 board, you can change the work mode of the board in ineffective mode.
Prerequisite
l l
The board works in independent mode. The board supports the active/standby mode.
4-2

l
No other board of the same type as the original board is configured in the standby slot.
Context
CAUTION
The board of the DPU type does not support the active/standby mode. Therefore, the following steps cannot be performed on such a board. When the XPUa board supports MCP, it can work in only independent mode. In this case, the following steps cannot be performed on the XPUa board. After the work mode of a board is changed, the corresponding subrack must be reset. In this case, the related services are affected. Therefore, perform this operation with caution. A BSC6900 board works in two modes: independent mode and active/standby mode. To improve the reliability, the board can be changed from the independent mode to the active/standby mode. After a board is changed to the active/standby mode, its configuration is automatically copied to the active and standby boards. The device IP address of the standby IP-based interface board or the active/standby relationship between the ports on the active and standby boards need to be manually set. When data is transmitted on the ports of the boards in non-active/standby mode, you need to run the ADD ETHIP command to configure the device IP address of the standby board. If data is transmitted on the ports of the boards in active/standby mode, you need to run the ADD ETHREDPORT to configure the active/standby relationship between the ports on the active and standby boards. This operation applies to all the boards except the OMU board. For details on how to change an OMU board from the independent mode to the active/standby mode, see Switchover Between the Active and Standby OMUs.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the SET CFGDATAINEFFECTIVE command to set a subrack to ineffective mode. Step 2 Run the MOD BRD command to change the work mode of a board. Step 3 Run the SET CFGDATAEFFECTIVE command to set the subrack to effective mode. Step 4 Run the RST SUBRACK command to reset the subrack and make the changed work mode of the board take effect. ----End
Example
/*Set subrack 1 to ineffective mode*/
SET CFGDATAINEFFECTIVE: SRN=1;
/*Change the work mode of the board in slot 14 of subrack 1*/

MOD BRD: SRN=1, SN=14, RED=YES;
/*Set all subracks to effective mode*/

SET CFGDATAEFFECTIVE;
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
4-3
/*Reset subrack 1*/

RST SUBRACK: SRN=1;
4-4
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
5 Reconfiguring the Transmission Mode
Reconfiguring the Transmission Mode
About This Chapter

This chapter describes how to reconfigure the transmission mode on the A, Gb, and Abis interfaces to optimize the network performance. 5.1 Changing the Transmission Mode on the A Interface To improve the transmission efficiency and speech quality on the A interface, you can change the transmission mode on the A interface from TDM to IP. 5.2 Changing the Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface To improve the transmission efficiency, increase the throughput, and reduce the transmission delay on the Gb interface, you can change the transmission mode on the Gb interface from FR to IP. 5.3 Changing the Transmission Mode on the Abis Interface To improve the transmission resource utilization, you can change the transmission mode on the Abis interface from TDM to IP.
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
5-1
5.1 Changing the Transmission Mode on the A Interface

To improve the transmission efficiency and speech quality on the A interface, you can change the transmission mode on the A interface from TDM to IP.
Prerequisite
l l l l l
The peer end supports the A over IP mode. The FG2a/FG2c/GOUa/GOUc/PEUa/POUc is configured in the MPS/EPS subrack. Networking planning is complete. The license A over IP has been activated. The DPUc board is configured in MPS/EPS ofBSC6900.
Context
CAUTION
In A over IP mode, only system clock is supported. The line clock is not supported. Changing the transmission mode on the A interface involves the following scenarios:
l l
Changing the transmission mode from TDM to IP over FE/GE Changing the transmission mode from TDM to IP over E1
Procedure
l Changing the transmission mode from TDM to IP over FE/GE 1. Optional: Run the RMV ATERCONSL/RMV ATERSL, RMV ATEROML, and RMV ATERE1T1/RMV ATERCONPATH commands to remove Ater interface data.
NOTE
This step needs to be performed only for TDM transmission in BM/TC separated mode.
2. 3.
Run the RMV MTP3RT/RMV MTP3LNK, RMV MTP3LKS, and RMV AE1T1 commands to remove A interface data. Run the RMV BRD command to remove the TDM-based interface boards from all the subracks and other service processing boards from the TCS.
NOTE
Before removing the A interface board, ensure that the line clock carried on the A interface board in the TCS is removed. For details on how to remove the line clock and the clock source, see the description of the SET CLK command and the RMV CLKSRC command.
4.
Optional: Run the RMV SUBRACK command to remove TCS data.
5-2
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)

NOTE
This step needs to be performed only for TDM transmission in BM/TC separated mode. A subrack can be removed only after all the service processing boards in the subrack are removed.
5.
Run the SET BSCBASIC command. In this step, set Service mode to AIP(AIP).
NOTE
After the service mode of the BSC is changed, the resources to each subrack need to be reloaded. Therefore, you need to run the RST BSC to reset the BSC.
6. 7. 8. 9.
Run the ADD BRD in the MPS/ESP subrack to add an IP-based board. Perform the operations in Configuring the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer for the FG2a/FG2c/GOUa/GOUc Board. Perform the operations in Configuring the Control Plane of the A Interface (over IP). Perform the operations in Configuring the Mapping Between Service Types and Transmission Resources for the Adjacent Node.
10. Perform the operations in Configuring the User Plane of the A Interface (over IP). l Changing the transmission mode from TDM to IP over E1 1. Optional: Run the RMV ATERCONSL/RMV ATERSL, RMV ATEROML, and RMV ATERE1T1/RMV ATERCONPATH commands to remove Ater interface data.
NOTE
This step needs to be performed only for TDM transmission in BM/TC separated mode.
2. 3. 4.
Run the RMV MTP3RT/RMV MTP3LNK, RMV MTP3LKS, and RMV AE1T1 commands to remove A interface data. Run the RMV BRD command to remove the TDM interface boards and other service processing boards from the TCS. Run the RMV SUBRACK command to remove TCS data.
NOTE
This step needs to be performed only for TDM transmission in BM/TC separated mode. Before removing the A interface board, ensure that the line clock carried on the A interface board in the TCS is removed. For details on how to remove the line clock and the clock source, see the description of the SET CLK command and the RMV CLKSRC command. A subrack can be removed only after all the service processing boards in the subrack are removed.
5. 6. 7.
Run the SET BSCBASIC command. In this step, set Service mode to AIP(AIP). Run the ADD BRD in the MPS/ESP subrack to add an IP-based board. Configure the physical layer and the data link layer.
Perform the operations in Configuring the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer for the PEUa Board. Perform the operations in Configuring the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer for the POUc Board.
8. 9.
Run the ADD ADJNODE command. In this step, set Adjacent Node Type to A(A Interface). Perform the operations in Configuring the Mapping Between Service Types and Transmission Resources for the Adjacent Node.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-3
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
10. Perform the operations in Configuring the User Plane of the A Interface (over IP). ----End
Example
/*Change the transmission mode on the A interface*/
SET BSCBASIC: ServiceMode=AIP;
/*Configure the physical layer, data link layer, and network layer on the A interface*/
ADD DEVIP: SRN=0, SN=24, IPADDR="162.4.5.12", MASK="255.255.255.0"; ADD ETHIP: SRN=0, SN=24, PN=4, IPTYPE=PRIMARY, IPADDR="161.70.2.104", MASK="255.255.255.0"; ADD IPRT: DSTIP="161.66.2.0", DSTMASK="255.255.255.0", NEXTHOP="161.70.2.201", PRIORITY=HIGH;
/*Configure the control plane on the A interface*/

ADD M3LE: LENO=0, SPX=0, ENTITYT=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="BSC"; ADD N7DPC: NAME="dpc0", DPX=11, SPX=0, SPDF=WNF, DPC=H'1000, DPCT=A, BEARTYPE=M3UA; ADD M3DE: DENO=0, LENO=0, DPX=11, ENTITYT=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="dpc0"; ADD M3LKS: SIGLKSX=0, DENO=0, WKMODE=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="M3UALINKSET0"; ADD M3RT: DENO=0, SIGLKSX=0, NAME="RT0"; ADD SCTPLNK: SRN=0, SN=0, SCTPLNKN=0, MODE=CLIENT, APP=M3UA, LOCPN=2004, LOCIP1="162.4.5.12", PEERIP1="161.66.2.210", PEERPN=2004, LOGPORTFLAG=NO, VLANFlAG=DISABLE, SWITCHBACKFLAG=YES; ADD M3LNK: SIGLKSX=0, SIGLNKID=0, SRN=0, SN=0, SCTPLNKN=0, NAME="link0";
/*Configure the user plane on the A interface*/

ADD ADJNODE: ANI=5, NAME="A", NODET=A; ADD IPPATH: ANI=5, PATHID=1, ITFT=A, PATHT=QoS, IPADDR="162.4.5.12", PEERIPADDR="161.66.2.213", PEERMASK="255.255.255.0", TXBW=1000, RXBW=1000, CARRYFLAG=NULL, VLANFlAG=DISABLE, PATHCHK=DISABLED; ADD TRMMAP: TMI=13, ITFT=A; ADD TRMFACTOR: FTI=1, REMARK="A IP"; ADD ADJMAP: ANI=5, ITFT=A, TMIGLD=13, FTI=1;
5.2 Changing the Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface

To improve the transmission efficiency, increase the throughput, and reduce the transmission delay on the Gb interface, you can change the transmission mode on the Gb interface from FR to IP.
Prerequisite
l l l l l
The built-in PCU is used. The DPUd board is configured. The peer end supports the Gb over IP mode. A PEUa board is replaced by FG2a/FG2c/GOUc board. Networking planning is complete. The license Gb over IP has been activated.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the RMV PTPBVC command to remove the PTPBVC corresponding to the cell. Step 2 Run the RMV NSVC command to remove NSVC data. Step 3 Run the RMV BC command to remove BC data.
5-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
Step 4 Run the RMV NSE command to remove NSE data. Step 5 Run the RMV BRD command to remove the interface board for FR transmission mode. Step 6 Run the ADD NSE command to add the NSE. Step 7 Configure the NSVL. 1. 2. Run the ADD NSVLLOCAL command to add an NSVL at the BSC6900 side. Optional: When the NSE is in static configuration mode, run the ADD NSVLREMOTE command to add the NSVL at the SGSN side.
Step 8 Run the ADD PTPBVC command to add the PTPBVC and to bind the GPRS cell with the NSE. ----End
Example
ADD NSE: NSEI=18013, SRN=0, SN=0, PT=GB_OVER_IP, ISNCMODE=STATIC, CNOPNAME="46000", CNID=0; ADD NSVLLOCAL: LOCALNSVLI=130, NSEI=18013, IP="21.1.1.21", UDPPN=13000, SRN=0, SN=14; ADD NSVLLOCAL: LOCALNSVLI=131, NSEI=18013, IP="21.1.1.21", UDPPN=13001, SRN=0, SN=14; ADD NSVLLOCAL: LOCALNSVLI=132, NSEI=18013, IP="21.1.1.21", UDPPN=13002, SRN=0, SN=14; ADD NSVLLOCAL: LOCALNSVLI=133, NSEI=18013, IP="21.1.1.21", UDPPN=13003, SRN=0, SN=14; ADD NSVLLOCAL: LOCALNSVLI=134, NSEI=18013, IP="21.1.1.21", UDPPN=13004, SRN=0, SN=14; ADD NSVLLOCAL: LOCALNSVLI=135, NSEI=18013, IP="21.1.1.21", UDPPN=13005, SRN=0, SN=14; ADD NSVLLOCAL: LOCALNSVLI=136, NSEI=18013, IP="21.1.1.21", UDPPN=13006, SRN=0, SN=14; ADD NSVLLOCAL: LOCALNSVLI=137, NSEI=18013, IP="21.1.1.21", UDPPN=13007, SRN=0, SN=14; ADD NSVLREMOTE: REMOTENSVLI=130, NSEI=18013, IP="19.1.1.20", UDPPN=13000; ADD NSVLREMOTE: REMOTENSVLI=131, NSEI=18013, IP="19.1.1.20", UDPPN=13001; ADD NSVLREMOTE: REMOTENSVLI=132, NSEI=18013, IP="19.1.1.20", UDPPN=13002; ADD NSVLREMOTE: REMOTENSVLI=133, NSEI=18013, IP="19.1.1.20", UDPPN=13003; ADD NSVLREMOTE: REMOTENSVLI=134, NSEI=18013, IP="19.1.1.20", UDPPN=13004; ADD NSVLREMOTE: REMOTENSVLI=135, NSEI=18013, IP="19.1.1.20", UDPPN=13005; ADD NSVLREMOTE: REMOTENSVLI=136, NSEI=18013, IP="19.1.1.20", UDPPN=13006; ADD NSVLREMOTE: REMOTENSVLI=137, NSEI=18013, IP="19.1.1.20", UDPPN=13007;
5.3 Changing the Transmission Mode on the Abis Interface

To improve the transmission resource utilization, you can change the transmission mode on the Abis interface from TDM to IP.
Prerequisite
l l l l l l
The peer end supports the Abis over IP mode. The FG2a/FG2c/GOUa/GOUc/PEUa/POUc is configured. Networking planning is complete. The license Abis over IP has been activated. The built-in PCU is used. The DPUc board is configured in MPS/EPS ofBSC6900.
Context
Changing the transmission mode on the Abis interface consists of the following scenarios:
l
Changing the transmission mode from TDM to IP over FE/GE

Issue 06 (2010-05-31)

l
Changing the transmission mode from TDM to IP over E1
Procedure
l Changing the transmission mode from TDM to IP over FE/GE 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Run the DEA BTS command to deactivate a BTS. Run the RMV BTSCONNECT command to remove the connection to the BTS. Run the ADD BRD command to add the IP-based interface board on the BSC. Perform the operations in Configuring the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer for the FG2a/FG2c/GOUa/GOUc Board. Run the ADD ADJNODE command to add an adjacent node. Run the ADD IPPATH command to configure the IP-based user plane.
NOTE
When the IP address of the BSC6900 is not on the same network segment as that of the BTS in L3 networking, you need to run the ADD IPRT command to configure the IP route at the BSC side.
7. 8. 9.
Run the MOD BTS command. In this step, set Service mode to IP and IP Phy Trans Type to IP_OVER_FE/GE. Run the ADD BTSESN command to add the ESN of the BTS.
10. Run the ADD BTSBRD command to add a board for IP transmission mode to a BTS.
NOTE
Perform this step only when the BTS is a double-transceiver BTS.
11. Run the SET BTSETHPORT command to set the port IP address of the BTS. 12. Run the SET BTSIP command. In this step, set BSC IP to the same value as Device IP or Port IP of the IP-based interface board on the BSC.
NOTE
When the IP address of the BSC6900 is not on the same network segment as that of the BTS in L3 networking, you need to run the ADD IPRT command to configure the IP route at the BTS side.
13. Run the SET BTSIPCLKPARA command to configure the IP clock for the BTS. 14. Run the ACT BTS command to activate the BTS. l Changing the transmission mode from TDM to IP over E1 1. 2. 3. Run the DEA BTS command to deactivate the BTS. Run the ADD BRD command to add the IP-based interface board on the BSC. Configure the physical layer and the data link layer.
4. 5.
5-6
Run the ADD ADJNODE command to add an adjacent node. Run the ADD IPPATH command to configure the IP-based user plane.

NOTE
When the IP address of the BSC6900 is not on the same network segment as that of the BTS in L3 networking, you need to run the ADD IPRT command to configure the IP route at the BSC side.
6. 7. 8. 9.
Run the MOD BTS command. In this step, set Service mode to IP and IP Phy Trans Type to IP_OVER_E1. Run the MOD BTSCONNECT command to connect the BTS to the port on the new IP-based interface board. Run the ADD BTSESN command to add the ESN of the BTS. Run the SET BTSIP command. In this step, set BSC IP to the same value as Device IP or Port IP of the IP-based interface board on the BSC.
10. Run the ACT BTS command to activate the BTS. ----End
Example
MOD BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=8, SERVICEMODE=IP, IPPHYTRANSTYPE=IP_OVER_FE/GE; ADD BTSBRD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=8, SRN=0, SN=3, BT=PTU; ADD ETHREDPORT: SRN=0, SN=14, PN=0; ADD ETHIP: SRN=0, SN=14, PN=0, IPINDEX=1, IPADDR="11.12.13.14", MASK="255.255.255.0"; SET BTSIPCLKPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=8, CLKPRTTYPE=HW_DEFINED, ISCLKREDUCY=UNSUPPORT, MASTERIPADDR="10.22.13.22", SYNMODE=CONSYN; ADD BTSESN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=8, MAINDEVTAB="030GMU1085000422", BAKDEVTAB="1111111111111111"; SET BTSETHPORT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=8, PN=0, IP="11.12.13.15", MASK="255.255.255.0"; SET BTSIP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=8, BTSCOMTYPE=PORTIP, BTSIP="11.12.13.15", BSCIP="11.12.13.14"; ADD ADJNODE: ANI=1, NAME="BTS3900", NODET=ABIS, BTSID=8; ACT BTS:IDTYPE=BYID,BTSID=8; ADD IPPATH: ANI=1, PATHID=0, ITFT=ABIS, PATHT=QoS, TXBW=1000, RXBW=1000, CARRYFLAG=NULL, VLANFlAG=DISABLE, PATHCHK=DISABLED;
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
5-7
6 Reconfiguring a BTS
6
About This Chapter
Reconfiguring a BTS
This chapter describes how to reconfigure a BTS. In the case of traffic imbalance, you can adjust the distribution of hardware resources. Reconfiguring BTSs can help to balance the traffic. 6.1 Changing Timeslot Assignment on a BTS Changing timeslot assignment on a BTS consists of changing the BTS multiplexing mode and changing the Abis timeslot assignment mode. 6.2 Changing the Transmission Port on a BTS You can change the transmission port on a BTS and the BTS port on the BSC6900 to optimize network performance. 6.3 Changing a BTS from Non-Separated Mode to Separated Mode When a multi-transceiver unit is used in system capacity expansion, you need to change the BTS from the non-separated mode to the separated mode. 6.4 Changing the Networking Mode of the 3900 Series Base Stations Changing the networking mode of the 3900 series base stations consists of changing the RXU chain into an RXU ring and changing an RXU ring into an RXU chain. 6.5 Changing the Combined Cabinets and Cabinet Groups Between BTSs A single BTS cabinet has limited capacity. To deploy a site of high capacity, you can configure combined cabinets and cabinet groups between BTSs. 6.6 Changing the Frequency Hopping Frequency hopping (FH) is a commonly used spread spectrum communication technology. It is characterized by strong anti-interference, strong anti-attenuation, and high security. The application of FH in the GSM can reduce the interference and increase the system capacity. 6.7 Changing the Non-Ring Topology to Ring Topology This section describes how to change the non-ring topology to ring topology for a BTS. 6.8 Adjusting the Multi-Carrier BTS Standard This section describes how to adjust the multi-carrier BTS standard. 6.9 Configuring Rehoming of the BTS with Static IP Address This section describes how to change data such as the IP address and the route of the BTS that is configured with the static IP address.
6.10 Moving BTS Data This section describes how to move BTS data within the BSC6900. If the services carried by the BSC6900 are unbalanced, you need to adjust the distribution of the hardware resources. Moving BTS data can help to balance the services. 6.11 Configuring a Custom BTS Alarm This section describes how to configure a custom BTS alarm, including the custom alarm ID, alarm port, and alarm name.
6-2
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
6.1 Changing Timeslot Assignment on a BTS

Changing timeslot assignment on a BTS consists of changing the BTS multiplexing mode and changing the Abis timeslot assignment mode. 6.1.1 Changing the Multiplexing Mode of a BTS When the traffic volume of a TDM-based BTS changes, the demand for timeslots also changes. You can change the multiplexing mode on the Abis interface of a BTS to maximize the resource utilization. 6.1.2 Changing the Abis Timeslot Assignment Mode When the traffic volume of a TDM-based BTS changes, the demand for Abis timeslots also changes. You can change the Abis timeslot assignment mode to maximize the utilization of Abis timeslot resources. 6.1.3 Manually Assigning the Abis Timeslots This describes the manual timeslot assignment on the Abis interface. Timeslot assignment on the Abis interface is required when you add BTSs, cells, TRXs, idle timeslots, and monitoring timeslots. By default, the timeslots are assigned automatically. You can also manually assign timeslots on the Abis interface if required.
6.1.1 Changing the Multiplexing Mode of a BTS

When the traffic volume of a TDM-based BTS changes, the demand for timeslots also changes. You can change the multiplexing mode on the Abis interface of a BTS to maximize the resource utilization.
Prerequisite
l
The BTS is configured and runs normally.
Context
CAUTION
Changing the BTS multiplexing mode may reset the BTS and affect the ongoing services on the BTS. Therefore, perform this operation with caution. Multiplexing mode of Abis timeslots on a BTS is classified into 64 kbit/s statistical multiplexing mode and 16 kbit/s physical multiplexing mode. In addition, the 64 kbit/s statistical multiplexing mode is further classified into the following modes: 1:1, 2:1, 3:1, 4:1, 5:1, and 6:1. It is recommended that the BTS multiplexing mode be changed in the following situations:
l l l l
A channel is changed from full rate to half rate. A channel is changed from half rate to full rate. Flex Abis Mode is changed from FIX_16K_ABIS to FLEX_ABIS. Flex Abis Mode is changed from FLEX_ABIS to FIX_16K_ABIS.
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
Procedure
Step 1 Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTS to change the multiplexing mode of a BTS. Step 2 Optional: If the command execution in Step 1 fails, run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT to add a connection to the BSC6900, and then repeat Step 1. ----End
Example
//Run the following command to add a BTS connection. ADD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, INPN=0, DESTNODE=BSC, SRN=11, SN=0, PN=1; //Run the following command to modify the BTS multiplexing mode. MOD BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, MPMODE=MODE4_1;
6.1.2 Changing the Abis Timeslot Assignment Mode

When the traffic volume of a TDM-based BTS changes, the demand for Abis timeslots also changes. You can change the Abis timeslot assignment mode to maximize the utilization of Abis timeslot resources.
Prerequisite
l
Context
CAUTION
When Flex Abis Mode is changed from FIX_16K_ABIS to FLEX_ABIS, the BTS is reset, thus affecting the BSC services. When enabling or disabling the flex Abis function, you need to change the Abis timeslot assignment mode. The Abis timeslot modes are as follows:
l l l
FIX_16K_ABIS FLEX_ABIS FIX_64K_ABIS
Procedure
Step 1 Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTS to change the Abis timeslot assignment mode. Step 2 Optional: If the command execution in Step 1 fails, run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT to add a connection to the BSC6900, and then repeat Step 1. ----End
6-4
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
Example
//Run the following command to add a BTS connection. ADD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, INPN=0, DESTNODE=BSC, SRN=11, SN=0, PN=1; //Run the following command to modify the Abis timeslot allocation mode. MOD BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, FLEXABISMODE=FLEX_ABIS;
6.1.3 Manually Assigning the Abis Timeslots

This describes the manual timeslot assignment on the Abis interface. Timeslot assignment on the Abis interface is required when you add BTSs, cells, TRXs, idle timeslots, and monitoring timeslots. By default, the timeslots are assigned automatically. You can also manually assign timeslots on the Abis interface if required.
Prerequisite
l
Context
CAUTION
Manually assigning Abis timeslots may reset the BTS and affect the ongoing services. Therefore, perform this operation with caution. Among the timeslots on the Abis interface, only the timeslot for OML can be assigned manually.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOMLTS to set Time Slot NO. and Sub Timeslot No. for the OML of the BTS. ----End
Example
//Run the following command to set the OML timeslot distribution on a BTS. SET BTSOMLTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, PN=1, TS=31, SUBTS=0;
6.2 Changing the Transmission Port on a BTS

You can change the transmission port on a BTS and the BTS port on the BSC6900 to optimize network performance.
Prerequisite
l
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
6-5
Context
CAUTION
Changing the transmission port may reset the BTS and its lower-level BTSs. Therefore, perform this operation with caution. The transmission port on a BTS needs to be changed in the following situations:
l l
A connection to the BSC6900 is added or removed. A BTS port is changed on the BSC6900 side.
Procedure
l Change the transmission port on the BTS side. 1. l Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT or RMV BTSCONNECT to add or remove a connection to the BSC. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTSCONNECT to change the BTS port on the BSC6900 side.
Change the BTS port on the BSC6900 side. 1.
----End
Example
//Run the following command to add a BTS connection. ADD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, INPN=2, DESTNODE=BSC, SRN=11, SN=0, PN=1; //Run the following command to remove a BTS connection. RMV BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, INPN=2; //Run the following command to modify the BTS port on the BSC side. MOD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, INPN=0, DESTNODE=BSC, SRN=11, SN=0, PN=2;
6.3 Changing a BTS from Non-Separated Mode to Separated Mode

When a multi-transceiver unit is used in system capacity expansion, you need to change the BTS from the non-separated mode to the separated mode.
Prerequisite
l l
The BTS is configured and runs normally. The current BTS supports the separated mode and is configured with a multi-transceiver unit.
6-6
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
Context
CAUTION
Only the BTS3012, BTS3012AE, and BTS3012 II support this operation. After this operation, the BTS is reset. Therefore, perform this operation with caution. In non-separated mode, the binding between the TRX board and the logical TRX in a BTS is fixed. In separated mode, the binding between the TRX board and the logical TRX on a BTS is dynamic. When a BTS is changed from the non-separated mode to the separated mode, a QTRU can be configured. In one QTRU, a physical TRX can be bound to six logical TRXs.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSSPTMODE to change a BTS from non-separated mode to separated mode. ----End
Example
//Run the following command to change a BTS from non-separated mode to separated mode. SET BTSSPTMODE: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=2047;
6.4 Changing the Networking Mode of the 3900 Series Base Stations
Changing the networking mode of the 3900 series base stations consists of changing the RXU chain into an RXU ring and changing an RXU ring into an RXU chain. 6.4.1 Changing RXU Chains into an RXU Ring To improve the system reliability when the traffic volume of the 3900 series base stations changes, you can change RXU chains into an RXU ring. 6.4.2 Changing an RXU Ring into an RXU Chain To expand the system capacity when the traffic volume of the 3900 series base stations changes, you can split an RXU ring into an RXU chain.
6.4.1 Changing RXU Chains into an RXU Ring

To improve the system reliability when the traffic volume of the 3900 series base stations changes, you can change RXU chains into an RXU ring.
Prerequisite
l l
The BTS is configured and runs normally. There are idle ports on the GTMU.
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
Context
The 3900 series base stations consist of the DBS3036, BTS3036, BTS3036A, DBS3900 GSM, BTS3900 GSM, BTS3900A GSM, BTS3900B GSM, BTS3900E GSM, and BTS3900L GSM. Only the DBS3036, BTS3036, BTS3036A, DBS3900 GSM, BTS3900 GSM, and BTS3900A GSM support this operation. RXU chain and RXU ring indicate the networking modes of the BBUs and RRUs. The BTS3900 GSM is taken as an example. Figure 6-1 shows an RXU chain and an RXU ring. Figure 6-1 RXU ring and RXU chain examples
RXU Chain
RXU ring
UEL P INSIDE OUTSIDE
UELP INSIDE OUTSIDE
The RXU chain can be changed into an RXU ring in the following ways:
l l
Combining two RXU chains into an RXU ring Changing an RXU chain into an RXU ring
Procedure
Step 1 Run the BSC6900 MML command CBN BTSRXUCHAIN to combine two RXU chains into an RXU ring or change an RXU chain into an RXU ring. ----End
Example
//Run the following command to change an RXU chain to an RXU ring. CBN BTSRXUCHAIN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CHAINTORING=CHAINTORING, RCN1=0, TCN=0, TSRN=0, TSN=6, TPN=3; //Run the following command to combine two RXU chains into an RXU ring. CBN BTSRXUCHAIN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CHAINTORING=COMBINECHAINS, RCN1=0, RCN2=2;
6-8
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
6.4.2 Changing an RXU Ring into an RXU Chain

To expand the system capacity when the traffic volume of the 3900 series base stations changes, you can split an RXU ring into an RXU chain.
Prerequisite
l l
The BTS is configured and runs normally. There is a breaking point in the RXU ring to be split.
Context
Only the DBS3036, BTS3036, BTS3036A, DBS3900 GSM, BTS3900 GSM, and BTS3900A GSM support this operation. RXU chain and RXU ring indicate the networking modes of the BBUs and RRUs. The BTS3900 GSM is taken as an example. Figure 6-2 shows an RXU chain and an RXU ring. Figure 6-2 RXU ring and RXU chain examples
RXU Chain
RXU ring
UEL P INSIDE OUTSIDE
UELP INSIDE OUTSIDE
Procedure
Step 1 Run the BSC6900 MML command SPT BTSRXUCHAIN to split an RXU ring into an RXU chain. ----End
Example
//Run the following command to split RXU ring 0 on a BTS named 3900 at breaking point 1. SPT BTSRXUCHAIN: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="3900", CHAINNO=0, SEPARATEPOS=1;
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
6-9
6.5 Changing the Combined Cabinets and Cabinet Groups Between BTSs
A single BTS cabinet has limited capacity. To deploy a site of high capacity, you can configure combined cabinets and cabinet groups between BTSs.
Prerequisite
l
Context
Combined cabinets and cabinet groups can be configured between BTSs to expand the capacity of a site. The common configurations of combined cabinets and cabinet groups are:
l
Combined cabinets and cabinet groups between the BTS3012 and BTS3012. For details, see Table 6-1. Combined cabinets and cabinet groups between the BTS3006Cs. For details, see Table 6-2. Cabinet groups between the BTS3012 and BTS312. For details, see Table 6-3.
Table 6-1 Mapping between the cabinet group number and the port number of the BTS3012 Cabinet Group No. 0 1 2 Port No. 0-7 8-15 16-23
Table 6-2 Mapping between the cabinet group number and the port number of the BTS3006C Cabinet Group No. 0 1 2 Port No. 03 (connected to the BSC6900), 47 (internal connection) 811 (connected to the BSC6900), 1215 (internal connection) 1619 (connected to the BSC6900), 2023 (internal connection)
6-10
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
Table 6-3 Mapping between the cabinet group number and the port number when cabinet groups are configured between the BTS3012 and BTS312 Cabinet Group No. 0 1 2 Port No. 0-7 8-11 16-19
The configuration of the combined cabinets and cabinet groups between BTS3012s is taken as an example.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT to change the configuration of combined cabinets and cabinet groups between BTS3012s. ----End
Example
//Run the following command to change the combined cabinets and cabinet groups between BTSs. ADD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, INPN=8, DESTNODE=BTS, UPBTSIDTYPE=BYID, UPBTSID=0, FPN=1;
6.6 Changing the Frequency Hopping

Frequency hopping (FH) is a commonly used spread spectrum communication technology. It is characterized by strong anti-interference, strong anti-attenuation, and high security. The application of FH in the GSM can reduce the interference and increase the system capacity. 6.6.1 Changing None FH to RF FH This section describes how to change none FH to RF FH. 6.6.2 Changing None FH to Baseband FH This section describes how to change none FH to baseband FH. 6.6.3 Changing RF FH to Baseband FH This section describes how to change RF FH to baseband FH. 6.6.4 Changing Baseband FH to RF FH This section describes how to change baseband FH to RF FH. 6.6.5 Changing RF FH to None FH This section describes how to change RF FH to none FH. 6.6.6 Changing Baseband FH to None FH This section describes how to change baseband FH to none FH. 6.6.7 Setting FH Mode to Hybrid FH This section describes how to change the FH mode to hybrid FH. 6.6.8 Changing Hybrid FH to None FH
This section describes how to change hybrid FH to none FH.
6.6.1 Changing None FH to RF FH

This section describes how to change none FH to RF FH.
Prerequisite
l l
The BTS is configured and runs normally. The cell must be configured with at least two TRXs.
Context
After the FH mode of a none FH cell is changed to RF FH, the system automatically changes the FH mode of all the TRXs in the cell to RF FH.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA GCELL to deactivate the cell. Step 2 Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELLMAGRP to add an FH group. In this step, set Index Type to BYID(By Index), and then set Cell Index, Hop Index, Hop Mode, and Frequency. Note that RF_FH(RF_FH) needs to be selected under Hop Mode for the FH group. Step 3 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPTP to configure the FH type of a cell. In this step, select the cell to be configured by Cell Index or Cell Name and set Frequency Hopping Mode of the cell to RF_FH(RF frequency hopping). Step 4 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXHOP to configure the FH type of a TRX by setting TRX ID and Hop Type. Step 5 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANHOP repeatedly to add Channel Hop Index and Channel MAIO.
NOTE
When the same FH group is used for the TRXs, the MAIO of the same channel of the TRXs must be different.
Step 6 Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT GCELL to activate the cell. ----End
6.6.2 Changing None FH to Baseband FH

This section describes how to change none FH to baseband FH.
Prerequisite
l l
The BTS is configured and supports baseband FH. The cell must be configured with at least two TRXs.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA GCELL to deactivate the cell.
Step 2 Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELLMAGRP to add an FH group. In this step, set Index Type to BYID(By Index), and then set Cell Index, Hop Index, Hop Mode, and Frequency. Note that BaseBand_FH(BaseBand_FH) needs to be selected under Hop Mode for the FH group. Step 3 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPTP to configure the FH type of a cell. Select the cell to be configured by Cell Index or Cell Name and set Frequency Hopping Mode of the cell to BaseBand_FH(Baseband frequency hopping). Step 4 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXHOP to configure the FH type of a TRX by setting TRX ID and Hop Type. Step 5 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANHOP repeatedly to add Channel Hop Index and Channel MAIO.
NOTE
6.6.3 Changing RF FH to Baseband FH

This section describes how to change RF FH to baseband FH.
Prerequisite
l l
The BTS is configured and supports baseband FH. The cell must be configured with at least two TRXs.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA GCELL to deactivate the cell. Step 2 Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELLMAGRP to modify the FH group of a cell. Note that BaseBand_FH(BaseBand_FH) needs to be selected under Hop Mode. Step 3 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPTP to configure the FH type of a cell. In this step, select the cell to be configured by Cell Index or Cell Name and set Frequency Hopping Mode of the cell to BaseBand_FH(Baseband frequency hopping). Step 4 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXHOP to set the FH type of a TRX. In this step, set TRX ID and Hop Type. Note that BaseBand_FH(Baseband_FH) needs to be selected under Hop Type for the TRX. Step 5 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANHOP repeatedly to set Channel Hop Index and Channel MAIO.
NOTE
6.6.4 Changing Baseband FH to RF FH

This section describes how to change baseband FH to RF FH.
Prerequisite
l l
Procedure
Step 1 Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA GCELL to deactivate the cell. Step 2 Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELLMAGRP to modify the FH group of a cell. Note that RF_FH(RF FH) needs to be selected under Hop Mode. Step 3 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPTP to configure the FH type of a cell. Select the cell to be configured by Cell Index or Cell Name and set Frequency Hopping Mode of the cell to RF_FH(RF frequency hopping). Step 4 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXHOP to set the FH type of a TRX. In this step, set TRX ID and Hop Type. Note that RF_FH(RF Frequency Hopping) needs to be selected under Hop Type for the TRX. Step 5 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANHOP repeatedly to add Channel Hop Index and Channel MAIO.
NOTE
6.6.5 Changing RF FH to None FH

This section describes how to change RF FH to none FH.
Prerequisite
None.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA GCELL to deactivate the cell. Step 2 Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV GCELLMAGRP to remove the FH group of a cell. Step 3 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPTP to configure the FH type of a cell. Select the cell to be configured by Cell Index or Cell Name and set Frequency Hopping Mode of the cell to NO_FH(No frequency hopping). Step 4 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXHOP to set the FH type of a TRX. In this step, set TRX ID and Hop Type. Note that NO_FH(No Frequency Hopping) needs to be selected under Hop Type for the TRX.
Step 5 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANHOP. In this step, set Channel Hop Index to 255 and Channel MAIO to 0. Step 6 Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT GCELL to activate the cell. ----End
6.6.6 Changing Baseband FH to None FH

This section describes how to change baseband FH to none FH.
Prerequisite
None.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA GCELL to deactivate the cell. Step 2 Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV GCELLMAGRP to remove the FH group of a cell. Step 3 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPTP to set the FH type of a cell. Select the cell to be configured by Cell Index or Cell Name and set Frequency Hopping Mode of the cell to NO_FH(No frequency hopping). Step 4 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXHOP to set the FH type of a TRX. In this step, set TRX ID and Hop Type. Note that NO_FH(No Frequency Hopping) needs to be selected under Hop Type for the TRX. Step 5 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANHOP. In this step, set Channel Hop Index to 255 and Channel MAIO to 0. Step 6 Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT GCELL to activate the cell. ----End
6.6.7 Setting FH Mode to Hybrid FH

This section describes how to change the FH mode to hybrid FH.
Prerequisite
l l
Procedure
Step 1 Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA GCELL to deactivate the cell. Step 2 Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELLMAGRP to add an FH group. In this step, set Index Type to BYID(By Index), and then set Cell Index, Hop Index, Hop Mode, and Frequency. Note that RF_FH(RF_FH) or BaseBand_FH(BaseBand_FH) needs to be selected under Hop Mode for the FH group. To add more FH groups, repeat this step.
Step 3 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPTP to set the FH type of a cell. Select the cell to be configured by Cell Index or Cell Name and set Frequency Hopping Mode of the cell to Hybrid_FH(Hybrid frequency hopping). Step 4 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXHOP to set the FH type of a TRX. In this step, set TRX ID and Hop Type. Step 5 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANHOP repeatedly to set Channel Hop Index and Channel MAIO.
NOTE
l l
When the same FH group is used for the TRXs, the MAIO of the same channel of the TRXs must be different. The Hop Mode of the FH group specified by the Channel Hop Index must be consistent with the Hop Type.
6.6.8 Changing Hybrid FH to None FH

This section describes how to change hybrid FH to none FH.
Prerequisite
None.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA GCELL to deactivate the cell. Step 2 Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV GCELLMAGRP to remove the FH group of a cell. Step 3 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPTP to set the FH type of a cell. Select the cell to be configured by Cell Index or Cell Name and set Frequency Hopping Mode of the cell to NO_FH(No frequency hopping). Step 4 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXHOP to set the FH type of a TRX. In this step, set TRX ID and Hop Type. Note that NO_FH(No Frequency Hopping) needs to be selected under Hop Type for the TRX. Step 5 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANHOP. In this step, set Channel Hop Index to 255 and Channel MAIO to 0. Step 6 Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT GCELL to activate the cell. ----End
6.7 Changing the Non-Ring Topology to Ring Topology

This section describes how to change the non-ring topology to ring topology for a BTS.
Prerequisite
l
The EIUa/OIUa/PEUa board is configured.

6-16

l l
The BTSs are configured in non-ring topology. The BTSs must be in the chain topology, and port 1 of the upper-level BTS must be connected to port 0 of the lower-level BTS.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate the configuration of a BTS. Step 2 Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTS to set Config ring to YES. Step 3 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRINGATTR to set the ring topology attributes of the BTS. ----End
6.8 Adjusting the Multi-Carrier BTS Standard

This section describes how to adjust the multi-carrier BTS standard.
Context
By default, the CLASS2 standard is used as the GSM multi-carrier BTS standard. If the CLASS0 standard is recommended at a local site, adjust the standard accordingly.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate the BTS. Step 2 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSPSUFP to set the GSM multi-carrier BTS standard. In this step,
l l
set Board Parameter Configuration Enabled to YES(YES). Then adjust GSM Multi Carrier BTS Standard as required.
----End
Example
//Deactivate the BTS. DEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1; //Set the parameters related to Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSU Failure. //Assume that the BTS index is 1 and that GSM Multi Carrier BTS Standard needs to be set to CLASS0(Class0). Do as follows: SET BTSPSUFP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, CFGFLAG=YES, MCSTANDARD=CLASS0;
6.9 Configuring Rehoming of the BTS with Static IP Address

This section describes how to change data such as the IP address and the route of the BTS that is configured with the static IP address.
Prerequisite
l
Only the BTS in IP transmission mode can undergo static IP rehoming.
Context
According to transmission mode, static IP rehoming can be classified into the following scenarios:
l l l
IP over FE/GE is used. IP over E1 is used in an MLPPP (MP) site. IP over E1 is used in a PPP site.
Procedure
l IP over FE/GE is used. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. l Run the BSC6900 MML command IMP BTSIPPARA to import the basic IP parameters of the BTS. Run the BSC6900 MML command IMP BTSDEVIP to import the IP addresses of the BTS Ethernet port. Run the BSC6900 MML command IMP BTSIPRT to import the BTS routes. Run the BSC6900 MML command IMP BTSVLAN to import the parameters related to the BTS VLAN. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTSIMPDATA to activate the imported data. Run the BSC6900 MML command IMP BTSIPPARA to import the basic IP parameters of the BTS. Run the BSC6900 MML command IMP BTSMPGRP to import the parameters related to the BTS MP group. Run the BSC6900 MML command IMP BTSMPLNK to import the parameters related to the BTS MP links. Run the BSC6900 MML command IMP BTSIPRT to import the BTS routes. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTSIMPDATA to activate the imported data. Run the BSC6900 MML command IMP BTSIPPARA to import the basic IP parameters of the BTS. Run the BSC6900 MML command IMP BTSPPPLNK to import the parameters related to the BTS PPP link. Run the BSC6900 MML command IMP BTSIPRT to import the BTS routes. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTSIMPDATA to activate the imported data.
IP over E1 is used in an MP site. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
IP over E1 is used in a PPP site. 1. 2. 3. 4.
----End
6-18
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
6.10 Moving BTS Data

This section describes how to move BTS data within the BSC6900. If the services carried by the BSC6900 are unbalanced, you need to adjust the distribution of the hardware resources. Moving BTS data can help to balance the services.
Prerequisite
l l
There are idle ports on the target BTS. The timeslot resources on the ports of the target BTS can carry the services of the lowerlevel BTS.
Context
When moving BTS data within the BSC6900, pay attention to the following points:
l
The IP-based BTS can only be moved between different interface boards within the BSC6900. It cannot be configured as a lower-level BTS under another BTS. The HDLC-based BTS configured as a lower-level BTS must have connection with the PEUa through the active port. The TDM-based BTS configured as a lower-level BTS must have connection with the EIUa/OIUa through the active port. A maximum of seven levels of cascaded BTSs are allowed. An upper-level BTS cannot be moved to a lower-level BTS. When moving a site, you need to modify the internal connections. The timeslot assignment mode and the multiplexing mode of the BTS to be moved must match those of the upper-level BTS to which it moves. If the timeslot assignment mode of the upper-level BTS is Fix Abis, the timeslot assignment mode of the lower-level BTS must be Fix Abis. If the timeslot assignment mode of the upper-level BTS is Flex Abis, the timeslot assignment mode of the lower-level BTS must be set to Flex Abis or SemiSolid. When a bypass BTS is moved and configured as a cascaded BTS under a non-bypass BTS, the bypass BTS must be changed to a non-bypass BTS. When a bypass BTS is moved and configured as a cascaded BTS under a bypass BTS, the moved bypass BTS must be changed to a non-bypass BTS if it is a level 6 or a higher-level BTS. When a non-bypass BTS is moved and configured as a cascaded BTS under a bypass BTS, the moved BTS must be changed to a bypass BTS if it is a level 6 or a higher-level BTS. If a BTS on a ring is moved to another ring or configured as a cascaded BTS under a BTS on the same ring, the moved BTS must be set to a tributary BTS on the ring. If a BTS on a ring is moved and configured as a cascaded BTS under a common BTS or under a BSC, the moved BTS must be set to a common BTS. If a common BTS is moved and configured as a cascaded BTS under a BTS on a ring or under a tributary BTS on the ring, the moved BTS must be set to a tributary BTS on the ring.
l l l l
Procedure
l When the transmission mode is TDM/HDLC 1. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate the BTS. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTSCONNECT to change the transmission mode on the BTS side.
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
3. l 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate the BTS. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate the BTS. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSETHPORT to set the Ethernet port on a BTS. In this step, set port attributes of the BTS. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSIP to set the IP address of the BTS. Optional: When the BSC6900 and the BTS are on different network segments, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTSIPRT to modify the IP route to the BTS. Optional: If you need to modify the VLAN of the BTS, run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSVLAN to modify the VLAN ID and VLAN priority on the BTS side. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate the BTS. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate the BTS. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTSCONNECT to modify the transmission mode on the BTS side. Check the upper layer application type of E1/T1, and the perform as follows: If the upper layer application type of E1/T1 is... PPP link Then... Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTSPPPLNK to modify the PPP link on the BTS side. 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTSMPGRP to modify the MLPPP link group on the BTS side. 2. If you need to modify the PPP link of the BTS, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTSMPLNK.
When the transmission mode is IP over FE/GE
6. l 1. 2. 3.
When the transmission mode is IP over E1
MLPPP link group
4. 5. ----End
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSIP to set the IP address of the BTS. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to change the transmission mode on the BTS side.
6.11 Configuring a Custom BTS Alarm

This section describes how to configure a custom BTS alarm, including the custom alarm ID, alarm port, and alarm name.
Prerequisite
l l
The board and the cable corresponding to the external alarm are installed. The board corresponding to the external alarm is configured.
6-20
Context
The following table lists the data to be negotiated and planned for configuring a custom BTS alarm. Table 6-4 Data to be negotiated and planned for configuring a custom BTS alarm Parameter Site Name Cabinet No. Subrack No. Slot No. Port No. Port switch Port type Alarm level Alarm ID Alarm name Alarm severity Event type Example BTS01 0 0 6 1 OPEN BOOL HIGH 65133 Smoke alarm Critical Env Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning
NOTE
Each type of environment alarm corresponds to a unique environment alarm ID. The environment alarm IDs of the SingleRAN base stations range from 65033 to 65233. The environment alarm IDs of the nonSingleRAN base stations range from 65384 to 65533.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSENVALMPORT to configure the input port of the BTS environment alarm signals. Step 2 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET ENVALMPARA. In this step, set Alarm ID, Alarm Name, Alarm Severity, and Event Type. ----End
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
6-21
7 Reconfiguring the GSM Network
Reconfiguring the GSM Network
About This Chapter

This chapter describes how to reconfigure the running base station subsystem (BSS) as required. 7.1 Configuring the Network Optimization Parameters of Multiple Cells in Batches To modify the settings of the network optimization parameters such as frequencies, power control parameters, and power levels of multiple cells at the same time, batch configuration can be applied. 7.2 Reconfiguring a Cell You can modify the cell parameter settings and the neighboring cell relations according to the requirements of service adjustment and capacity expansion. 7.3 Reconfiguring Channels When new features, such as half rate and dynamic conversion between TCHs and SDCCHs, are activated on the BSC, you can modify channel attributes to optimize network performance.
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
7-1
7.1 Configuring the Network Optimization Parameters of Multiple Cells in Batches

To modify the settings of the network optimization parameters such as frequencies, power control parameters, and power levels of multiple cells at the same time, batch configuration can be applied.
Prerequisite
l l l
The LMT runs normally. The LMT communicates with the BSC properly. The BTS communicates with the BSC properly.
Context
Batch configuration of network optimization parameters of multiple cells improves the configuration efficiency.
Procedure
Step 1 Get ready the command script of configuring the network optimization parameters of multiple cells in batches, and save the script in the .txt format to the local PC. Step 2 Run the LCK CMCTRL command to lock the system configuration rights.
NOTE
Before the batch execution of the command script, lock the configuration rights to prevent the conflict with other commands.
Step 3 Run the RUN BATCHFILE command to execute the command script in batches. Step 4 Run the ULK CMCTRL command to release the system configuration rights. ----End
Example
/*Lock the system configuration rights*/
LCK CMCTRL: RSNDES=UPGRADE;
/*Execute the command script bat.txt in batches and save the result to the file rst.txt*/
RUN BATCHFILE:SRCF="bat.txt",TYPE=ALL_END_RETURN,RSTF="rst.txt",RCDT=REC_ERR;
/*Release the system configuration rights*/

ULK CMCTRL:;
7.2 Reconfiguring a Cell

You can modify the cell parameter settings and the neighboring cell relations according to the requirements of service adjustment and capacity expansion.
7-2
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
7.2.1 Changing the TRX Power You can change the TRX power in a cell when the cell coverage needs to be adjusted according to network optimization. 7.2.2 Changing TRX Assignment in a Cell To balance traffic load in different cells under one BTS without adding TRXs, you can release the TRX resources in a low-traffic cell, and then assign the TRX resources to a high-traffic cell. 7.2.3 Changing TRX Frequencies When co-channel interference or adjacent-channel interference is generated in a cell, or when frequency replanning is required in the network, you need to change the TRX frequencies. 7.2.4 Changing Neighboring Cell Relations When a cell has redundant neighboring cells or missing neighboring cells, traffic imbalance may occur among cells. Therefore, you need to change the neighboring cell relations. If call drops occur frequently during call handover from a cell to a neighboring cell, you can modify the settings of neighboring cell relation parameters.
7.2.1 Changing the TRX Power

You can change the TRX power in a cell when the cell coverage needs to be adjusted according to network optimization.
Prerequisite
l l l
Context
CAUTION
Changing the TRX power in a cell may affect the ongoing calls in the cell. Therefore, perform this operation with caution.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the SET GTRXDEV command to change the TRX power in a cell. ----End
Example
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, POWL=5;
7.2.2 Changing TRX Assignment in a Cell

To balance traffic load in different cells under one BTS without adding TRXs, you can release the TRX resources in a low-traffic cell, and then assign the TRX resources to a high-traffic cell.
Prerequisite
l l l
Context
CAUTION
If timeslots are insufficient after TRXs are added to a cell, run the TID BTSABISTS command to arrange timeslots. Running this command affects the services of the BTS that serves the cell and the services of the lower-level BTSs. After a TRX is removed, the TRX board does not work. After the last TRX of a cabinet group without any configuration data is removed, the cabinet group does not exist in the LMT. The BCCH TRX board cannot be removed.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the RMV GTRX command to remove the logical TRX in a low-traffic cell. Step 2 Run the ADD GTRX command to add a logical TRX. Step 3 Run the ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD command to bind the new logical TRX with the TRX board. Step 4 Run the ACT GTRX command to activate the new logical TRX. ----End
Example
/*Remove a TRX*/
RMV GTRX: TRXID=0;
/*Add a logical TRX*/

ADD GTRX: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, TRXID=0, FREQ=49;
/*Bind the logical TRX with the TRX board*/

ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD: TRXID=0, TRXTP=TRU, TRXPN=0, SRN=0, SN=0;
/*Activate the new logical TRX*/

ACT GTRX: TRXID=0;
7.2.3 Changing TRX Frequencies

When co-channel interference or adjacent-channel interference is generated in a cell, or when frequency replanning is required in the network, you need to change the TRX frequencies.
Prerequisite
l l l
Context
NOTE
If you change the TRX frequencies that do not participate in frequency hopping, the cell is not reset. If you change the TRX frequencies that participate in frequency hopping or the BCCH TRX frequency, the cell is reset 10 seconds later. That is, the BSC6900 resets the cell 10 seconds after frequencies are changed. If the services in the cell are not handed over to another cell within 10 seconds, the services in the cell are affected.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the ADD GCELLFREQ command to add a TRX frequency based on the network planning. Step 2 Run the MOD GTRX command to change the TRX frequencies. ----End
Example
ADD GCELLFREQ: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FREQ1=50, FREQ2=75; MOD GTRX: TRXID=0, FREQ=50;
7.2.4 Changing Neighboring Cell Relations

When a cell has redundant neighboring cells or missing neighboring cells, traffic imbalance may occur among cells. Therefore, you need to change the neighboring cell relations. If call drops occur frequently during call handover from a cell to a neighboring cell, you can modify the settings of neighboring cell relation parameters.
Prerequisite
l l l
Context
Redundant neighboring cell: If cell A is a neighboring cell of cell B but the services in cell B are never or rarely handed over to cell A, cell A is a redundant neighboring cell. Missing neighboring cell: If cell A needs to have cell B as its neighboring cell for service handover but cell B is not configured as a neighboring cell of cell A, cell B is a missing neighboring cell. Through the analysis of related performance measurement counters, you can determine whether a cell is a redundant neighboring cell or missing neighboring cell of the originating cell.

l
You can determine whether a cell is a redundant neighboring cell of the originating cell by measuring the counters related to Outgoing Internal Inter-Cell Handover Measurement per Cell. You can determine whether a cell is a missing neighboring cell of the originating cell by measuring the counters related to Neighbor Cell Level Measurement per Cell.
Procedure
l If a cell has redundant bidirectional neighboring cells, remove them from the neighboring cell list of the cell. 1. Run the RMV G2GNCELL command to remove a redundant neighboring cell.
NOTE
Running this command can add or remove the neighboring cell only in the originating cell. For redundant bidirectional neighboring cells, you need to perform Step 1 in the originating cell and the neighboring cell.
If a cell has redundant unidirectional neighboring cells, remove them from the neighboring cell list of the originating cell. 1. 2. Run the RMV G2GNCELL command to remove the redundant neighboring 2G cells. Run the RMV G3GNCELL command to remove the redundant neighboring 3G cells.
If there is a missing bidirectional neighboring cell, add it to the neighboring cell list of the originating cell. 1. Run the ADD G2GNCELL command to add a missing neighboring 2G cell. If there is a missing unidirectional neighboring cell, add it to the neighboring cell list of this cell. 1. 2. Run the ADD G2GNCELL command to add a missing neighboring 2G cell. Run the ADD G3GNCELL command to add a missing neighboring 3G cell.
If call drops occur frequently during call handover from a cell to a neighboring cell, you need to modify the settings of the parameters related to neighboring cell relations. 1. 2. Run the MOD G2GNCELL command to modify the settings of the parameters related to neighboring relations between 2G cells. Run the MOD G3GNCELL command to modify the settings of the parameters related to neighboring relations between 3G cells.
----End
Example
/*Remove redundant bidirectional neighboring cells*/
RMV G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1; RMV G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=1, NBR2GNCELLID=0;
/*Remove redundant unidirectional neighboring cells*/

RMV G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1; RMV G3GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC3GNCELLID=0, NBR3GNCELLID=5048;
/*Add missing bidirectional neighboring cells*/

ADD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1; ADD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=1, NBR2GNCELLID=0;
/*Add missing unidirectional neighboring cells*/

ADD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1; ADD G3GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC3GNCELLID=0, NBR3GNCELLID=5048;
/*Modify the settings of the parameters related to neighboring cell relations*/

MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1, MINOFFSET=5; MOD G3GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYNAME, SRC3GNCELLNAME="cell1", NBR3GNCELLNAME="TDD-0", RSCPOFF=52, ECNOOFF=35;
7.3 Reconfiguring Channels

When new features, such as half rate and dynamic conversion between TCHs and SDCCHs, are activated on the BSC, you can modify channel attributes to optimize network performance. 7.3.1 Converting TCHs and SDCCHs You can modify channel attributes to achieve the dynamic conversion between the TCH and the SDCCH and to optimize network performance. 7.3.2 Converting TCHs Between Full Rate and Half Rate You can modify channel attributes to achieve the dynamic conversion between full-rate TCHs and half-rate TCHs and thus to optimize network performance.
7.3.1 Converting TCHs and SDCCHs

You can modify channel attributes to achieve the dynamic conversion between the TCH and the SDCCH and to optimize network performance.
Prerequisite
l l l
Context
When the number of users in a cell increases substantially, some users may not be able to access the network because they cannot obtain SDCCHs. In this case, you need to convert some TCHs to SDCCHs to ensure that all the users can access the network. When the traffic load decreases, the TCHs used as SDCCHs are converted back to TCHs. The dynamic conversion between TCHs and SDCCHs can increase the system capacity and reduce the dependency on the calculation of SDCCHs within a cell. Before the conversion from the TCHF to the SDCCH is initiated, the number of idle SDCCHs must be smaller than or equal to Idle SDCCH Threshold N1. In addition, the following conditions must be met:
l l
The cell supports the dynamic conversion between TCHs and SDCCHs. (Number of idle TCHFs + number of idle TCHHs/2) 4 or number of TRXs in the cell, and the cell must have at least one idle TCHF. Current number of SDCCHs in the cell + 8 maximum number of SDCCHs in the cell.
The process of converting the SDCCH to the TCH is as follows: 1.

Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
Each cell is configured with a counter.

2.
Each time when the TCH is converted to the SDCCH, the counter is set to TCH Minimum Recovery Time. The value of the counter is adjusted every three seconds.
l
If the number of idle SDCCHs > 8 + Idle SDCCH Threshold N1, the value of the counter is subtracted by 3. If the number of current idle SDCCHs < 8 + Idle SDCCH Threshold N1, the value of the counter is added by 12, but the value of the counter should not exceed TCH Minimum Recovery Time. If the number of idle SDCCHs = 8 + Idle SDCCH Threshold N1, the value of the counter remains unchanged.
3.
If the value of the counter is smaller than or equal to 0 after adjustment, the SDCCH is converted to the TCH.
NOTE
TCH Minimum Recovery Time indicates the shortest duration for converting an SDCCH back to a TCH.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the SET GCELLBASICPARA command to set SDCCH Dynamic Allocation Allowed to YES. Step 2 Run the SET GCELLCHMGBASIC command to set Idle SDCCH Threshold N1 and TCH Minimum Recovery Time. ----End
Example
/*Set SDCCH Dynamic Allocation Allowed to YES*/
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SDDYN=YES;
/*Set Idle SDCCH Threshold N1 to 3, Cell SDCCH Channel Maximum to 100, and TCH Minimum Recovery Time to 80*/
SET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, IDLESDTHRES=3, CELLMAXSD=100, MINRESTIMETCH=80;
7.3.2 Converting TCHs Between Full Rate and Half Rate

You can modify channel attributes to achieve the dynamic conversion between full-rate TCHs and half-rate TCHs and thus to optimize network performance.
Prerequisite
l l l
Context
When the traffic volume increases, the half-rate feature can be applied to the CS service to double the number of users without adding TRXs. This helps to fully utilize the existing network resources and reduce costs.
When the half-rate CS feature is activated, you need to set Enhanced TCH Adjust Allowed to YES to avoid timeslot arrangement for half-rate TCHs.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the SET GTRXDEV command to set TCH Rate Adjust Allow to YES. Step 2 Run the SET GCELLCHMGAD command to set TCH Traffic Busy Threshold. Step 3 Run the SET GCELLCHMGBASIC command to set Enhanced TCH Adjust Allowed to YES. ----End
Example
/*Set TCH Rate Adjust Allow to YES*/
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, TCHAJFLAG=YES;
/*Set TCH Traffic Busy Threshold*/

SET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TCHBUSYTHRES=60;
/*Set Enhanced TCH Adjust Allowed to YES*/

SET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ENTCHADJALLOW=YES;
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
7-9
8 Configuring GSM Features
8
About This Chapter
Configuring GSM Features
This section describes how to configure the GSM features of the BSC6900 GSM. 8.1 Overview of Feature Configuration GSM features are classified into basic and optional features. Basic features are not licensecontrolled and therefore do not require license activation before use. On the contrary, optional features are license-controlled and therefore require license activation before use. 8.2 Activating the GSM License This describes how to activate the GSM license. 8.3 Configuring the Emergency Call Service (TS12) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature: GBFD-110202 Emergency Call Service (TS12). 8.4 Configuring the IMSI Detach This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature: GBFD-110302 IMSI Detach. 8.5 Configuring the Direct Retry This chapter describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110607 Directed Retry. 8.6 Configuring the Assignment and Immediate Assignment This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature: Assignment and Immediate Assignment (Feature ID: GBFD-110502). 8.7 Configuring the Call Reestablishment This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110503 Call Reestablishment. 8.8 Configuring the TCH Re-assignment This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-112501 TCH Re-assignment. 8.9 Configuring Radio Link Management
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
8-1
This section describes how to activate, verify, deactivate the link error indication procedure of the basic feature GBFD-111002 Radio Link Management. Other procedures of the feature need not be configured. 8.10 Configuring Combined Cabinets and Cabinet Groups of BTSs This section describes how to activate, verify, or deactivate the basic features BTS Combined Cabinet (feature ID: GBFD-111501) and BTS Hybrid Cabinet Group (feature ID: GBFD-111502). 8.11 Configuring Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSU Failure This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-117804 Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSU Failure. 8.12 Configuring the System Information Sending This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature: GBFD-111101 System Information Sending. 8.13 Configuring Daylight Saving Time This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature Daylight Saving Time (DST). 8.14 Configuring Signaling Transport Point (STP) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-111806 STP (Signaling Transport Point). 8.15 Configuring 14-Digit Signaling Point Code This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-111802 14-Digit signaling point code. 8.16 Configuring the DRX This section describes how to configure and verify the DRX. 8.17 Configuring BTS Power Management This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-111601 BTS Power Management. 8.18 Configuring Connection with TMA This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210601 Connection with TMA (Tower Mounted Amplifier). 8.19 Configuring Remote Electrical Tilt This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210602 Remote Electrical Tilt. 8.20 Configuring 2-Antenna Receive Diversity This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210604 2-Antenna Receive Diversity. 8.21 Configuring Base Station Clock This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210501 BTS Clock. 8.22 Configuring PBT(Power Boost Technology) This section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-115901 PBT(Power Boost Technology). 8.23 Configuring Transmit Diversity This section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-115902 Transmit Diversity.
8.24 Configuring Four-Way Receive Diversity This section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-115903 Four-Way Receive Diversity. The four-way receive diversity combines the four-way receive signals to optimize the quality of uplink signals. 8.25 Configuring Dynamic Transmit Diversity This section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-118101 Dynamic Transmit Diversity. 8.26 Configuring Dynamic PBT This section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-118102 Dynamic PBT. 8.27 Configuring Co-BCCH Cell This section desribes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114501 Co-BCCH Cell. Co-BCCH cell increases the traffic capacity of a cell, reduces handovers and interference, and implements the continuous coverage and sparse coverage in hot spots. 8.28 Configuring Multi-band Sharing One BSC This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114401 Multi-band Sharing One BSC. 8.29 Configuring Enhanced Dual-Band Network This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114402 Enhanced Dual-Band Network. 8.30 Configuring Flex MAIO This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature GBFD-117001 Flex Mobile Allocation Index Offset (MAIO). 8.31 Configuring ICC This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115801 ICC. 8.32 Configuring EICC This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115821 EICC. 8.33 Configuring Frequency Hopping This section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping. The function consists of radio frequency (RF) frequency hopping (FH) and baseband FH. 8.34 Configuring BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping This section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-113702 BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping. 8.35 Configuring Antenna Frequency Hopping This section describes how to activate the optional feature GBFD-113703 Antenna Frequency Hopping. 8.36 Configuring BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature GBFD-118001 BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing. 8.37 Configuring the IBCA This section describes how to configure the Interference Based Channel Allocation (IBCA). 8.38 Configuring Soft-Synchronized Network
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature GBFD-118201 SoftSynchronized Network. 8.39 Configuring BTS GPS Synchronization This section describes how to activate the optional feature GBFD-510401 BTS GPS Synchronization. 8.40 Configuring HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-117601 HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm. 8.41 Configuring the DTX This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114801 DTX. 8.42 Configuring TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111602 TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown. 8.43 Configuring Intelligent Combiner Bypass This section describes how to activate the optional feature GBFD-111604 Intelligent Combiner Bypass. 8.44 Configuring Active Backup Power Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111605 Active Backup Power Control. 8.45 Configuring Power Optimization Based on Channel Type This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111606 Power Optimization Based on Channel Type. 8.46 Configuring PSU Smart Control This section describes how to activate the optional feature GBFD-111608 PSU Smart Control. 8.47 Configuring Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111609 Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization. 8.48 Configuring Dynamic Cell Power Off This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature GBFD-111610 Dynamic Cell Power Off. 8.49 Configuring TRX Working Voltage Adjustment This section describes how to activate the optional feature GBFD-111611 Configuring TRX Working Voltage Adjustment. 8.50 Configuring Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Adjustment This section describes how to activate the optional feature GBFD-111612 Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Adjustment. 8.51 Configuring Flex Abis This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117301 Flex Abis. 8.52 Configuring BTS Local Switch This section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-117702 BTS Local Switch. 8.53 Configuring the Abis Transmission Optimization
This section describes how to configure the Abis transmission optimization. 8.54 Configuring Flex Ater This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate Flex Ater. 8.55 Configuring BSC Local Switch This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117701 BSC Local Switch. 8.56 Configuring Ater Compression Transmission This section describes how to configure the GBFD-116902 Ater Compression Transmission. 8.57 Configuring BTS Ring Topology This section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-117801 BTS Ring Topology. 8.58 Configuring the TRX Mutual Aid This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113801 TRX Mutual Aid. 8.59 Configuring the MSC Pool This section describes how to configure the MSC pool. The MSCs in the pool enable load sharing and resource sharing for even distribution of traffic in the MSC pool, thus reducing inter-MSC handovers and achieving redundancy backup. 8.60 Configuring the SGSN Pool This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119701 SGSN Pool. 8.61 Configuring Abis Bypass This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116601 Abis Bypass. 8.62 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117803 Abis Transmission Backup. 8.63 Configuring the BSC Node Redundancy This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113725 BSC Node Redundancy. 8.64 Configuring the TC Pool This section describes how to configure and verify the TC pool. 8.65 Configuring Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510101 Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC). 8.66 Configuring Fast Move Handover This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510102 Fast Move Handover. 8.67 Configuring Chain Cell Handover This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510103 Chain Cell Handover. 8.68 Configuring Multi-Site Cell This section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-510104 Multi-Site Cell.
8.69 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Interoperability This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114301 GSM/WCDMA Interoperability. 8.70 Configuring the Fast 3G Reselection at 2G CS Call Release This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114325 Fast 3G Reselection at 2G CS Call Release. 8.71 Configuring the Satellite Transmission In remote mountainous areas or sparsely populated plains, satellite transmission can be applied to achieve wide coverage, long transmission distance, and flexible link scheduling. 8.72 Configuring High Speed Signaling This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115201 High Speed Signaling. 8.73 Configuring Local Multiple Signaling Points This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115301 Local Multiple Signaling Points. 8.74 Configuring Semi-Permanent Connection This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114701 Semi-Permanent Connection. 8.75 Configuring End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116401 End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing. 8.76 Configuring Active Power Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-117602 Active Power Control. 8.77 Configuring Ciphering This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate ciphering. 8.78 Configuring Speech Version This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the speech version. 8.79 Configuring Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113402 Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR. 8.80 Configuring the Cell Broadcast Through the cell broadcast service, the mobile operator can broadcast specified short messages in the cells controlled by one or more BTSs in the mobile network. All the MSs in the cells can receive the short messages. 8.81 Configuring Automatic Level Control (ALC) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature GBFD-115601 Automatic Level Control (ALC). 8.82 Configuring Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature GBFD-115602 Acoustic Echo Cancellation(AEC). 8.83 Configuring the ANR This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature GBFD-115603 automatic noise restraint (ANR).
8.84 Configuring TFO This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature GBFD-115701 Tandem Free Operation (TFO). 8.85 Configuring Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature GBFD-115703 Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC) on the DPUa/DPUb/DPUc board. 8.86 Configuring Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature GBFD-115704 Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC). 8.87 Configuring the Voice Quality Index This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116801 Voice Quality Index. 8.88 Configuring of Enhanced Measurement Report This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117501 Configuring of Enhanced Measurement Report. 8.89 Configuring Dynamic HRFR Adaptation This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115522 Dynamic HR/FR Adaptation. 8.90 Configuring AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115506 AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment. 8.91 Configuring the WB AMR This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115507 WB AMR. 8.92 Configuring Streaming QoS(GBR) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119901 Streaming QoS(GBR). 8.93 Configuring QoS ARP/THP This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119902 QoS ARP/THP. 8.94 Configuring PS Active Package Management This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119904 PS Active Package Management. 8.95 Configuring PoC QoS This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119905 PoC QoS. 8.96 Configuring NC2 This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116201 Network Control Mode 2 (NC2). 8.97 Configuring the NACC This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116301 Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC). 8.98 Configuring GPRS This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114101 GPRS.
8.99 Configruing Network Operation Mode I This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510001 Network Operation Mode I. 8.100 Configuring Packet Performance Improvement This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119201 Packet Performance Improvement. 8.101 Configuring the Feature of Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS Coding This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119204 Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS Coding. 8.102 Configuring Packet Channel Dispatching This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119302 Packet Channel Dispatching. 8.103 Configuring BSS Paging Coordination This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119305 BSS Paging Coordination. 8.104 Configuring PS Handover This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119502 PS Handover. 8.105 Configuring EDA This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119401 Extended Dynamic Allocation (EDA). 8.106 Configuring PDCH Dynamic Adjustment with Two Thresholds This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature GBFD-119505 PDCH Dynamic Adjustment with Two Thresholds. 8.107 Configuring DTM This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114151 DTM. 8.108 Configuring Class11 DTM This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119403 Class11 DTM. 8.109 Configuring HMC DTM This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119404 HMC DTM. 8.110 Configuring 14.4 kbit/s Circuit Switched Data This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature 14.4 kbit/s Circuit Switched Data. 8.111 Configuring Resource Reservation This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116001 Resource Reservation. 8.112 Configuring Enhanced Multi Level Precedence and Preemption (eMLPP) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115001 Enhanced Multi Level Precedence and Preemption (eMLPP). 8.113 Configuring Guaranteed Emergency Call This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-110521 Guaranteed Emergency Call.
8.114 Configuring Flow Control Based on Cell Priority This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115002 Flow Control Based on Cell Priority. 8.115 Configuring Network Support SAIC This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118103 Network Support SAIC. 8.116 Configuring the Location Service This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the location service (LCS). 8.117 Configuring the Abis over IP This section describes how to configure and verify Abis over IP. 8.118 Configuring the A over IP This section describes how to configure and verify Ater over IP. 8.119 Configuring UDP MUX for A Transmission This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118610 UDP MUX for A Transmission. 8.120 Configuring the Gb over IP This section describes how to configure and verify Gb over IP. 8.121 Configuring IP Fault detection based on BFD This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118609 IP Fault detection based on BFD. 8.122 Configuring Ethernet OAM This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118630 Ethernet OAM. 8.123 Configuring PICO/Compact BTS Automatic Configuration and Planning This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional features PICO Automatic Configuration and Planning (feature ID: GBFD-510601) and Compact BTS Automatic Configuration and Planning (feature ID: GBFD-510701). 8.124 Configuring PICO Synchronization This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature PICO Synchronization (feature ID: GBFD-510602). 8.125 Configuring Compact BTS Automatic Capacity Planning This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature Compact BTS Automatic Capacity Planning (feature ID: GBFD-510702). 8.126 Configuring VGCS/VBS This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate VGCS/VBS. 8.127 Configuring GSM-T Relay This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510310 GSM-T Relay. 8.128 Configuring HUAWEI II Handover This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510501 HUAWEI II Handover. 8.129 Configuring Handover Re-establishment This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510502 Handover Re-establishment.
8.130 Configuring RAN Sharing This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118701 RAN Sharing. 8.131 Configuration the MSRD This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature Mobile Station Receive Diversity (MSRD). 8.132 Configuring Dual Carriers in Downlink This section describes how to configure, verify, and deactivate dual carriers in downlink. 8.133 Configuring the EGPRS2-A This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510803 EGPRS2-A. After a cell is configured to support the EGPRS2-A, the network can allocate the Temporary Block Flow (TBF) in EGPRS2-A mode to the MSs in the cell. 8.134 Configuring Latency Reduction This section describes how to configure, verify, and deactivate latency reduction. 8.135 Configuring the License Control for Urgency Function This section describes how to configure and verify the "GBFD-511001 license control for urgency" . 8.136 Configuring Access Control Class This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511002 Access Control Class (ACC). 8.137 Configuring Load Based Handover Enhancement on Iur-g This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511101 Load Based Handover Enhancement on Iur-g. 8.138 Configuring 2G3G Co-Transmission by TDM Switching This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature 2G/3G CoTransmission by TDM Switching. 8.139 Configuring Multiple CCCHs This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature GBFD-511501 Multiple CCCHs.
8-10
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
8.1 Overview of Feature Configuration

GSM features are classified into basic and optional features. Basic features are not licensecontrolled and therefore do not require license activation before use. On the contrary, optional features are license-controlled and therefore require license activation before use. Table 8-1 lists the basic features. Table 8-2 lists the optional features. Table 8-1 GSM Basic Feature List Feature ID GBFD-110000 GBFD-110030 GBFD-110101 GBFD-110201 GBFD-110202 Feature Name GBSS9.0 System Improvement 3GPP Protocol Compliance Frequency Band Telephone Service (TS11) Emergency Call Service (TS12) Point To Point Short Message Service (TS21, TS22) G3 Fax (TS61, TS62) Bearer Service Location Updating IMSI Detach Paging Authentication HUAWEI I Handover Direct Retry SDCCH Handover Basic Cell Selection Basic Cell Re-selection Call Control Configuration Method None None None None 8.3 Configuring the Emergency Call Service (TS12) None
GBFD-110203
GBFD-110204 GBFD-110205 GBFD-110301 GBFD-110302 GBFD-110303 GBFD-110304 GBFD-110601 GBFD-110607 GBFD-110608 GBFD-110401 GBFD-110402 GBFD-110501
None None None 8.4 Configuring the IMSI Detach None None None 8.5 Configuring the Direct Retry None None None None
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
8-11
Feature ID GBFD-110502
Feature Name Assignment and Immediate Assignment Call Reestablishment TCH Re-assignment TRX Management Radio Link Management Radio Common Channel Management Radio Dedicated Channel Management Enhanced Channel Assignment Algorithm Configuration Management Performance Management Inventory Management Faulty Management Security Management DBS Topology Maintenance BTS/NodeB Software USB Download O&M of BTS O&M of BSC BTS Test Function Integrated Network Management Interface Man Machine Language (MML) BSC/RNC Software Management BTS/NodeB Software Management
Configuration Method 8.6 Configuring the Assignment and Immediate Assignment 8.7 Configuring the Call Reestablishment 8.8 Configuring the TCH Re-assignment None 8.9 Configuring Radio Link Management None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None
GBFD-110503 GBFD-112501 GBFD-111001 GBFD-111002 GBFD-111003 GBFD-111004 GBFD-111005 MRFD-210301 MRFD-210302 MRFD-210303 MRFD-210304 MRFD-210305 MRFD-210309 MRFD-210310 GBFD-111202 GBFD-111203 GBFD-111207 GBFD-111210 GBFD-116501 MRFD-210401 MRFD-210402
8-12
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
Feature ID GBFD-111213 MRFD-210403 GBFD-111501
Feature Name Remote Upgrade of the BSC&BTS Software License Management BTS Combined Cabinet
Configuration Method None None 8.10 Configuring Combined Cabinets and Cabinet Groups of BTSs 8.10 Configuring Combined Cabinets and Cabinet Groups of BTSs None None None None None None None None None None
GBFD-111502
BTS Hybrid Cabinet Group
GBFD-118801 MRFD-210204 MRFD-210205 MRFD-210206 GBFD-118621 GBFD-111701 GBFD-111705 GBFD-112301 GBFD-111214 GBFD-111211
BSC Cabinet/Subrack Sharing Star Topology Chain Topology Tree Topology Connection Inter BSC over IP Board Switchover GSM Flow Control Remote EAC Maintenance Operation & Maintenance System One-Key Recovery Reporting the Temperature List of the BTS Equipment Room System Redundancy Operate System Security Management Link aggregation BSC/RNC Resource Sharing Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSU Failure Adjustment of Adaptive Timing Advance Processing of Measurement Report
MRFD-210101 MRFD-210102 MRFD-210103 MRFD-210104 GBFD-117804
None None None None 8.11 Configuring Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSU Failure None None
GBFD-110901 GBFD-110801
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
8-13
Feature ID GBFD-110802 GBFD-111101
Feature Name Pre-processing of Measurement Report System Information Sending
Configuration Method None 8.12 Configuring the System Information Sending None None 8.13 Configuring Daylight Saving Time None None 8.14 Configuring Signaling Transport Point (STP) 8.15 Configuring 14-Digit Signaling Point Code None None None None 8.16 Configuring the DRX 8.17 Configuring BTS Power Management None None None None None None
GBFD-111102 GBFD-111901 GBFD-116101 GBFD-113001 GBFD-112401 GBFD-111806 GBFD-111802 MRFD-210801 MRFD-210802 GBFD-112203 GBFD-111301 GBFD-114802 GBFD-111601 GBFD-110703 GBFD-111801 GBFD-119001 GBFD-111803 GBFD-111804 GBFD-111805
Forced System Information Sending by OMC Supporting Three-Digit MNC Support of Daylight Saving Time SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment Cell Frequency Scan STP (Signaling Transport Point) 14-Digit Signaling Point Code Interface Message Tracing User Signaling Tracing Cell Tracing LAPD Multiplexing at Abis Interface Discontinuous Reception (DRX) BTS Power Management Enhanced Power Control Algorithm Ater Interface 4:1 Multiplexing Gb Interface Function A Interface Circuit Management A Interface Protocol Process A Interface Occupation Rate Monitoring
8-14
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
Feature ID GBFD-119101 GBFD-119102 GBFD-119103 GBFD-119104 GBFD-119105 GBFD-119106 GBFD-119107 GBFD-119108 GBFD-119109 GBFD-119110 GBFD-119111 GBFD-119112 GBFD-119113 GBFD-119115 GBFD-119116 GBFD-119117 MRFD-210601 MRFD-210602 MRFD-210604 MRFD-210501 MRFD-210502 MRFD-210701 MRFD-210103 MRFD-210101 MRFD-210102 MRFD-210301
Feature Name Packet Channel Combination Type Packet System Information MS Types MAC Mode RLC Mode Coding Scheme Networking Control Mode Network Operation Mode Support QoS(Best Effort) Access Assignment Paging Timing Advance Update Power Control Packet Uplink Flow Control Flow Control on Gb Interface Connection with TMA (Tower Mounted Amplifier) Remote Electrical Tilt 2-Antenna Receive Diversity BTS Clock BSC Clock Documentation Link aggregation System Redundancy Operate System Security Management Performance Management
Configuration Method None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None 8.18 Configuring Connection with TMA 8.19 Configuring Remote Electrical Tilt 8.20 Configuring 2Antenna Receive Diversity 8.21 Configuring Base Station Clock None None None None None None
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
8-15
Feature ID MRFD-210302 MRFD-210303 MRFD-210304 MRFD-210305
Feature Name Faulty Management Inventory Management Configuration Management Security Management
Configuration Method None None None None
Table 8-2 GSM Optional Feature List Feature ID Feature Name License Control Item Multitransceivers supporting PBT transmit Resource (per TRX) Multitransceivers supporting diversity transmit Resource (per TRX) Multitransceivers supporting 4way receive diversity Resource (per TRX) Dynamic PBT Resource (per TRX) License Configured on... BSC6900 Configuration Method 8.22 Configuring PBT(Power Boost Technology) 8.23 Configuring Transmit Diversity
GBFD-115901
PBT(Power Boost Technology)
GBFD-115902
Transmit Diversity
BSC6900
GBFD-115903
4-Way Receiver Diversity
BSC6900
8.24 Configuring Four-Way Receive Diversity
GBFD-118101
Dynamic Transmit Diversity
BSC6900
8.25 Configuring Dynamic Transmit Diversity 8.26 Configuring Dynamic PBT None
GBFD-118102
Dynamic PBT (Power Boost Technology) Extended Cell
Dynamic PBT Resource (per TRX) Extended cell Resource (per Cell)
BSC6900
GBFD-114001
BSC6900
8-16
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
Feature ID
Feature Name
License Control Item Concentric Cell Function (per TRX) Co-BCCH Cell Function (per TRX) Multi-band sharing one BSC Function (per TRX) Enhanced DualBand Network Function (per TRX) Flex MAIO Function (per TRX) ICC(Inference Counteract Combine) Function (per TRX) the EICC Function (per TRX) Frequency Hopping Function (per TRX) BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping Function (per TRX) Antenna Frequency Hopping Function (per TRX)
License Configured on... BSC6900
Configuration Method None
GBFD-113201
Concentric Cell
GBFD-114501
Co-BCCH Cell
BSC6900
8.27 Configuring Co-BCCH Cell 8.28 Configuring Multi-band Sharing One BSC 8.29 Configuring Enhanced Dual-Band Network 8.30 Configuring Flex MAIO 8.31 Configuring ICC
GBFD-114401
Multi-band Sharing One BSC
BSC6900
GBFD-114402
Enhanced DualBand Network
BSC6900
GBFD-117001
Flex MAIO
BSC6900
GBFD-115801
ICC
BSC6900
GBFD-115821
EICC
BSC6900
8.32 Configuring EICC 8.33 Configuring Frequency Hopping 8.34 Configuring BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping 8.35 Configuring Antenna Frequency Hopping
GBFD-113701
Frequency Hopping (RF hopping, baseband hopping) BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping
BSC6900
GBFD-113702
BSC6900
GBFD-113703
Antenna Frequency Hopping
BSC6900
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
8-17
Feature ID
Feature Name
License Control Item BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing Function (per TRX) E-GSM and RGSM RF Band Function (per TRX) IBCA Function (per TRX)
Configuration Method 8.36 Configuring BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing None
GBFD-118001
BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing
GBFD-114901
Support for EGSM and RGSM Frequency Band IBCA (Interference Based Channel Allocation) SoftSynchronized Network
BSC6900
GBFD-117002
BSC6900
8.37 Configuring the IBCA 8.38 Configuring SoftSynchronized Network 8.39 Configuring BTS GPS Synchronizatio n None
GBFD-118201
Soft Synchronizatio n Function (per TRX) BTS GPS Synchronizatio n Function (per TRX) Clock over IP Function (per TRX) Clock over IP support 1588V2 Function (per TRX) Huawei III Power Control Algorithm(per TRX) Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) Downlink Function (per TRX)
BSC6900
GBFD-510401
BTS GPS Synchronizatio n
BSC6900
GBFD-118606
Clock over IP
BSC6900
GBFD-118620
Clock over IP support 1588V2
BSC6900
None
GBFD-117601
HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm
BSC6900
8.40 Configuring HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm 8.41 Configuring the DTX
GBFD-114801
Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) Downlink
BSC6900
8-18
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
Feature ID
Feature Name
License Control Item Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) Uplink Function (per TRX) Dynamic Shutdown Trx PA Function (per TRX)
Configuration Method 8.41 Configuring the DTX
GBFD-114803
Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) Uplink
GBFD-111602
TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown
BSC6900
8.42 Configuring TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown None
GBFD-111603
TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown on Timeslot Level Intelligent Combiner Bypass
Time slot Intelligent Power Optimization Function (per TRX) Intelligent Combiner Bypass Function (per TRX) Active Backup Power Control Function (per TRX) Power Optimization Based on Channel Type Function (per TRX) PSU Smart Control Function (per TRX) Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization Function (per TRX)
BSC6900
GBFD-111604
BSC6900
8.43 Configuring Intelligent Combiner Bypass 8.44 Configuring Active Backup Power Control 8.45 Configuring Power Optimization Based on Channel Type 8.46 Configuring PSU Smart Control 8.47 Configuring Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization
GBFD-111605
Active Backup Power Control
BSC6900
GBFD-111606
Power Optimization Based on Channel Type
BSC6900
GBFD-111608
PSU Smart Control
BSC6900
GBFD-111609
Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization
BSC6900
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
8-19
Feature ID
Feature Name
License Control Item Dynamic Cell Power Off Function (per TRX) TRX Working Voltage Adjustment Function(per TRX) Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Function (per TRX) 16K LAPD Function (per TRX) Flex Abis Resource (per TRX) BTS local switching Resource (per TRX) Transmission optimization on the Abis interface Resource (per TRX) Abis Congestion Trigger HR Distribution Function (per TRX) Flex Ater Function (per TRX)
Configuration Method 8.48 Configuring Dynamic Cell Power Off 8.49 Configuring TRX Working Voltage Adjustment 8.50 Configuring Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Adjustment None
GBFD-111610
Dynamic Cell Power Off
GBFD-111611
TRX Working Voltage Adjustment
BSC6900
GBFD-111612
Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Regulation
BSC6900
GBFD-116701
16Kbit RSL and OML on A-bis Interface Flex Abis
BSC6900
GBFD-117301
BSC6900
8.51 Configuring Flex Abis 8.52 Configuring BTS Local Switch 8.53 Configuring the Abis Transmission Optimization None
GBFD-117702
BTS Local Switch
BSC6900
GBFD-118401
Abis Transmission Optimization
BSC6900
GBFD-112013
Abis Congestion Trigger HR Distribution
BSC6900
GBFD-116901
Flex Ater
BSC6900
8.54 Configuring Flex Ater
8-20
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
Feature ID
Feature Name
License Control Item BSC Local Switching Resource (per TRX) Ater Compression Transmission Function (per TRX) TrFO Function (per TRX) Multi-Cell Function Function (per TRX) Ring topology Function (per TRX) TRX Cooperation Function (per TRX) MSC POOL Function (per TRX) Gb Flex Function (per 64Kbps) Abis Bypass Function (per TRX) Fast Ring Network Switch Function (per TRX) Robust Air Interface Signalling Function (per TRX)
Configuration Method 8.55 Configuring BSC Local Switch 8.56 Configuring Ater Compression Transmission None None
GBFD-117701
BSC Local Switch
GBFD-116902
Ater Compression Transmission
BSC6900
GBFD-115702 GBFD-114601
TrFO Multi-Cell Function
BSC6900 BSC6900
GBFD-117801
Ring Topology
BSC6900
8.57 Configuring BTS Ring Topology 8.58 Configuring the TRX Mutual Aid 8.59 Configuring the MSC Pool 8.60 Configuring the SGSN Pool 8.61 Configuring Abis Bypass None
GBFD-113801
TRX Cooperation
BSC6900
GBFD-117401
MSC Pool
BSC6900
GBFD-119701
SGSN Pool
BSC6900
GBFD-116601
Abis Bypass
BSC6900
GBFD-117802
Fast Ring Network Switch
BSC6900
GBFD-113721
Robust Air Interface Signalling
BSC6900
None
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
8-21
Feature ID
Feature Name
License Control Item Abis Transmission Backup Function (per TRX) BSC Node Redundancy Function (per TRX) TC Pool Function (per TRX) OML Backup Function (per TRX) AFC Function (per TRX)
Configuration Method 8.62 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup 8.63 Configuring the BSC Node Redundancy 8.64 Configuring the TC Pool None
GBFD-117803
Abis Transmission Backup
GBFD-113725
BSC Node Redundancy
BSC6900
GBFD-113726
TC Pool
BSC6900
GBFD-113728
OML Backup
BSC6900
GBFD-510101
AFC(Automatic Frequency Correction)
BSC6900
8.65 Configuring Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC) 8.66 Configuring Fast Move Handover 8.67 Configuring Chain Cell Handover 8.68 Configuring Multi-Site Cell 8.69 Configuring GSM/ WCDMA Interoperabilit y
GBFD-510102
Fast Move Handover
High Speed PBGT Switch
BSC6900
GBFD-510103
Chain Cell Handover
Chain Cell Handover Function (per TRX) Multi-site Cell Function (per TRX) Intersystem Handover & Reselection Function (per TRX)
BSC6900
GBFD-510104
Multi-site Cell
BSC6900
GBFD-114301
GSM/WCDMA Interoperability
BSC6900
8-22
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
Feature ID
Feature Name
License Control Item Intersystem Handover due to Service Function (per TRX) Intersystem Handover due to Load Function (per TRX)
Configuration Method 8.69 Configuring GSM/ WCDMA Interoperabilit y 8.69 Configuring GSM/ WCDMA Interoperabilit y 8.69 Configuring GSM/ WCDMA Interoperabilit y 8.70 Configuring the Fast 3G Reselection at 2G CS Call Release 8.71.1 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface 8.71.2 Configuring Satellite Transmission over A Interface 8.71.3 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface
GBFD-114321
GSM/WCDMA Service Based Handover
GBFD-114322
GSM/WCDMA Load Based Handover
BSC6900
GBFD-114323
2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State
2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State Function (per TRX) Fast 3G Reselection at 2G Cs Call Release Function (per TRX) Site Supporting Satellite Transmission Resource (per Site) Satellite Transmission over A Interface Function (per TRX) Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface Function (per TRX)
BSC6900
GBFD-114325
Fast 3G Reselection at 2G CS Call Release
BSC6900
GBFD-113901
Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface
BSC6900
GBFD-113902
Satellite Transmission over A Interface
BSC6900
GBFD-113903
Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface
BSC6900
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
8-23
Feature ID
Feature Name
License Control Item Satellite Transmission over Pb Interface Function (per TRX) Satellite Transmission over Gb Interface Function (per 64Kbps) High Speed Signaling Function (per TRX) Local Multiple Signaling Points Function (per TRX) Semipermanent Connection Resource (per LINK) End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing Function (per TRX) Maintenance Mode Alarm Function (per TRX) Active Power Control Function (per TRX) Encryption (A5/1,A5/2) Function (per TRX)
Configuration Method 8.71.4 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Pb Interface 8.71.5 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Gb Interface 8.72 Configuring High Speed Signaling 8.73 Configuring Local Multiple Signaling Points 8.74 Configuring SemiPermanent Connection 8.75 Configuring End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing None
GBFD-113904
Satellite Transmission over Pb Interface
GBFD-113905
Satellite Transmission over Gb Interface
BSC6900
GBFD-115201
High Speed Signaling
BSC6900
GBFD-115301
Local Multiple Signaling Points
BSC6900
GBFD-114701
SemiPermanent Connection
BSC6900
GBFD-116401
End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing
BSC6900
GBFD-116402
Maintenance Mode Alam
BSC6900
GBFD-117602
Active Power Control
BSC6900
8.76 Configuring Active Power Control None
GBFD-113501
A5/1 and A5/2 Ciphering Algorithm
BSC6900
8-24
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
Feature ID
Feature Name
License Control Item Encryption (A5/3) Function (per TRX) Enhanced Encryption Function (per TRX) Encrypted Network Management Function (per TRX) NAT Beside OM Function (per TRX) Enhanced Full Rate Function (per TRX) Half Rate Resource (per TRX) Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR Function (per TRX) Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (TS23) Function (per TRX) Simplified Cell Broadcast Function (per TRX) Automatic Level Control Function (per TRX)
Configuration Method 8.77 Configuring Ciphering None
GBFD-113503
A5/3 Ciphering Algorithm A5/1 Encryption Flow Optimization Encrypted Network Management
GBFD-113521
BSC6900
GBFD-113522
BSC6900
None
GBFD-113523
NAT Beside OM Enhanced Full Rate Half Rate Speech Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR
BSC6900
None
GBFD-113301
BSC6900
8.78 Configuring Speech Version 8.78 Configuring Speech Version 8.79 Configuring Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR 8.80.1 Configuring Short Message Service Cell Broadcast 8.80.2 Configuring Simplified Cell Broadcast 8.81 Configuring Automatic Level Control (ALC)
GBFD-113401
BSC6900
GBFD-113402
BSC6900
GBFD-113601
Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (TS23)
BSC6900
GBFD-113602
Simplified Cell Broadcast
BSC6900
GBFD-115601
Automatic Level Control (ALC)
BSC6900
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
8-25
Feature ID
Feature Name
License Control Item Acoustic Echo Cancellation Function (per TRX) Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR) Function (per TRX) TFO Function (per TRX) Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC) Function (per TRX) Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC) Function (per TRX) Voice Quality Index (VQI) Function (per TRX) Enhanced Measurement Report(EMR) Function (per TRX) BTS power lift for handover Function (per TRX) Dynamic HR/ FR Adaptation Function (per TRX)
Configuration Method 8.82 Configuring Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC) 8.83 Configuring the ANR 8.84 Configuring TFO 8.85 Configuring Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC) 8.86 Configuring Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC) 8.87 Configuring the Voice Quality Index 8.88 Configuring of Enhanced Measurement Report None
GBFD-115602
Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC)
GBFD-115603
Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR) TFO
BSC6900
GBFD-115701
BSC6900
GBFD-115703
Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC)
BSC6900
GBFD-115704
Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC)
BSC6900
GBFD-116801
Voice Quality Index (Uplink VQI) Enhanced Measurement Report(EMR)
BSC6900
GBFD-117501
BSC6900
GBFD-117101
BTS power lift for handover
BSC6900
GBFD-115522
Dynamic HR/ FR Adaptation
BSC6900
8.89 Configuring Dynamic HRFR Adaptation
8-26
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
Feature ID
Feature Name
License Control Item AMR Resource (per TRX) AMR HR Function (per TRX) AMR Power Control Function (per TRX) AMR FR/HR Dynamic Adjustment Function (per TRX) AMR Wireless Link Timer Function (per TRX) AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment Function (per TRX) WB AMR Resource (per TRX) GBR Qos Function (per 64Kbps) QoS Function (per 64Kbps) PS Active Queue Management Function (per 64Kbps)
Configuration Method 8.78 Configuring Speech Version 8.78 Configuring Speech Version 8.78 Configuring Speech Version 8.78 Configuring Speech Version
GBFD-115501
AMR FR
GBFD-115502
AMR HR
BSC6900
GBFD-115503
AMR Power Control
BSC6900
GBFD-115504
AMR FR/HR Dynamic Adjustment
BSC6900
GBFD-115505
AMR Wireless Link Timer
BSC6900
None
GBFD-115506
AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment
BSC6900
8.90 Configuring AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment 8.91 Configuring the WB AMR 8.92 Configuring Streaming QoS (GBR) 8.93 Configuring QoS ARP/THP 8.94 Configuring PS Active Package Management
GBFD-115507
WB AMR
BSC6900
GBFD-119901
Streaming QoS (GBR)
BSC6900
GBFD-119902
QoS ARP&THP PS Active Package Management
BSC6900
GBFD-119904
BSC6900
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
8-27
Feature ID
Feature Name
License Control Item PoC QoS Function (per TRX) Conversational Qos Function (per 64Kbps) NACC Function (per TRX)
Configuration Method 8.95 Configuring PoC QoS None
GBFD-119905
PoC QoS
GBFD-119906
Conversational QoS NetworkControlled Cell Reselection (NC2) Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC) Packet SI Status
BSC6900
GBFD-116201
BSC6900
8.96 Configuring NC2 8.97 Configuring the NACC 8.97 Configuring the NACC 8.98 Configuring GPRS 8.99 Configruing Network Operation Mode I None
GBFD-116301
NC2 Function (per TRX)
BSC6900
GBFD-119801
Packet SI Status (PSI) Function (per 64Kbps) GPRS Software Function (per TRX) Network operation mode I Function (per 64Kbps) CS3/CS4 Function (per 64Kbps) EDGE Resource (per TRX) Dynamic Allocation of PDCH Function (per TRX) GB Over FR Resource (per 64Kbps)
BSC6900
GBFD-114101
GPRS
BSC6900
GBFD-510001
Network Operation Mode I
BSC6900
GBFD-118901
CS-3/CS-4
BSC6900
GBFD-114201
EGPRS
BSC6900
None
GBFD-113101
PDCH Dynamic Adjustment
BSC6900
None
GBFD-510002
Gb Over FR
BSC6900
None
8-28
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
Feature ID
Feature Name
License Control Item 11-Bit EGPRS Access Function (per 64Kbps) Packet Assignment Taken Over by the BTS Function (per 64Kbps) Extended Uplink TBF Function (per 64Kbps) Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS Coding Function (per 64Kbps) Dynamically Adjusting the RRBP Frequency Function (per 64Kbps) Packet Channel Dispatching Function (per 64Kbps) Load Sharing Function (per 64Kbps) Adaptive Adjustment of Uplink and Downlink Channels Function (per 64Kbps)
Configuration Method 8.100 Configuring Packet Performance Improvement 8.100 Configuring Packet Performance Improvement 8.100 Configuring Packet Performance Improvement 8.101 Configuring the Feature of Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS Coding None
GBFD-119201
11-Bit EGPRS Access
GBFD-119202
Packet Assignment Taken Over by the BTS
BSC6900
GBFD-119203
Extended Uplink TBF
BSC6900
GBFD-119204
Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS Coding
BSC6900
GBFD-119205
Dynamically Adjusting the RRBP Frequency
BSC6900
GBFD-119302
Packet Channel Dispatching
BSC6900
8.102 Configuring Packet Channel Dispatching None
GBFD-119303
Load Sharing
BSC6900
GBFD-119501
Adaptive Adjustment of Uplink and Downlink Channels
BSC6900
None
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
8-29
Feature ID
Feature Name
License Control Item BSS Paging Coordination Function (per TRX) PS Handover Function (per 64Kbps) Early TBF Establishment Function (per 64Kbps) EDA Function (per 64Kbps) Terminal multislot classes Function (per TRX) None
Configuration Method 8.103 Configuring BSS Paging Coordination 8.104 Configuring PS Handover None
GBFD-119305
BSS Paging Coordination
GBFD-119502
PS Handover
BSC6900
GBFD-119503
Early TBF Establishment
BSC6900
GBFD-119401
EDA(Extended Dynamic Allocation) MS High multislot classes
BSC6900
8.105 Configuring EDA None
GBFD-119402
BSC6900
GBFD-119505
PDCH Dynamic Adjustment with Two Thresholds
None
8.106 Configuring PDCH Dynamic Adjustment with Two Thresholds 8.107 Configuring DTM 8.108 Configuring Class11 DTM 8.109 Configuring HMC DTM 8.110 Configuring 14.4 kbit/s Circuit Switched Data
GBFD-114151
DTM
DTM Function (per 64Kbps) DTM High Multi-slot class 11 Function (per 64Kbps) HMC DTM Function (per 64Kbps) 14.4Kbps Circuit Switched Data Function (per TRX)
BSC6900
GBFD-119403
Class11 DTM
BSC6900
GBFD-119404
HMC DTM
BSC6900
GBFD-119405
14.4kbit/s Circuit Switched Data
BSC6900
8-30
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
Feature ID
Feature Name
License Control Item Channel Reserved Function (per TRX) eMLPP Function (per TRX)
Configuration Method 8.111 Configuring Resource Reservation 8.112 Configuring Enhanced Multi Level Precedence and Preemption (eMLPP) 8.113 Configuring Guaranteed Emergency Call 8.114 Configuring Flow Control Based on Cell Priority 8.115 Configuring Network Support SAIC 8.116 Configuring the Location Service 8.116 Configuring the Location Service 8.116 Configuring the Location Service 8.117 Configuring the Abis over IP
GBFD-116001
Resource Reservation
GBFD-115001
Enhanced Multi Level Precedence and Preemption (EMLPP)
BSC6900
GBFD-110521
Guaranteed Emergency Call
Guaranteed Emergency Call Function (per TRX) Flow Control Based on Cell Priority Function (per TRX) SAIC Function (per TRX)
BSC6900
GBFD-115002
Flow Control Based on Cell Priority
BSC6900
GBFD-118103
Network Support SAIC
BSC6900
GBFD-115401
NSS-Based LCS (Cell ID + TA) BSS-Based LCS (Cell ID + TA) Simple Mode LCS(Cell ID + TA) Abis over IP
NSS-based LCS (Cell ID + TA) Function (per TRX) LCS(CELL ID +TA) Function (per TRX) Simple Mode LCS (Cell ID + TA) Function (per TRX) Abis Over IP Resource (per TRX)
BSC6900
GBFD-115402
BSC6900
GBFD-115403
BSC6900
GBFD-118601
BSC6900
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
8-31
Feature ID
Feature Name
License Control Item Abis IP Over E1/T1 Resource (per TRX) Abis MUX Function (per TRX) A Over IP Function (per TRX) A IP over E1 Function (per TRX) UDP MUX for A Transmission Function (per TRX) GB Over IP Resource (per 64Kbps) IP QoS Function (per TRX) IP Performance Monitor Function (per TRX) IP Fault Detection based on BFD(per TRX) Ethernet OAM Function (per TRX)
Configuration Method 8.117 Configuring the Abis over IP 8.117 Configuring the Abis over IP 8.118 Configuring the A over IP 8.118 Configuring the A over IP 8.119 Configuring UDP MUX for A Transmission 8.120 Configuring the Gb over IP None None
GBFD-118611
Abis IP over E1/ T1
GBFD-118604
Abis MUX
BSC6900
GBFD-118602
A over IP
BSC6900
GBFD-118622
A IP over E1/T1
BSC6900
GBFD-118610
UDP MUX for A Transmission
BSC6900
GBFD-118603
Gb over IP
BSC6900
GBFD-118605 GBFD-118607
IP QOS IP Performance Monitor
BSC6900 BSC6900
GBFD-118609
IP Fault Detection Based on BFD Ethernet OAM
BSC6900
8.121 Configuring IP Fault detection based on BFD 8.122 Configuring Ethernet OAM
GBFD-118630
BSC6900
8-32
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
Feature ID
Feature Name
License Control Item PICO Solution Packet Function (per TRX)
Configuration Method 8.123 Configuring PICO/ Compact BTS Automatic Configuration and Planning 8.124 Configuring PICO Synchronizatio n 8.123 Configuring PICO/ Compact BTS Automatic Configuration and Planning 8.125 Configuring Compact BTS Automatic Capacity Planning 8.126 Configuring VGCS/VBS
GBFD-510601
PICO Automatic Configuration and Planning
GBFD-510602
PICO Synchronizatio n
PICO Solution Packet Function (per TRX)
BSC6900
GBFD-510701
Compact BTS Automatic Configuration and Planning
Easy GSM Solution Packet Function (per TRX)
BSC6900
GBFD-510702
Compact BTS Automatic Capacity Planning
Easy GSM Solution Packet Function (per TRX)
BSC6900
GBFD-510301
Public Voice Group Call Service
Basic Voice Group Call Service(VGCS) Resource (per TRX) Late Group Call Channel Assignment Function (per TRX) Single Channel Group Call Originating Function (per TRX) Talker Identification function (per TRX)
BSC6900
GBFD-510303
Late Broadcast Channel Assignment
BSC6900
8.126 Configuring VGCS/VBS
GBFD-510305
Single Channel Group Call Originating
BSC6900
GBFD-510306
Talker Identification
BSC6900
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
8-33
Feature ID
Feature Name
License Control Item Group Call EMLPP Function (per TRX) Fast Group Call Setup Function (per TRX) Group Call Reliability Enhancing Function (per TRX) Basic Voice Broadcast Service(VBS) Resource (per TRX) Late Broadcast Channel Assignment Function (per TRX) GSM-T Relay (per TRX) HUAWEI II Handover Function (per TRX) Handover Reestablishment Function (per TRX) RAN Sharing Function (per TRX) MSRD Function (per TRX)
Configuration Method 8.126 Configuring VGCS/VBS 8.126 Configuring VGCS/VBS 8.126 Configuring VGCS/VBS
GBFD-510307
Group Call EMLPP
GBFD-510308
Fast Group Call Setup Group Call Reliability Enhancing
BSC6900
GBFD-510309
BSC6900
GBFD-510302
Public Voice Broadcast Service
BSC6900
GBFD-510304
Late Broadcast Channel Assignment
BSC6900
GBFD-510310
GSM-T Relay
BSC6900
8.127 Configuring GSM-T Relay 8.128 Configuring HUAWEI II Handover 8.129 Configuring Handover Reestablishment 8.130 Configuring RAN Sharing 8.131 Configuration the MSRD
GBFD-510501
HUAWEI II Handover
BSC6900
GBFD-510502
Handover Reestablishment
BSC6900
GBFD-118701
RAN Sharing
BSC6900
GBFD-510801
MSRD
BSC6900
8-34
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
Feature ID
Feature Name
License Control Item Dual Carriers in Downlink Function (per TRX) Uplink EGPRS2-A Resource (per TRX) Downlink EGPRS2-A Resource (per TRX) Latency Reduction Function (per 64Kbps) 2G/3G Neighboring Cell Automatic Optimization Function (per TRX) License Control for Urgency Function (per TRX)
Configuration Method 8.132 Configuring Dual Carriers in Downlink 8.133 Configuring the EGPRS2-A 8.133 Configuring the EGPRS2-A 8.134 Configuring Latency Reduction None
GBFD-510802
Dual Carriers in Downlink
GBFD-510803
Uplink EGPRS2-A
BSC6900
GBFD-510804
Downlink EGPRS2-A
BSC6900
GBFD-510805
Latency Reduction
BSC6900
GBFD-510901
2G/3G Neighboring Cell Automatic Optimization
BSC6900
GBFD-511001
License Control for Urgency
BSC6900
8.135 Configuring the License Control for Urgency Function 8.136 Configuring Access Control Class 8.137 Configuring Load Based Handover Enhancement on Iur-g
GBFD-511002
Access Control Class(ACC)
None
None
GBFD-511101
Load Based Handover Enhancement on Iur-g
Handover Based on Load on Iur-g Function (per TRX)
BSC6900
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
8-35
Feature ID
Feature Name
License Control Item 2G/3G CoTransmission by TDM Switching Function (per TRX) Multiple CCCH (per TRX)
Configuration Method 8.138 Configuring 2G3G CoTransmission by TDM Switching 8.139 Configuring Multiple CCCHs
GBFD-511201
2G/3G CoTransmission by TDM Switching
GBFD-511501
Multiple CCCHs
BSC6900
8.2 Activating the GSM License

This describes how to activate the GSM license.
Prerequisite
l l l
The BSC6900 is in service. The LMT is started and you are logged in to the BSC6900. The valid BSC6900 license is obtained and stored in the OMU active workspace \FTP \License
Procedure
Step 1 Run LST LICENSE and enter the name of the license file to be activated to query the file information. If... Then...
The file information comply with the information of the Go to Step 2. file that you apply for, The file information does not comply with the information of the file that you apply for, Exit the task and contact Huawei.
Step 2 Run the LST CFGMODE command to query the subrack configuration status. If the subrack is offline, run the SET CFGDATAEFFECTIVE command to switch it to online. Step 3 Run the ACT LICENSE command to active the License. ----End
8-36
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
8.3 Configuring the Emergency Call Service (TS12)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature: GBFD-110202 Emergency Call Service (TS12).
Prerequisite
None.
Context
An MS in emergency can call a specific number for the maximum help free of charge. The emergency call is allowed even if the MS is out of service or the telephone charge is overdue. An MS in emergency can have a higher level of access priority when making an emergency call. The MS can contact the emergency department even in a congested cell.
Procedure
l Activating Emergency Call Service 1. l Run the SET GCELLCCBASIC command. In this step, set Emergency Call Disable to NO(No) to enable the emergency call function. Run theLST GCELLCCBASIC command. The expected result: Emergency Call Disable is NO(No). 2. 3. 4. Trace messages on the A interface. SelectBSSAP information inTrace type to trace BSSAP messages on the A interface. The MS dials an emergency call and hears a voice prompt. Check the message traced on the A interfaces. The expected result: The EMERGENCY _SETUP message is traced on the A interface, which shows that the emergency call is enabled successfully. l Deactivating Emergency Call Service 1. 2. ----End Run the SET GCELLCCBASIC command. In this step, set Emergency Call Disable to YES(Yes) to disable the emergency call function. Run the LST GCELLCCBASIC command. The expected result:Emergency Call Disable is Yes.
Verifying Emergency Call Service 1.
8.4 Configuring the IMSI Detach

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature: GBFD-110302 IMSI Detach.
Prerequisite
None
Context
The IMSI detach procedure may be invoked by a mobile station if the mobile station is deactivated or if the Subscriber Identity Module is detached from the mobile station. In A/Gb mode and GERAN Iu mode, a flag (ATT) broadcast in the L3-RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE 3 message on the BCCH is used by the network to indicate whether the detach procedure is required. The value of the ATT flag to be taken into account shall be the one broadcast when the mobile station was in MM idle. The procedure causes the mobile station to be indicated as inactive in the network.
Procedure
l Activating IMSI Detach 1. l Run the SET GCELLIDLEBASIC command. In this step, set Attach-detach Allowed to YES(Yes). Run the LST GCELLIDLEBASIC command. In this step, query Attach-detach Allowed. The expected result: Attach-detach Allowed is YES(Yes). 2. 3. Trace the messages over the A interface. In this step, select all the message types. Power off the MS. Expected result: In the A interface message tracing window, you can view the CM Service Request message, and the service type contained in this message is IMSI DETACH INDICATION. 4. l Deactivating IMSI Detach 1. 2. Run the SET GCELLIDLEBASIC command. In this step, set Attach-detach Allowed to NO(No). Run the LST GCELLIDLEBASIC command. In this step, query Attach-detach Allowed. The expected result: Attach-detach Allowed is NO(No). ----End
Verifying IMSI Detach 1.
8.5 Configuring the Direct Retry

This chapter describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110607 Directed Retry.
Prerequisite
Neighboring cells are configured and available for the cell.
Context
Directed retry is a special type of handover. That is, during the assignment procedure, the BSC initiates the directed retry procedure to switch the MS to a neighboring cell if no TCH is available or the traffic load is heavy in the serving cell.
This feature helps reduce the call access failure due to TCH congestion in the serving cell, and thus increases the access success rate. In addition, this feature can balance the traffic load between different cells, and thus avoids the traffic load imbalance among cells.
Procedure
l Activating Directed Retry 1. l Run the SET GCELLBASICPARA command. In this step, set Directed Retry to YES(Yes).
Verifying Directed Retry Assume that Cell 0 and Cell 1 are the neighboring 2G cell of each other. 1. 2. 3. Run the ADD GCELLQUICKSETUP,quickly set up a 2G inner cell Cell 0 and Cell 1. Run the ADD G2GNCELL repeatedly, configure the Cell 0 and Cell 1 neighbored from each other. Run the SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT command to set the related channels. In this step, set Administrative State to Lock(Lock). Block all TCHs in Cell 0, and ensure that the SDCCH in Cell 0 is available.
NOTE
Before blocking the channels, run the LST GTRXCHAN command to query the channel configuration of the cell.
4. 5. 6.
Start tracing the BSSAP messages on the A interfaceand Start tracing RSL messages on the Abis interface in Cell 0 and Cell 1. Use an MS to make a call in Cell 0. Check the traced BSSAP messages on the A interface and RSL messages on the Abis interface in Cell 0 and Cell 1. Expected result: The call is set up successfully and voice services are running normally. The Handover Detection message on the Abis interface can be traced in Cell 1.
NOTE
When the directed retry is performed inside the BSC, the Assignment Complete message on the A interface can be traced in Cell 1.
Deactivating Directed Retry 1. 2. Run the SET GCELLBASICPARA command. In this step, set Directed Retry to NO(No). Run the LST GCELLBASICPARA command to check the setting of Directed Retry. Expected result: Directed Retry is NO(No).
----End
8.6 Configuring the Assignment and Immediate Assignment

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature: Assignment and Immediate Assignment (Feature ID: GBFD-110502).
Prerequisite
None
Context
Assignment and Immediate Assignment are two import procedures during call setup. In the case of normal immediate and immediate assignment procedures, no parameter setting is required. For immediate assignment of TCH, parameter setting is required. The following describes only the immediate assignment procedure of TCH.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. l Run the SET GCELLBASICPARA command. In this step, set TCH Immediate Assignment to YES(Yes). Use the MS to initiate an emergency call. Trace messages over the Abis interface. The expected result: On the GUI of Abis interface message tracing, the Channel Activation message is traced. The field Channel Rate and Type under the information element Channel mode shows that the TCH, instead of the SDCCH, is assigned during immediate assignment. During assignment, the messages Mode Modify Request and Mode Modify Acknowledge are followed instead of the Channel Activation message. l Deactivation Procedure 1. 2. Run the SET GCELLBASICPARA command. In this step, set TCH Immediate Assignment to NO(No). Run the LST GCELLCCBASIC command. In this step, query TCH Immediate Assignment. The expected result: TCH Immediate Assignment is NO(No). ----End
Verification Procedure 1. 2.
8.7 Configuring the Call Reestablishment

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110503 Call Reestablishment.
Prerequisite
None
Context
When the MS encounters a radio link failure during the call, the call reestablishment procedure can be used to reestablish the radio link connection so that the original call can proceed. This mechanism shortens the call intermission, and thus improves the user experience.
8-40
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. Run the SET GCELLBASICPARA command and set Call Reestablishment Forbidden to NO(No). Optional: Run the SET GCELLTMR command and set TREESTABLISH to a proper value. If the value is too great, the radio resources assigned previously are kept for a long time, which results in network congestion. Prepare for a cell for test. The test cell must have two TRXs, where TRX1 is the BCCH TRX and TRX2 is the non-BCCH TRX. TRX2 works with an independent variable attenuator or a tool that can dynamically adjust the uplink and downlink signals of TRX2. Run the SET GCELLBASICPARA command and set Call Reestablishment Forbidden to NO(No). Run the LST GCELLBASICPARA command to view the Call Reestablishment Forbidden parameter of the test cell. Expected Result: The value of the Call Reestablishment Forbidden parameter is NO(No). 4. 5. Use an MS to make a call on the test cell. Block all the TCHs on TRX1 so that the MS uses the TCHs on TRX2. Then, unblock all the TCHs on TRX1. Reduce the signals of TRX2 sharply by using the variable attenuator or other tools, trace the signaling of A and Abis interfaces, and monitor the channel status of the test cell. The expected result:
Verification Procedure 1.
2. 3.
You can see from the related monitor window that the MS reestablishes calls on TRX1 of the test cell. You can trace the following signaling messages in Figure 8-1 during signaling tracing.
Figure 8-1 Signaling Messages
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
8-41
Deactivation Procedure 1. 2. Run the SET GCELLBASICPARA command and set Call Reestablishment Forbidden to YES(Yes). Run the LST GCELLBASICPARA command to view the Call Reestablishment Forbidden parameter. The expected result: The value of the Call Reestablishment Forbidden parameter is YES(Yes).
----End
8.8 Configuring the TCH Re-assignment

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-112501 TCH Re-assignment.
Prerequisite
None
Context
TCH re-assignment is a process through which the BSC re-assigns a TCH to the MS, after the assignment of a TCH to the MS fails and the MS returns to the SDCCH.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. l Run the SET GCELLCCBASIC command. In this step, set Allow Reassign to YES (Yes). Optional: Run the SET GCELLCCAD command. In this step, set Frequency Band of Reassign to Same_Band.
NOTE
This parameter indicates the frequency band to be assigned during TCH re-assignment. If the parameter is set to Same_Band, then a channel of the same frequency band of the originally assigned TCH is assigned preferentially.
2. 3.
Reserve an idle TCH on the BCCH TRX and block other TCHs on the BCCH TRX. Reserve an idle TCH on the non-BCCH TRX and block other TCHs on the non-BCCH TRX. In addition, degrade the uplink signal transmitted on the TRX, for example, removing the uplink antenna for the non-BCCH TRX. The expected result: Initiate a call in the cell. In the first assignment, the TCH on the non-BCCH TRX is assigned. Since the assignment over the air interface fails for this TRX, the call is re-assigned onto the TCH of the main BCCH TRX.
Deactivation Procedure 1. 2. Run the SET GCELLCCBASIC command. In this step, set Allow Reassign to NO (No). Run the LST GCELLCCBASIC command. In this step, query Allow Reassign.
8-42
The expected result: Allow Reassign is NO(No). ----End
8.9 Configuring Radio Link Management

This section describes how to activate, verify, deactivate the link error indication procedure of the basic feature GBFD-111002 Radio Link Management. Other procedures of the feature need not be configured.
Prerequisite
l
Dependency on Hardware
None None None
Dependency on Other Features
License
Context
The procedures involved in the radio link management are as follows:
l l l l l l l l l
Link establishment indication Link establishment request Link release indication Link release request Transmission of a transparent L3-Message in acknowledged mode Reception of a transparent L3-Message in acknowledged mode Transmission of a transparent L3-Message in unacknowledged mode Reception of a transparent L3-Message in unacknowledged mode Link error indication
The link error indication procedure is used by BTS to indicate an abnormal case such as the following:
l l
A protocol error occurs in subclauses 5.6.4, 5.7.3 and annex G of 3GPP TS 44.006. A link layer failure, that is, the repetition of an I-frame N200 times without an acknowledgement The repetition of an SABM or DISC frame N200 times without an acknowledgement The reception of an SABM frame in multi-frame established state.
l l
When any of the preceding events occurs, the BTS notifies the BSC6900 by sending the ERROR INDication message containing the relevant cause information. The retransmission period T200 and the allowed number N200 on which the repetition of an Iframe or an SABM or DISC are set by O&M.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCTMR to set the following parameters of the specified cell: T200 SDCCH, T200 FACCH/F, T200 FACCH/ H, T200 SACCH TCH SAPI0, T200 SACCH TCH SAPI3, T200 SACCH SDCCH, T200 SDCCH SAPI3, Use LAPDm N200, N200 of Establish, N200 of Release, N200 of SACCH, N200 of SDCCH, N200 of FACCH/Half Rate, and N200 of FACCH/Full Rate. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCTMR to query the call control timer parameters of the corresponding cell.
The value of the parameter T200 SDCCH queried in step 2 is the same as what the parameter is set to in step 1. The value of the parameter T200 FACCH/F queried in step 2 is the same as what the parameter is set to in step 1. The value of the parameter T200 FACCH/H queried in step 2 is the same as what the parameter is set to in step 1. The value of the parameter T200 SACCH TCH SAPI0 queried in step 2 is the same as what the parameter is set to in step 1. The value of the parameter T200 SACCH TCH SAPI3 queried in step 2 is the same as what the parameter is set to in step 1. The value of the parameter T200 SACCH SDCCH queried in step 2 is the same as what the parameter is set to in step 1. The value of the parameter T200 SDCCH SAPI3 queried in step 2 is the same as what the parameter is set to in step 1. The value of the parameter Use LAPDm N200 queried in step 2 is the same as what the parameter is set to in step 1.
If Use LAPDm N200 in step 1 is set to OFF, the values of N200 of Establish, N200 of Release, N200 of SACCH, N200 of SDCCH, N200 of FACCH/Half Rate, and N200 of FACCH/Full Rate are NULL. Otherwise, set Use LAPDm N200 in step 1 to ON.
The value of the parameter N200 of Establish queried in step 2 is the same as what the parameter is set to in step 1.
8-44
The value of the parameter N200 of Release queried in step 2 is the same as what the parameter is set to in step 1. The value of the parameter N200 of SACCH queried in step 2 is the same as what the parameter is set to in step 1. The value of the parameter N200 of SDCCH queried in step 2 is the same as what the parameter is set to in step 1. The value of the parameter N200 of FACCH/Half Rate queried in step 2 is the same as what the parameter is set to in step 1. The value of the parameter N200 of FACCH/Full Rate queried in step 2 is the same as what the parameter is set to in step 1.
2.
Optional: On the BSC6900 LMT, enter the Abis Interface CS Trace window. In the Basic Tab, set Trace Type to RSL. In the RSL tab, set Message Type to RLM, set Filter Flag to TRX, and specify TRX ID. Optional: Use an MS to start a call and query the channels occupied by the call. Remove the battery of the MS during the call. At the same time, run the BSC6900 MML command SET FHO to hand over the channels occupied by the call. Set Handover Scope to FREE. The expected result: After step 4, checking the interface trace messages started in step 3, you find the following result: The DATA REQ message contains the Handover command message over the Um interface. The interval between the DATA REQ message and the ERROR INDication message meets the configuration relationship between N200 and T200 set in step 1. The full-rate interval is basically consistent with the product of N200 of FACCH/Full Rate and T200 FACCH/F. The half-rate interval is basically consistent with the product of N200 of FACCH/Half Rate and T200 FACCH/H.
3.
Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated.
----End
8.10 Configuring Combined Cabinets and Cabinet Groups of BTSs

This section describes how to activate, verify, or deactivate the basic features BTS Combined Cabinet (feature ID: GBFD-111501) and BTS Hybrid Cabinet Group (feature ID: GBFD-111502).
Prerequisite
l
The cabinets and cables of the BTSs in combined-cabinet and cabinet-group mode are installed. The DIP switches of the BTSs in combined-cabinet and cabinet-group mode are set.
Context
l
Combined cabinets
Multiple BTS cabinets of the same type are connected together to serve as one BTS. In this case, the DTRU subrack is enlarged.
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
The cabinet configured with the DTMU is the main cabinet, whereas the cabinet not configured with the DTMU is the extension cabinet. The extension cabinet shares the DTMU with the main cabinet. Figure 8-2 shows the connections of the BTS3012 combined cabinets. Figure 8-2 Connections of the BTS3012 combined cabinets
Cabinet groups
Multiple groups of compatible combined cabinets are connected together to serve as one BTS. In this case, the service capacity of each site is increased. The first cabinet of each cabinet group is the main cabinet. A cabinet group can be one main cabinet or two combined cabinets. The cabinet group that provides synchronization clock signals is called main cabinet group. Other cabinet groups are called extension cabinet groups. The main cabinet of each cabinet group can be configured with one or two DTMUs. Figure 8-3 shows the connections of the BTS3012 cabinets groups.
Figure 8-3 Connections of BTS3012 cabinet groups
The BTS3012 supports a maximum of two combined cabinets and three cabinet groups. Two combined cabinets of the BTS3012 support 24 carriers, and three cabinet groups support 72 TRXs. Combined cabinets and cabinet groups are distinguished in cabinet numbers. In cabinet group mode, three consecutive combined cabinets form one cabinet group. The main cabinet group is comprised of cabinets 0 to 2, extension cabinet group 1 is comprised of cabinets 3 to 5, and extension cabinet group 2 is comprised of cabinets 6 to 8. The BTS3012 supports a maximum of two combined cabinets and three cabinet groups. The corresponding cabinet numbers are as follows:

Main cabinet group: 0 and 1 Extension cabinet group 1: 3 and 4 Extension cabinet group 2: 6 and 7
8-46
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
Procedure
l Activation procedure 1. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTS to add a BTS. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCABINET to add a cabinet.
NOTE
In combined-cabinet and cabinet-group mode, the principles for adding Cabinet No. are as follows:
l l
If the BTS3012 is in combined-cabinet mode, Cabinet No. is 0 and 1. If the BTS3012 is in cabinet-group mode, Cabinet No. is 0, 1, 3, 4, 6, and 7.
3.
Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSTRXBRD to add TRX boards for the BTS3012.
NOTE
If the BTS3012 does not support the separated mode, the QTRU cannot be configured.
4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELL to add GSM cells. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELLFREQ to add cell frequencies. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELLOSPMAP to add cell signaling point relation. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD CELLBIND2BTS to bind cells to the BTS3012. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS to set the basic GPRS attributes of 2G cells. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GTRX to add TRXs for a cell.
10. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD to bind logical TRXs to the channels on TRX boards 11. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHAN to set the TRX channel information. 12. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV to set TRX device attributes. 13. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSIDLETS to configure idle timeslots.
NOTE
During the processing of PS services, perform step 8, step 12, and step 13.
14. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSANTFEEDERBRD to add the BTS3012 antenna board. 15. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSANTFEEDERCONNECT to configure the connection relation of antennas of the BTS3012. 16. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTSANTFEEDERBRD to modify the frequency band attributes of BTS3012 antennas. 17. Repeat Step 2 through Step 16 to add and configure the extension cabinet and information about the cabinet according to the principles for adding cabinet numbers in combined-cabinet and cabinet-group mode.
NOTE
If the BTS3012 is in combined-cabinet mode, addition of cells for the extension cabinet is not required. Therefore, you do not need to repeat Step 4 through Step 8.
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
8-47
18. Add the BTS connection according to the type of BTS connection.

If the BTS3012 is in combined-cabinet mode, go to Step 19. If the BTS3012 is in cabinet-group mode, go to Step 20.
NOTE
l l
If the BTS3012 is in combined-cabinet mode, add the connection links from the main cabinet to the BSC. Dest Node Type is BSC. If the BTS3012 is in cabinet-group mode, add the connection links from the main cabinet group to the BSC and the connection links among cabinet groups. During the addition of connection links from the main cabinet group to the BSC, Dest Node Type is BSC. During the addition of connection links among cabinet groups, Dest Node Type is BTS.
19. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT to add the connection links from the main cabinet to the BSC, and then set Dest Node Type to BSC. In addition, set Subrack No., Slot No., and Port No.. 20. Add the connection links from the main cabinet group to the extension cabinet groups, and then add the connection links from the main cabinet group to the BSC. (1) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT to add the connection links from the extension cabinet groups to the main cabinet group, and then set Dest Node Type to BTS. In addition, set the following parameters related to the BTSs in extension cabinet groups: Dest Parent Index Type, Dest Parent BTS Index, and Dest Parent BTS Port No.. (2) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT to add the connection links from the main cabinet group to the BSC, and then set Dest Node Type to BSC. In addition, set Subrack No., Slot No., and Port No.. 21. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate a BTS. l Verification procedure 1. 2. 3. Click Device Maintenance on the LMT. The Device Maintenance tab page is displayed. Click the added BTSs in Activation Procedures in Device Navigation Tree. The corresponding device panels are displayed on BTS Device Panel. Select the main and extension cabinets in the Rack No. drop-down list. Then, check the board status on BTS Device Panel.
If the board status is Normal, the BTS3012 is in combined-cabinet and cabinetgroup mode. If the board status is Faulty, clear the alarm according to handling suggestions provided in the BSC6900 Alarm Reference.
Deactivation procedure 1. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate a BTS. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTS to delete a BTS.
----End
8.11 Configuring Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSU Failure

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-117804 Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSU Failure.
Prerequisite
l
None None The license is activated.
License
Context
When a BTS uses an AC power input, the PSUs are needed for the AC/DC conversion. When some PSUs are faulty, the output of the remaining PSUs cannot meet the power demand of the BTS. In such a case, the BTS shuts down parts of the TRXs to reduce the power demand. To ensure that the normal services are not affected, the BTS calculates the number of TRXs that need to be shut down and then reports the number to the BSC6900. The TRXs of non-main BCCHs are preferentially shut down. When the BSC6900 receives the message from the BTS, it stops allocating new calls to the TRXs to be shut down. When no service is carried on the TRX to be shut down, the BTS shuts down the power amplifier of the TRX. After the faults on the PSUs are rectified, the BTS reports it to the BSC6900 and the BSC6900 restarts the TRXs that are shut down.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. l Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set Support Sent 2QUATER to Yes. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSPSUFP. In this step, set Board Parameter Configuration Enabled to YES, set Tran. Cabinet Configured according to actual requirements, and set Service Priority Policy to GSM_PRIOR. GSM Multi Carrier BTS Standard does not need to be set. Parameter Tran. Cabinet Configured Description Specifies whether to configure the transmission cabinet. If a BTS is configured with the transmission cabinet, the BTS also calculates the power consumption of the transmission cabinet when it calculates the entire power consumption.
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
8-49
Parameter Service Priority Policy
Description Specifies which type of service TRXs is preferentially processed when the PSUs are faulty. If the parameter value is set to GSM_PRIOR, the GSM services are preferentially handled. That means the TRXs of UMTS services are preferentially shut down to reduce the power consumption of the BTS. Currently, only the value GSM_PRIOR is supported. None
GSM Multi Carrier BTS Standard
2.
Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSPSUFP to query the parameters related to TRX shutdown when the PSUs are faulty in the corresponding site. The expected result:
The value of Board Parameter Configuration Enabled queried in step 2 is YES. The value of Tran. Cabinet Configured queried in step 2 is the same as that set in step 1. The value of Service Priority Policy queried in step 2 is GSM_PRIOR.
3. 4.
Remove some PSUs of the site. Ensure that the remaining PSUs and the DCDU cannot supply power to all the TRXs at the site but can supply power to other equipment. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP CHNSTAT to query the channel status of all TRXs at the entire site. In this step, set Object Type to SITE. The expected result: the status of some TRXs is Enabled and that of some others is Disabled. The BTS works properly and there is no call drops due to insufficient power supply.
Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSPSUFP. In this step, set Board Parameter Configuration Enabled to NO. The expected result: Some TRXs do not automatically shut themselves down when PSU faults occur.
----End
8.12 Configuring the System Information Sending

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature: GBFD-111101 System Information Sending.
Prerequisite
l l
The original cell has a 3G neighboring cell. Inter-RAT Cell Reselection Enable is set to YES(Yes) for the original cell.
8-50
Context
System information involves main radio network parameters on the Um interface, including network identity parameters, cell selection parameters, system control parameters, and network function parameters. Based on the received system information, an MS can properly select and access a radio network. Then, the MS can fully use various services provided by the network and well cooperate with the network.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. l Run the SET OTHSOFTPARA command. In this step, set Support Sent 2QUATER to YES(Yes). Trace CS domain messages on the Abis interfaceon the LMT. Select RSL in Trace Type to trace RSL messages on the Abis interface. Run the SND GCELLSYSMSG command. In this step, set Index Type to BYID(By Index) and enter the right cell index. Check the traced CS domain messages on the Abis interface. The expected result: si2-quarter-ind in system information type 3 is 1. l Deactivating Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. Run the SET OTHSOFTPARA command. In this step, set Support Sent 2QUATER to NO(No). Trace CS domain messages on the Abis interface on the LMT. Select RSL in Trace Type to trace RSL messages on the Abis interface. Run the SND GCELLSYSMSG command. In this step, set Index Type to BYID(By Index) and enter the right cell index. Check the traced CS domain messages on the Abis interface. The expected result: si2-quarter-ind in system information type 3 is 0. ----End
Verifying Procedure 1. 2. 3.
8.13 Configuring Daylight Saving Time

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature Daylight Saving Time (DST).
Prerequisite
None
Context
With the DST change rules, you can select the date configuration, week configuration, or hybrid configuration. Date configuration indicates the DST starts from or ends on a certain date in a certain month. Week configuration indicates that the DST starts from or ends on a certain day of a certain week in a certain month. Hybrid configuration indicates that the DST starts from or ends on a certain day after a certain date in a certain month.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the SET TZ command to configure DST. In this step, set DaylightSave to YES (Yes), set StartType and EndType, and specify start time and end time based on the selected type. Run the LST TZ command to check whether DaylightSave is set to YES. Run the SET TZ command. In this step, set DaylightSave to NO(No).
l l
Verification Procedure 1. 1. Deactivation Procedure
----End
8.14 Configuring Signaling Transport Point (STP)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-111806 STP (Signaling Transport Point).
Prerequisite
l l l
The XPUa board is configured. The originating signaling point (OSP) is configured. The physical layer and data link layer of the A interface are configured.
Context
According to the requirements of the operator, the BSC can be connected to the MSC directly or through STP. To use an MGW as an STP, ensure that the MGW supports transferring MTP3/M3UA signaling.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure
TDM transmission 1. Run the ADD N7DPC command to add the MGW as a destination signaling point. In this step, set DSP code[Whole Number] to the signaling point code of the MGW, DSP type to STP, and DSP bear type to MTP3. Run the ADD MTP3LKS command to add an MTP3 signaling link set. In this step, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 1. Run the ADD MTP3LNK command to add an MTP3 link to the link set. In this step, set Signalling link set index to the Signalling link set index set in 2. Run the ADD MTP3RT command to add an MTP3 route. In this step, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 1, and Signalling link set index to the Signalling link set index set in 2. Run the ADD N7DPC command to add the MSC as the destination signaling point. In this step, set DSP code[Whole Number] to the signaling point code of the MSC, DSP type to A, and DSP bear type to MTP3.
2. 3. 4.
5.
8-52
6.
Run the ADD MTP3RT command to add an MTP3 route. In this step, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 5, and Signalling link set index to the Signalling link set index set in 2. Run the ADD GCNNODE command to add a CN node. In this step, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 5.
7.
IP transmission 1. 2. 3. Run the ADD M3LE command to add an M3UA local entity. Run the ADD SCTPLNK command to add an SCTP link. Run the ADD N7DPC command to add the MGW as a destination signaling point. In this step, set DSP code[Whole Number] to the signaling point code of the MGW, DSP type to STP, and DSP bear type to M3UA. Run the ADD M3DE command to add an M3UA destination entity. In this step, set Local entity No. to the M3UA local entity No. set in 1, and DSP index to the DSP index set in 3. Run the ADD M3LKS command to add an M3UA signaling link set. In this step, set Destination entity No. to the Destination entity No. set in 4. Run the ADD M3LNK command to add an M3UA link. In this step, set Signalling link set index to the Signalling link set index set in 5, and set Subrack No., Slot No., and SCTP link No. to the Subrack No., Slot No., and SCTP link No. set in 2. Run the ADD M3RT command to add an M3UA route. In this step, set Destination entity No. to the Destination entity No. set in 4, and Signalling link set index to the Signalling link set index set in 5. Run the ADD N7DPC command to add the MSC as a destination signaling point. In this step, set DSP code[Whole Number] to the signaling point code of the MSC, DSP type to A, and DSP bear type to M3UA. Run the ADD M3DE command to add an M3UA destination entity. In this step, set Local entity No. to the M3UA Local entity No. set in 1, and DSP index to the DSP index set in 8.
4.
5. 6.
7.
8.
9.
10. Run the ADD M3RT command to add an M3UA route. In this step, set Destination entity No. to the Destination entity No. set in 9, and Signalling link set index to the Signalling link set index set in 5. l l Verification Procedure 1. Run the DSP N7DPC command to check that SCCP DSP state is Accessible. Deactivation Procedure Remove all the STP-related configurations, and then do as follows:
TDM transmission 1. Run the ADD N7DPC command to add the MSC as a destination signaling point. In this step, set DSP code[Whole Number] to the signaling point code of the MSC, DSP type to A, and DSP bear type to MTP3. Run the ADD MTP3LKS command to add an MTP3 signaling link set. In this step, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 1. Run the ADD MTP3LNK command to add an MTP3 link to the link set. In this step, set Signalling link set index to the Signalling link set index set in 2.
2. 3.
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
4.
Run the ADD MTP3RT command to add an MTP3 route. In this step, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 1, and Signalling link set index to the Signalling link set index set in 2. Run the ADD GCNNODE command to add a CN node. In this step, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 1.
5.
IP transmission 1. 2. 3. Run the ADD M3LE command to add an M3UA local entity. Run the ADD SCTPLNK command to add an SCTP link. Run the ADD N7DPC command to add the MSC as a destination signaling point. In this step, set DSP code[Whole Number] to the signaling point code of the MSC, DSP type to A, and DSP bear type to M3UA. Run the ADD M3DE command to add an M3UA destination entity. In this step, set Local entity No. to the M3UA Local entity No. set in 1, and DSP index to the DSP index set in 3. Run the ADD M3LKS command to add an M3UA signaling link set. In this step, set Destination entity No. to the Destination entity No. set in 4. Run the ADD M3LNK command to add an M3UA link. In this step, set Signalling link set index to the Signalling link set index set in 5, and set Subrack No., Slot No., and SCTP link No. to the Subrack No., Slot No., and SCTP link No. set in 2.
4.
5. 6.
----End
8.15 Configuring 14-Digit Signaling Point Code

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-111802 14-Digit signaling point code.
Prerequisite
None
Context
The 14-digit signaling point code feature provides the following benefits:
l
This feature conforms to the requirements of different signaling systems, thus facilitating the use of networking in different countries and areas. The equipment transferred to areas using different coding modes can still be used.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. For a newly-deployed site, run the ADD OPC command to add an Originating Signaling Point (OSP). In this step, set OSP code bits to BIT14(BIT14). If the OSPs in non-14-digit mode have been configured, run the RMV OPC command to remove all the OSPs, and then go toStep 1.
8-54
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)

NOTE
A Signaling Point Code (SPC) must be identical in the signaling network and cannot be 0.BSC6900 does not support configuring OSPs in different modes.
l l
Verification Procedure 1. 1. Run the LST OPC command to check that OSPs are in 14-digit mode. Run the RMV OPC command to remove configured OSPs. Deactivation Procedure
----End
8.16 Configuring the DRX

This section describes how to configure and verify the DRX.
Prerequisite
l
Configuration
The BCCH, SDCCH, and TCHs have been configured in the test cell. The BCCH, SDCCH, and TCHs have been configured in the test cell. You need to select RSL when enabling an Abis Interface CS Trace task in the test cell.
Verification

Context
No license is required to implement the DRX. DRX increases the call duration and standby time of an MS. Each MS is mapped to a paging group, and each paging group is mapped to a paging sub-channel in the serving cell. In idle mode, the MS detects the paging messages broadcast by the system only on the mapped paging sub-channel. The MS blocks other paging sub-channels by powering off certain hardware. This also saves power. The configuration of a BTS3012 in TDM mode is taken as an example.
Procedure
l Configuring the DRX 1. Run the SET GCELLIDLEBASIC command. In this step, set CCCH Blocks Reserved for AGCH to 2 and Multi-Frames in a Cycle on the Paging CH to 2_M_PERIOD(2 Multiframe Period). Run the SET GCELLIDLEBASIC command to set related parameters of the test cell. In this step, set CCCH Blocks Reserved for AGCH to 2 and Multi-Frames in a Cycle on the Paging CH to 2_M_PERIOD(2 Multiframe Period). Run the SND GCELLSYSMSG command to forcibly send the system message to the test cell. Check the messages with the type of BCCH Information over the Abis interface for the one whose system-info-type is system-information-3. In the IE controlHuawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8-55
Verifying the DRX 1.
2. 3.
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
channel-description of this message, if bs-ag-blks-res (CCCH Blocks Reserved for AGCH) is 2 and bs-pa-mfrms (Multi-Frames in a Cycle on the Paging CH) is 0, the system message is correct. 4. 5. Use an MS to make a call to another MS (assume that the IMSI of the called MS is "M"), and ensure that the call is set up successfully. Check the CS message of the Page Command type over the Abis interface. If the IE paging-group in this message is M%1000%14%14, the paging group contained in the paging message is consistent with the settings in the system message. In this case, the MS can implement DRX by monitoring the paging sub-channel.
NOTE
"%" in M%1000%14%14 indicates the MOD operation, and the group number is in decimal format.
----End
8.17 Configuring BTS Power Management

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-111601 BTS Power Management.
Prerequisite
l
None None None
License
Context
l
When there is no mains supply available, the BTS hierarchical power-off function is performed to reduce the power consumption and extend the discharge time of the battery. In this case, the system automatically blocks all TRXs except the BCCH TRX. This is called a soft shutdown. When the capacity of the battery drops to the preset value, the system automatically shuts down all the TRXs to prevent over-discharging of the battery. This is called a hard shutdown. Whether to use automatic power-off is configurable. The hierarchical power-off function especially suits the cascaded BTSs. When the mains power of the upper-level BTS is disconnected and the mains power of the lower-level BTS is normal, this function can be used to prolong the working time of the transmission module of the upper-level BTS to reduce the impact on the lower-level BTS. When the working environment is unfavorable or the temperature regulation unit does not work properly, the TMU shuts down the PAs for some TRXs to reduce the heat consumption if the temperature inside the cabinet exceeds the predefined thresholds. This prevents any adverse impact on the system. If the TRX is faulty or the VSWR far exceeds the limits, the TRX is made out-of-service and is shut down. The PA for the TRX is also shut down. This prevents the TRX from being burnt down. Whether to use this function and the related parameters to be used for this function are configurable. In this manner, the flexibility of the system is improved.
8-56
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAPMUBP. In this step, set Board Parameter Configuration Enabled to YES(YES) and set power management parameters. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSAPMUBP to query Hierarchical Power-off Config. Enabled. The expected result: The value of Hierarchical Power-off Config. Enabled is YES, and the values of power management parameters are the specified ones. l Deactivation Procedure 1. ----End Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAPMUBP to set Hierarchical Poweroff Config. Enabled to NO(NO).
8.18 Configuring Connection with TMA

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210601 Connection with TMA (Tower Mounted Amplifier).
Prerequisite
l

The RRU3004 does not support the connection with the TMA. The RRU3008 and RRU3908 support the connection with the TMA. The GRFU and MRFU support the connection with the TMA. The DRFU supports the connection with the TMA through the GATM board. None None
License
Context
Installed on the tower top, the TMA is a device for amplifying uplink signals. As an optional component of the antenna system, the TMA compensates for the feeder loss caused by a long feeder to improve the uplink sensitivity and converge. In a network whose uplink coverage is limited, the TMA can be installed to improve the RX sensitivity and expand the cell radius, thus reducing the number of BTSs and minimizing investments. If a BTS is configured with the TMA, users must configure the BTS-related parameters based on the actual RF antenna port, power supply modes, and TMA characteristics.
Procedure
l
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
Activation Procedure
1.
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP. In this step, set parameters Antenna Tributary 1 Flag, Antenna Tributary 1 Factor, Antenna Tributary 2 Flag, and Antenna Tributary 2 Factor. For details about the configuration of cabinet, subrack, and slot of the BTS, see the BSC6900 GSM Initial Configuration Guide. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSRXUBP to query the TMA-related parameters, including Antenna Tributary 1 Flag, Antenna Tributary 1 Factor, Antenna Tributary 2 Flag, and Antenna Tributary 2 Factor. On the LMT, double-click Abis Interface CS Trace on the Trace pane. In the displayed window, select "RSL" under "Trace Type"; in the "RSL" tab page, select "DCM(Measurement Report)", select "TRX" under "Filter Flag", and specify the TRX ID. For the RRU or RFU board whose RF feeder is attached with the TMA, perform a dialing test to occupy the channel. Then, check the measured level reported by the BTS. The expected result: The Uplink RxLev specified in the Measurement Report message is normal.
2.
3.
Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP. In this step,

Set Antenna Tributary 1 Flag to NO(NO). Set Antenna Tributary 2 Flag to NO(NO).
----End
8.19 Configuring Remote Electrical Tilt

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210602 Remote Electrical Tilt.
Prerequisite
l
The power switch for the RET antenna is ON in order to implement the RET antenna functionality. The overcurrent and undercurrent thresholds are checked since they are related to the number of RET antennas attached to the board. None None
License
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP. In this step, set RET ALD Power Switch, RET ALD Over Current Occur Threshold, RET ALD Over Current Clear Threshold, RET ALD Under Current Occur Threshold, and RET ALD Under Current Clear Threshold.
8-58
2. 3.
Run the BSC6900 MML command STR RETANTSCAN to scanning the RET antenna. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSRETANT to add an RET antenna. Note that the information such as the manufacturer can be obtained either from the user guide of the antenna or by scanning the RET antenna. Optional: To set the tilt angle of the RET antenna, Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSANTANGLE. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSRETANT to query the RET antenna information. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP RETANTTILT to query the tilt angle range of the RET antenna and the current tilt angle of the antenna.
4. l
Deactivation Procedure This feature need not be deactivated.
----End
8.20 Configuring 2-Antenna Receive Diversity

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210604 2-Antenna Receive Diversity.
Prerequisite
l
None None None
License
Context
The 2-Antenna Receive Diversity is an effective approach of reducing signal attenuation by using two antennas to receive a signal at the reception end, where two received signals are combined after certain processing.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. l Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP. In this step, set MRRU/GRRU Sending Receiving Mode to DOUBLE_ANTENNA. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSRXUBP to query the sending receiving mode of the board.
Deactivation Procedure This feature need not be deactivated.
----End
Example
//Activation 2-Antenna receive diversity SET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=153, RXUIDTYPE=RXUPOS, RXUCHAINNO=0, RXUPOS=1, RXUTYPE=MRRU, SndRcvMode2=DOUBLE_ANTENNA;
8.21 Configuring Base Station Clock

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210501 BTS Clock.
Prerequisite
l
When the synchronization with the GPS clock is configured, the DBS3900/BTS3900/ BTS3900A must be configured with the USCU. When the synchronization with the BITS clock is configured, the DBS3900/BTS3900/ BTS3900A must be configured with the USCU. None None
License
Context
The synchronization of the BTS clock provides the basis for the frame synchronization. The BTS uses the synchronization clock to obtain the reference clock source for the internal frame synchronization. The BTS supports three clock synchronization modes: synchronization with the Abis clock, synchronization with the GPS clock, and synchronization with the BITS clock. In addition, the BTS internal clock can work in free-run mode to temporarily provide a stable reference clock source for the BTS.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure Synchronization with the Abis clock (default mode) 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLKPARA. In this step, set Clock Type to TRCBSC_CLK(Trace BSC Clock). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK. In this step, set Clock Type to TRCGPS_CLK(Trace GPS Clock). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK. In this step, set Clock Type to EXTSYN_CLK(External Sync Clock). Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSCLK to query the current configuration of the system clock. The expected result:
Synchronization with the GPS clock 1.
Synchronization with the BITS clock 1. l
If... The clock information corresponds to the clock type configured The clock information is inconsistent with the configuration
Then... The configuration succeeds. The configuration fails.
2.
Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSATTR to query the attributes of the BTS. Here,

Set List Object to SITE(By Site). Select CLKATTR(CLKATTR) under the BTS Attribute check box.
The expected result: Clock attribute is Available. l Deactivation Procedure This feature need not be deactivated. ----End
8.22 Configuring PBT(Power Boost Technology)

This section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-115901 PBT(Power Boost Technology).
Prerequisite
l
Currently, the following types of BTSs support the PBT: the BTS3012, BTS3012AE, BTS3012 II, BTS3900 GSM, BTS3900A GSM, BTS3900L GSM, and DBS3900 GSM. The DTRU, DRRU, or DRFU board is configured for the base station. The doubletransceiver unit is configured with one carrier only on channel 0. None The license is activated.
License
Context
To improve uplink and downlink transmit power, power boost technology (PBT) offered by Huawei is an ideal solution. In PBT mode, the double-transceiver unit serves as a single transceiver. One signal output through modulation and DA conversion is divided into two RF signals. These two signals then enter the power amplifier for amplification. Then, the amplified signals are combined. As the two signals are aligned in phase, the transmit power is amplified and the downlink signal strength is increased. PBT is applicable to wide coverage areas. The following procedure takes how to configure PBT for the DTRU of the BTS3012 as an example. Figure 8-4 shows the connections between the DTRU and the DDPU in PBT mode.
Figure 8-4 Connections between the DTRU and DDPU in PBT mode
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Send Mode to PBT(PBT).
NOTE
When you configure PBT, the signal can be transmitted through only channel 0.
8-62
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
Verification Procedure 1. Optional: Use the MS to make a call.

NOTE
This step is required when the BCCH TRX is not carried on the TRX board. This step is not required when the BCCH TRX is carried on the TRX board.
2.
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Send Mode to NONE(none). Then test the BTS power by means of a power measurement instrument, and record the result. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Send Mode to PBT(PBT). Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GTRXDEV to query Send Mode. Send Mode is expected to set to PBT(PBT). Measure the BTS power by a related instrument, and record the result. Compare the test results obtained in Step 2 and Step 5. Withe PBT enabled, the power obtained in step 5 is expected to be much greater than that obtained in step 2.
3. 4. 5. 6.
----End
8.23 Configuring Transmit Diversity

This section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-115902 Transmit Diversity.
Prerequisite
l
Currently, the following types of BTSs support the transmit diversity: the BTS3012, BTS3012AE, BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3900 GSM, BTS3900A GSM, and DBS3900 GSM. The base station is configured with the double-transceiver unit, and the doubletransceiver unit is configured with only one carrier on channel 0. The cell has at least one dual-polarized antenna or two single-polarized antennas. None The license is activated.
License
Context
In transmit diversity mode, the baseband signal of one MS is transmitted on two RF channels. As there is no correlation between two antennas, the problems of dramatic change of signal level and QoS decrease due to multipath propagation are solved, thus improving the downlink coverage performance. The transmit diversity technology can improve the downlink signal quality, thus meeting the requirements for radio communications.
The following procedure takes how to configure transmit diversity for the DRFU of the BTS3900 as an example.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. l Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP. In this step, set DRRU Sending Receiving Mode to DOUBLE_ANTENNA(Double Feeder[2TX+2RX]). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Send Mode to DIVERSITY(Transmit Diversity). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Send Mode to NONE(none). Measure the BTS power by a related instrument, and record the result. The measured power is expected to be 0. 3. 4. 5. l Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP. In this step, set DRRU Sending Receiving Mode to DOUBLE_ANTENNA(Double Feeder[2TX+2RX]). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Send Mode to DIVERSITY(Transmit Diversity). Measure the power of tributary B by a related instrument, and record the result. With transmit diversity enabled, the measured power is expected not to be 0. Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated. ----End
8.24 Configuring Four-Way Receive Diversity

This section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-115903 Four-Way Receive Diversity. The four-way receive diversity combines the four-way receive signals to optimize the quality of uplink signals.
Prerequisite
l
Currently, the following types of BTSs support four-way receive diversity: the BTS3012 (DTRU), BTS3012AE (DTRU), BTS3006C (DDRM), BTS3002E(DDRM), BTS3900 (DRFU), and BTS3900A (DRFU). The base station is configured with the double-transceiver unit, and the doubletransceiver unit is configured with only one carrier. The cell has at least two dual-polarized antennas or four single-polarized antennas. None The license is activated.
License
8-64
Context
The four-way receive signals are sent to one TRX simultaneously. Through the diversity combination technique, the uplink receiver sensitivity is improved. The four-way receive diversity technology optimizes the quality of uplink signals to meet the demanding requirements for radio communications in certain cases and to improve the uplink performance in wide coverage scenarios. The following procedure takes how to configure four-way receive diversity for the DRFU of the BTS3900 as an example.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP. In this step, set DRRU Sending Receiving Mode to DOUBLEFOUR_ANTENNA(Double Feeder[2TX +4RX]). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Receive Mode to FOURDIVERSITY(Four Diversity Receiver).
NOTE
2.
If the TRX of the double-transceiver unit is allocated to channel 0, set Send Mode to NOCOMB (No Combination), PBT(PBT), DIVERSITY(Transmit Diversity), DDIVERSITY (Dynamic Transmit Diversity), or DPBT(DPBT). If the TRX of the double-transceiver unit is allocated to channel 1, Send Mode can be set to only NOCOMB(No Combination).
Verification Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GTRXDEV to query the attributes of the TRX board. Check whether Receive Mode is set to FOURDIVERSITY(Four Diversity Receiver).
----End
8.25 Configuring Dynamic Transmit Diversity

This section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-118101 Dynamic Transmit Diversity.
Prerequisite
l
Currently, the following types of units support transmit diversity: the DTRU of the BTS3012/BTS3012AE, the DDRM of the BTS3006C/BTS3002E, the DRFU of the BTS3900/BTS3900A, and the RRU3004 and RRU3008 of the DBS3900. The BTS is configured with the double-transceiver TRXs. The cell has at least one dual-polarized antenna or two single-polarized antennas. None
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)

l
License
The license is activated.
The test cell is a concentric cell.
Context
In dynamic transmit diversity mode, the same timeslots of the two TRXs in one doubletransceiver TRX are set to use transmit diversity, and other timeslots still use non-transmit diversity. After the timeslots in transmit diversity mode are released, they can be set back to non-transmit diversity. Dynamic transmit diversity fully utilizes idle timeslots and expands the coverage in the areas with weak signals. In addition, adjustments can be made according to actual network conditions to achieve the balance between capacity and coverage. The following procedure takes how to configure dynamic transmit diversity for the DTRU of the BTS3012 as an example.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC. In this step, set Dynamic Transmission Div Supported to DDIVERSITY(Dynamic Transmit Diversity). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Send Mode of the TRXs in the overlaid cell to DDIVERSITY(Dynamic Transmit Diversity).
NOTE
2.
l l
You can run the BSC6900 MML command LST GTRXIUO to check the concentric attribute of the TRX. To configure dynamic transmit diversity, two TRXs must be configured in a DTRU. In addition, dynamic transmit diversity cannot be configured on the MBCCH TRX.
Verification Procedure 1. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOIUO. In this step, set Assign Optimum Layer to SysOpt(System optimization). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXADMSTAT. In this step, set Administrative State to Lock(Lock) for the TRXs except the BCCH TRX and except those TRXs whose Send Mode is not DDIVERSITY(Dynamic Transmit Diversity). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT. In this step, set Administrative State to Lock(Lock) for the TCH/H or the TCH/F that carries the BCCH. Monitor the channel status by referring to Monitoring Channel Status and use an MS to make an emergency call.
NOTE
3.
4.
A TCH in the overlaid subcell is assigned to the MS only when the uplink receive level of the SDCCH meets the following condition: Assign-optimum-level Threshold PBT gain < SDCCH uplink Rx level < Assign-optimum-level Threshold. Assign-optimum-level Threshold is set to 35 by default and the value of PBT gain is 4. You can change the value of Assignoptimum-level Threshold according to the SDCCH uplink Rx level so that the system can allocate a channel in the overlaid subcell. In this way, dynamic transmit diversity can be triggered.
8-66
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
The expected result: Checking the channel monitoring page on the BSC6900 LMT, you find that channels of two TRXs on the same timeslot are used during the call. One channel is in the Working state, and the other is in the Subordinate Channel state. l Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated. ----End
8.26 Configuring Dynamic PBT

This section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-118102 Dynamic PBT.
Prerequisite
l
The following types of BTSs support the PBT: the BTS3012, BTS3012AE, BTS3012 II, BTS3900 GSM, BTS3900A GSM, and DBS3900 GSM. The DTRU, DRRU, or DRFU board is configured for the base station. The doubletransceiver unit is configured with one carrier only on channel 0. None The license is activated.
License
The test cell is a concentric cell.
Context
In dynamic PBT mode, the corresponding timeslots on the two TRXs of a DTRU are set to PBT, and other timeslots are set to non-PBT. After the timeslots in PBT mode are released, they can be set to non-PBT. Dynamic PBT fully utilizes idle timeslots and expands the coverage in the areas with weak signals. In addition, adjustments can be made on the basis of actual network conditions to achieve the balance between capacity and coverage. Dynamic PBT can increase the handover success rate of the MSs at the edge of the cell by improving the performance of the concentric cell enabled with the co-BCCH function. The following procedure takes how to configure dynamic PBT for the DTRU of the BTS3012 as an example.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC. In this step, set Dynamic Transmission Div Supported to DPBT(DPBT). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Send Mode to DPBT(DPBT).
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
8-67

NOTE
l l
You can run the BSC6900 MML command LST GTRXIUO to check the concentric attribute of the TRX. To configure dynamic PBT, two TRXs are required. In addition, dynamic PBT cannot be configured on the MBCCH TRX.
Verification Procedure 1. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOIUO. In this step, set Assign Optimum Layer to SysOpt(System optimization). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXADMSTAT. In this step, set Administrative State to Lock(Lock) for the TRXs except the BCCH TRX and except those TRXs whose Send Mode is not DPBT(DPBT). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT. In this step, set Administrative State to Lock(Lock) for the TCH/H or the TCH/F that carries the BCCH. Monitor the channel status by referring to Monitoring Channel Status and use an MS to make an emergency call.
NOTE
3.
4.
A TCH in the overlaid subcell is assigned to the MS only when the uplink receive level of the SDCCH meets the following condition: Assign-optimum-level Threshold PBT gain < SDCCH uplink Rx level < Assign-optimum-level Threshold. Assign-optimum-level Threshold is set to 35 by default, and the value of PBT gain is 4. You can change the value of Assignoptimum-level Threshold according to the SDCCH uplink Rx level so that the system can allocate a channel in the overlaid subcell. In this way, dynamic PBT can be triggered.
The expected result: Checking the channel monitoring page on the BSC6900 LMT, you find that channels of two TRXs on the same timeslot are used during the call. One channel is in the Working state, and the other is in the Subordinate Channel state. l Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated.
----End
8.27 Configuring Co-BCCH Cell

This section desribes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114501 Co-BCCH Cell. Co-BCCH cell increases the traffic capacity of a cell, reduces handovers and interference, and implements the continuous coverage and sparse coverage in hot spots.
Prerequisite
The license for this feature is activated. The BTS serving the co-BCCH cell to be added must support the configured frequency band.
8-68
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
Context
CAUTION
l
For CS services, when the co-BCCH cell is configured and the BCCH is configured in the overlaid subcell, if Allocate OL Channel Based on RX Level is set to ON(On), then calls of low level may not access the cell successfully. For PS services, when the co-BCCH cell is configured, if Dynamic Channel Conversion Parameter of Concentric Cell is set to CONVERT1(Only convert at OL), the call access will be affected.
A co-BCCH cell consists of an overlaid subcell and an underlaid subcell. The frequency band configuration is as follows:
l
If the overlaid subcell is configured in the DCS1800M, the underlaid subcell is configured in the GSM900M or GSM850M. If the overlaid subcell is configured in the PCS1900M, the underlaid subcell is configured in the GSM850M.
NOTE
The signal loss of the DCS1800M band changes with the transmission distance. At the distance of 0.5-1 km, the signal power of the DCS1800M band is about 15 dB lower than the signal power of the GSM900M band.
The configuration of the co-BCCH cell should comply with the following principles:
l
Generally, a channel in the overlaid subcell is not directly assigned to a call, the incoming inter-cell handover request is not directly assigned to the overlaid subcell, and a call beyond the coverage of the DCS1800M TRX is not forcibly assigned to the overlaid subcell. The traffic in the underlaid subcell and the overlaid subcell should be properly assigned to maintain the traffic balance between the overlaid subcell and the underlaid subcell. Generally, the GSM900M or GSM850M TRX is configured in the underlaid cell to expand the coverage, whereas the DCS1800M or PCS1900M TRX is configured in the overlaid cell to absorb the traffic. Generally, the BCCH is configured on the GSM900M TRX. The priorities of different types of TRXs are: P-GSM > E-GSM > R-GSM. The SDCCH, PDCH, and BCCH should be configured on the same TRX. The frequency hopping between GSM900M and DCS1800M is not allowed. The frequency hopping within the same frequency band is allowed. Avoid using a multi-layer concentric cell due to inconsistent combination modes of the TRXs on the same frequency band. A multi-layer concentric cell affects the network KPIs, such as handover success rate and assignment success rate.
l l
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Optional: When a cell supports GSM850_1900, you need to modify the BSC attributes. Run the SET BSCBASIC command to set Support High Frequency Band to PCS1900.
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)

NOTE
If the cell to be added is in the GSM900_DCS1800 or GSM850_1800 band, perform the following steps:
2. 3. 4. l
Run the ADD GCELL command to add a cell and set the parameters Freq. Band and BCCH IUO of Double Frequency Cell. Run the MOD GCELL command to configure the concentric cell attributes of the cell. Run the SET GCELLHOIUO command to set the handover parameters in the concentric cell. Run the LST GCELL command to query Cell Inner/Extra Property and BCCH IUO of Double Frequency cell. Run the LST GCELLHOIUO command to query the handover parameters in the concentric cell. Run the RMV GCELL command to remove the co-BCCH cell to be deactivated.
Deactivation Procedure 1.
----End
8.28 Configuring Multi-band Sharing One BSC

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114401 Multi-band Sharing One BSC.
Prerequisite
The license for this feature is activated. The TRXs configured for the BTS must support corresponding frequency bands.
Context
l
Huawei GBSS supports the following types of multiband networks:

GSM850 band + GSM900 band + DCS1800 band GSM850 band + GSM900 band + PCS1900 band
l l
The most common combination is GSM900 with DCS1800 and GSM850 with PCS1900. The Huawei GBSS supports only the GSM900/DCS1800 co-BCCH cell, and does not support the GSM850/PCS1900 co-BCCH cell. Huawei GBSS supports GSM900 band, DCS1800 band, PCS1900 band, and GSM850 band. Huawei GBSS does not support GSM450 band or GSM480 band.
The dual-band network configured on the GSM900 and DCS1800 bands of a BTS is taken as an example.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the ADD GCELL command to add a GSM cell. In this step, set Freq. Band to GSM900.
8-70
2. 3. l 1.
Run the ACT GCELL command to activate the cell. Repeat Step 1 and Step 2 to set Freq. Band to DCS1800. Run the ADD GCELL command to add a GSM cell. In this step, set Freq. Band to GSM900. Based on network planning, set Cell Index, Cell Name, MCC, MNC, Cell LAC, and Cell CI. Repeat Step 1 to add GSM cells, and set Freq. Band to DCS1800. Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command to set the basic handover parameters of the GSM900 and DCS1800 cells based on the network optimization and planning requirements. Use an MS supporting the GSM900 frequency band to camp on a 900 MHz cell. Perform the dialing test. The call is normal. Use an MS supporting the DCS1800 frequency band to camp on a 1800 MHz cell. Perform the dialing test. The call is normal. Use an MS supporting the GSM900 and DCS1800 frequency bands to camp on a 900 MHz cell. Perform the dialing test. After the call is set up, move the MS towards the centre of the 1800 MHz cell. Then, observe the window displaying the monitored channel status. The MS is handed over to the 1800 MHz cell, and the call is still normal.
NOTE
Verification Procedure
2. 3.
4. 5. 6.
l l
On the LMT, click Device Maintenance. In the Device Navigation Tree, right-click a specified cell, and then choose Monitor Channel Status. When a call is handed over to the 1800 MHz cell, the color of a channel in the Monitor Channel Status window is displayed as green. This indicates that the channel is occupied by the call handed to the 1800 MHz cell.
Deactivation Procedure 1. 2. 3. Run the DEA GCELL command to deactivate the cell whose Freq. Band is set to GSM900. Run the LST GCELL command to query the Active status. The expected result: Active status is DEACTIVATED. Repeat step 1 to step 2 to deactivate the cell whose Freq. Band is set to DCS1800.
----End
8.29 Configuring Enhanced Dual-Band Network

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114402 Enhanced Dual-Band Network.
Prerequisite
l l
The license for this feature is activated. When two cells belong to different operators, the enhanced dual-band network cannot be configured. Before changing the relation between the cell and the operator, check whether the enhanced dual-band network is configured. If the enhanced dual-band network is configured, modify the attributes of the enhanced dual-band network.
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
Context
The enhanced dual-band network is an improved version of the existing dual-band network. In the enhanced dual-band network, two single-band cells at the same level and layer with different coverage areas are logically formed into a cell group with two bidirectional neighboring cells. One is an overlaid subcell and the other is an underlaid subcell. In the enhanced dual-band network algorithm, channel resources can be shared and cell load is balanced between the two cells in a cell group.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. A GSM900 cell and a DCS1800 cell are configured in the GBSS. Run the ADD G2GNCELL command to configure the GSM900 cell as the uni-directional 2G neighboring cell of the DCS1800 cell. Repeat step Step 1 to configure the DCS1800 cell as the uni-directional 2G neighboring cell of the GSM900 cell, so that the two cells are configured as bidirectional neighboring cells. Run the MOD GCELL command to modify the attributes of the GSM900 cell. In this step, set Cell IUO Type to EDB_cell(Enhanced Double Frequency Cell), Cell Inner/Extra Property to Extra(Extra), and Same Group Cell Index Type to BYID (By Index). Then, specify the Same Group Cell Index to the index of the DCS1800 cell. Verify the call access function in the enhanced dual-band network. 1. 2. 3. Run the SET GCELLCCBASIC command twice to set ECSC of the two cells to YES(Yes). Run the SET GCELLBASICPARA command twice to set Directed Retry of the two cells to YES(Yes). Run the SET GCELLHOEDBPARA command to set the parameters of the GSM900 cell. In this step, set UL Subcell Assignment Optimization to YES (Yes), UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold to 0, UL Subcell General Overload Threshold to 1, and Distance Between Boundaries of Subcells and Distance Hysteresis Between Boundaries to 0. Set Load HO Allowed and Load HO of OL Subcell to UL Subcell to NO(No). Make MS 1 and MS 2 (both supporting 900 MHz and 1800 MHz frequency bands) camp on the GSM900 cell. Then, use MS 1 to make a call to a fixed-line phone. MS 1 is assigned to a channel of the GSM900 cell. Maintain the call of MS 1 and use MS 2 to make a call to the fixed-line phone in the GSM900 cell. MS 2 is assigned to a channel of the DCS1800 cell because the load of the underlaid subcell is higher than UL Subcell General Overload Threshold. This indicates that the call in the underlaid subcell can be assigned to the overlaid subcell when the traffic in the underlaid subcell is heavy and the signals in the overlaid subcell are strong enough. Terminate all the calls. Run the SET GCELLHOEDBPARA command to set the parameters of the DCS1800 cell. In this step, set UL Subcell Assignment Optimization to NO(No), OL Subcell Assignment Optimization to YES(Yes), UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold to 50, and UL Subcell General Overload Threshold to 80.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
8-72
7. 8.
Run the SET GCELLHOCTRL command to set the parameters of the DCS1800 cell. In this step, set Min Power Level For Directed Retry to 0. Make MS 1 camp on the DCS1800 cell and originate a call. MS 1 is assigned to the underlaid GSM900 subcell because the load of the underlaid subcell is not higher than UL Subcell General Overload Threshold. This indicates that the call in the overlaid subcell can be assigned to the underlaid subcell when the traffic in the underlaid subcell is light. Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command. In this step, set all parameters of enabling a certain type of handover to NO(No) and Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold to 4. Run the SET GCELLHOEDBPARA command to set the parameters of the DCS1800 cell. In this step, set UL Subcell Assignment Optimization to NO(No), OL Subcell Assignment Optimization to NO(No), UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold to 50, UL Subcell General Overload Threshold to 80, Load HO Allowed to YES(Yes), Load HO of OL Subcell to UL Subcell to YES(Yes), Incoming OL Subcell HO Level TH to 10, and Outgoing OL Subcell HO Level TH to 5. Make MS 1 camp on the DCS1800 cell and originate a call to the fixed-line phone. MS 1 is assigned to a channel in the overlaid subcell. Then, MS 1 is handed over to the GSM900 cell because the load of the underlaid subcell is lower than UL Subcell General Overload Threshold. On the A interface, the HANDOVER PERFORM message is traced and the handover cause value in the message is traffic. Maintain the call of MS 1. Then, run the SET GCELLHOEDBPARA command to set the parameters of the GSM900 cell. In this step, set UL Subcell Assignment Optimization to NO(No), OL Subcell Assignment Optimization to NO(No), UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold to 0, UL Subcell General Overload Threshold to 1, Load HO Allowed to YES(Yes), Load HO of OL Subcell to UL Subcell to YES(Yes), Incoming OL Subcell HO Level TH to 10, and Outgoing OL Subcell HO Level TH to 5. The call is handed over from the GSM900 cell back to the DCS1800 cell because the load in the underlaid subcell is higher than UL Subcell General Overload Threshold. On the A interface, the HANDOVER PERFORM message is traced and the handover cause value in the message is traffic. Maintain the call. Then, run the SET GCELLHOEDBPARA command to set the parameters of the DCS1800 cell. In this step, set UL Subcell Assignment Optimization to NO(No), OL Subcell Assignment Optimization to NO(No), UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold to 0, UL Subcell General Overload Threshold to 1, Load HO Allowed to YES(Yes), Load HO of OL Subcell to UL Subcell to YES(Yes), Incoming OL Subcell HO Level TH to 63, and Outgoing OL Subcell HO Level TH to 62. Set Inner Cell EDGE HO Enable to YES(Yes). MS 1 is handed over the GSM900 cell because the receive level of MS 1 is lower than Outgoing OL Subcell HO Level TH. On the A interface, the HANDOVER PERFORM message is traced and the handover cause value in the message is better cell.
Verify the handover in the enhanced dual-band network. 1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
8-73

NOTE
This type of edge handover requires that the underlaid subcell is more preferably selected as the target cell for handover than the overlaid subcell. You can adjust the levels of the overlaid subcell and underlaid subcell, so that the level of the underlaid subcell is higher than the level of the overlaid subcell.
Deactivation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. Run the MOD GCELL command to modify the attributes of the GSM900 cell. In this step, set Cell IUO Type to Normal_cell(Normal Cell). Run the MOD GCELL command to modify the attributes of the DCS1800 cell. In this step, set Cell IUO Type to Normal_cell(Normal Cell). Run the RMV G2GNCELL command to remove the GSM900 cell from the neighboring cell list of the DCS1800 cell. Run the RMV G2GNCELL command to remove the DCS1800 cell from the neighboring cell list of the GSM900 cell.
----End
8.30 Configuring Flex MAIO

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature GBFD-117001 Flex Mobile Allocation Index Offset (MAIO).
Prerequisite
l l
The license is activated. A cell is configured for frequency hopping, and the MAs used by the same timeslot have the same length. Frame offset is not configured for the BTS.
Context
CAUTION
The PS services do not support flex MAIO. Flex MAIO must be configured for all the cells under the same BTS, and the settings of flex MAIO parameters must be the same in all the cells. Flex MAIO helps reduce the co-channel interference and adjacent-channel interference in the GSM system through preferential selection of channels with less interference during channel assignment. Each cell can be configured with a maximum of two MAs. Flex MAIO cannot be enabled simultaneously in both the overlaid cell and the underlaid cell.
Procedure
l
8-74
1. l
Run the MOD GCELL command. In this step, set Start Flex MAIO Switch and HSN Modification Switch to ON(On). On the Trace tab page of the LMT, choose Trace > GSM Services > Single User CS Trace to Tracing CS Domain Messages of a Single Subscriber. Use an MS to make a call in the cell with flex MAIO, and check whether the IE hopping channel is contained in the Channel Activation message through the LMT. Expected result: hopping channel carries the valid maio and hsn. Run the MOD GCELL command. In this step, set Start Flex MAIO Switch and HSN Modification Switch to OFF(Off).
----End
8.31 Configuring ICC

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115801 ICC.
Prerequisite
l
Currently, the following BTSs support ICC: the BTS3012, BTS3012AE, BTS3900 GSM, BTS3900A GSM, and DBS3900 GSM. None The license is activated.
License
Context
Interference Cancellation Combining (ICC) is a technology that combines signals of multiple antennas to suppress interference. Generally, the interference received by different antennas is generated by the same interference source. Thus, there are correlations between the interference signals received by different antennas. ICC uses the correlations when combing signals to eliminate some interference. In this way, ICC improves the anti-interference capability of equipment and increases the uplink coverage and receiver sensitivity.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLBTSSOFT to view the value of software parameter No. 53. If the value is an odd number, it indicates that the ICC function is enabled. Otherwise, run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBTSSOFT to enable the ICC function. In this step,

Set Item Index to 53. Set Item Value to its current value plus one.
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
Verification Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLBTSSOFT to view the value of software parameter No. 53. If the value is an odd number, it indicates that the ICC function is enabled. Otherwise, the ICC function is disabled. Perform an FTP service in the existing network and then view the upload rate. If the ICC function is enabled, the upload rate is increased. If the ICC function is disabled, the upload rate is decreased. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLBTSSOFT to view the value of software parameter No. 53. If the value is an even number, it indicates that the ICC function is disabled. Otherwise, run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBTSSOFT to disable the ICC function. In this step,

2.
Deactivation Procedure 1. 2.
Set Item Index to 53. Set Item Value to its current value minus one.
----End
8.32 Configuring EICC

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115821 EICC.
Prerequisite
l
The BTS3012 (QTRU), BTS3012AE (QTRU), BTS3900E, and BTS3900B do not support the feature. Um Interface Software Synchronization is recommended. None
License
Context
l
The interference among the signals received by multiple antennas has both spatial correlation and temporal correlation: CCI and ISI. Considering the spatial correlation and temporal correlation of the interference, ICC eliminates these two types of interference independently. EICC, however, considers the correlation of these two types of interference and constructs the multidimensional combining coefficient matrix to combine the signals according to the maximum signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) criteria. In this way, EICC obtains the optimized uplink signals. ICC requires the matrix of interference. The matrix of interference is calculated on the basis of the training sequence of wanted signals. For each receive signal, the network estimates a channel model based on the training sequence of the signal, reconstructs the wanted signal, and subtracts the wanted signal from the receive signal to obtain the interfering signal. Then, the network estimates the matrix of each interfering signal and analyzes the statistical dependency of these interfering signals. Based on the statistical dependency, some
8-76
interference is eliminated during the combination of receive signals to maximize the combination gain.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. l Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT to enable EICC for the cell. In this step, set EICC Allowed to YES(Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLSOFT to query EICC Allowed and thus verify the EICC status. Perform an FTP service in the existing network and then view the upload rate. If the EICC function is enabled, the upload rate is increased. If the EICC function is disabled, the upload rate is decreased. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT to disable EICC for the cell. In this step, set EICC Allowed to NO(No).
----End
8.33 Configuring Frequency Hopping

This section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping. The function consists of radio frequency (RF) frequency hopping (FH) and baseband FH.
Prerequisite
l
The cell must be configured with at least two TRXs. None The license is activated.
License
Context
FH can simplify frequency planning, reduce interference, improve voice quality, and increase system capacity. When the PS services use coding schemes of high rate such as CS3, CS4, and MCS5 through MCS9, the application of FH will exert negative impact on the PS services. In this case, enabling FH is not recommended. When the cell activation state is Active, the FH feature can be configured quickly.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1.
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA GCELL to deactivate the cell.
2.
Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELLMAGRP to add a FH group. In this step, set Index Type to BYID(By Index), and then set Cell Index, Hop Index, Hop Mode, and Frequency.
NOTE
Set Hop Mode to BaseBand_FH(Baseband FH) or RF_FH(RF FH) as required. If the BCCH participates in baseband FH, the cell must be configured with at least two FH groups.
3.
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPTP to set the FH type of the cell. In this step, set Index Type to BYID(By Index), and then set Cell Index and Frequency Hopping Mode. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXHOP to set the FH type of a TRX. In this step, set TRX ID and Hop Type. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANHOP. In this step, set Channel Hop Index and Channel MAIO.
NOTE
4. 5.
6. l 1.
Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT GCELL to activate the cell. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPQUICKSETUP to quickly set the frequency hopping of the cell. In this step, set Index Type to BYID(By Index), and then set Cell Index. Set Frequency Hopping Mode, and then set Frequency Hopping Mode of BCCH TRX and TRXID LST. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPQUICKSETUP. In this step, set Index Type to BYID(By Index), and then set Cell Index. Set Frequency Hopping Mode to BaseBand_FH(Baseband frequency hopping) and Frequency Hopping Mode of BCCH TRX to Hop(Hop). Use the MS to initiate a call in the cell to be verified. The call is initiated successfully and the voice quality is good. In the Abis signaling tracing window, the Assignment Command message is traced, and the value of the information element h:rf-hoppingchannel in the message is 1.
Procedure for Quick Activation
2.
----End
8.34 Configuring BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping

This section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-113702 BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping.
Prerequisite
l
The cell must be configured with at least two TRXs.

8-78

l
The feature depends on baseband FH in GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping. The feature and RF FH in GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping are mutually exclusive. The license is activated.
License
Context
FH can simplify frequency planning, reduce interference, improve voice quality, and increase system capacity. When the PS services use coding schemes of high rate such as CS3, CS4, and MCS5 through MCS9, the application of FH will exert negative impact on the PS services. In this case, enabling FH is not recommended. When the cell activation state is Active, BCCH carrier FH can be activated quickly.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA GCELL to deactivate the cell. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELLMAGRP to add an FH group and add the BCCH to the FH group. In this step, set Index Type to BYID(By Index), and then set Cell Index, Hop Index, Hop Mode, and Frequency.
NOTE
Set Hop Mode to BaseBand_FH(Baseband FH) or RF_FH(RF FH) as required. If the BCCH participates in baseband FH, the cell must be configured with at least two FH groups.
3.
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPTP to set the FH type of the cell. In this step, set Index Type to BYID(By Index), and then set Cell Index and Frequency Hopping Mode. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXHOP to set the FH type of the BCCH TRX. In this step, set TRX ID and set Hop Type to BaseBand_FH(Baseband Frequency Hopping). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANHOP. In this step, set Channel Hop Index and Channel MAIO.
NOTE
4.
5.
l l
When the same FH group is used for the TRXs, the MAIO of the same channel of the TRXs must be different. The BCCH participates in baseband FH and channel 0 does not participate in FH. Set Channel Hop Index to 255.
6. l 1.
Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT GCELL to activate the cell. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPQUICKSETUP to quickly set frequency hopping for the cell. In this step, set Index Type toBYID(By Index), and then set Cell Index. Set Frequency Hopping Mode, Frequency Hopping Mode of BCCH TRX, and TRXID LST. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPQUICKSETUP. In this step, set Index Type to BYID(By Index), and then set Cell Index to the index of the cell
Procedure for Quick Activation
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
to be verified. Set Frequency Hopping Mode toBaseBand_FH(Baseband frequency hopping) and Frequency Hopping Mode of BCCH TRX to Hop (Hop). 2. Use the MS to initiate a call in the cell to be verified. The call is initiated successfully and the voice quality is good. In the Abis signaling tracing window, the Assignment Command message is traced, and the value of the information element h:rf-hoppingchannel in the message is 1.
----End
8.35 Configuring Antenna Frequency Hopping

This section describes how to activate the optional feature GBFD-113703 Antenna Frequency Hopping.
Prerequisite
l
The base station must be a double-transceiver base station or a base station of the 3900 series. There are at lease two antennas in the cell participating in antenna FH. None The license is activated.
License
Context
Antenna frequency hopping enables the downlink data on each TRX to be randomly transmitted on other TRXs. This improves the data receiving quality of the MS from the BCCH TRX and the data sending quality of the BCCH TRX, thus improving network performance. If the cell supports both baseband frequency hopping and antenna frequency hopping, the TRX involved in baseband frequency hopping must also participate in antenna frequency hopping. When the cell activation state is Active, the antenna frequency hopping feature can be configured quickly.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. l
8-80
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPANT. In this step, set Cell Antenna Hopping to YES_HPANT(Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELLHOPANTGRP to configure antenna FH. In this step, set Index Type and Hop TRX Group Index.
Procedure for Quick Configuration

1.
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPANTQUICKSETUP to quickly configure antenna FH. In this step, set Index Type and Cell Antenna Hopping.
----End
8.36 Configuring BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature GBFD-118001 BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing.
Prerequisite
l l l l
The license is activated. The XPUa/XPUb board is configured. The Abis interface board is configured. There are idle ports on the Abis interface board.
Context
NOTE
If BCCH dense frequency multiplexing is applied with the increase of the cell load, the handover from a non-BCCH TRX to the BCCH TRX will be triggered, leading to the increase on the handover of the whole network. The concentric cell, Co-BCCH cell, and multiband network do not support the BCCH dense frequency multiplexing.
The BCCH dense frequency multiplexing technique is used in networks with limited frequency resources. It helps to reduce the number of frequencies occupied by the BCCH TRXs so that more frequencies can be used for frequency hopping, thus increasing the system capacity.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. Run the SET GCELLCHMGBASIC command. In this step, set TIGHT BCCH Switch to ON(On). Run the SET GCELLCHMGAD command. In this step, set Level Thresh. for Assign BCCH Udr TBCCH and Quality Thresh. for Assign BCCH Udr TBCCH as required. Run the SET GCELLHOAD command. In this step, set Load Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO. Use the MS to initiate a call in the cell to be verified. Expected result: The call is initiated successfully and the voice quality is good. 2. Run the command. In this step, set Object Type to CELL(Cell) and specify Cell Index. The value of Sub Channel Status is Occupied.
3. l
Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the SET GCELLCHMGBASIC command. In this step, set TIGHT BCCH Switch to OFF(Off).
----End
8.37 Configuring the IBCA

This section describes how to configure the Interference Based Channel Allocation (IBCA).
Prerequisite
l l
The license is activated. The frequency hopping (FH) cell is configured, and the FH TRX with the FH mode of RF_FH(RF Frequency Hopping) or BaseBand_FH(Baseband Frequency Hopping) is available in the cell. The HSN of all MA groups in the cell is set to 0. The cell is enabled with the Huawei III power control algorithm. Flex MAIO and Flex TSC are disabled in the cell. Soft synchronization or GPS synchronization between BTSs is configured.
l l l l
Context
A license is required to implement IBCA. IBCA improves the frequency usage and further increases the network capacity.
NOTE
l l l l l l
In an IBCA-enabled cell, each timeslot and each frequency band can be configured with only one MA group; for a co-BCCH cell, two MA groups can be configured (one for each frequency band). The total number of MA groups in an IBCA-enabled cell and its IBCA neighboring cells must not exceed 3. The number of frequencies in each MA group in an IBCA-enabled cell must not exceed 12. A maximum of 12 IBCA neighboring cells can be configured for an IBCA-enabled cell. An IBCA-enabled cell does not support the active power control algorithm. The IBCA uses its own power prediction algorithm to predict the initial power. In an IBCA-enabled cell with IBCA User Dyn Measure Neighbor Cell set to YES(Yes), the value of IBCA Waiting Measurement Report Time must be smaller than both Min Interval for Consecutive Hos and Min Interval for Emerg.Hos. In an IBCA-enabled cell, the PDCH and dynamic PDCH cannot be configured on the TRX that participates in frequency hopping. If the built-in PCU is used, the value of Maximum Number of PDCHs configured on the TRX that participates in frequency hopping must be set to 0. In an IBCA cell, MR.Preprocessing cannot be enabled.
Procedure
l Configuring IBCA 1. Run the ADD BRD command to add an XPUa/XPUb in the MPS/EPS. In this step, set Logical function type to MCP.
8-82

NOTE
l l
To implement the IBCA between BSCs, you need to configure the FG2a/FG2c interface board. A maximum of two MCP boards can be configured to share the IBCA calculation load and improve the system reliability.
2. 3. 4.
Run the SET GCELLCHMGAD command. In this step, set IBCA Allowed to YES (Yes). Run the SET OTHSOFTPARA command. In this step, set IBCA Infor Report Period Within BSC and IBCA Infor Report Period Between BSC. Run the SET GCELLMAIOPLAN command. In this step, set Index Type to BYID or BYNAME, specify Hop Index, and then set related MAIO parameters based on network planning. Run the ADD G2GNCELL command. In this step, set IBCA Neighbor Cell Flag and IBCA Dyn Measure Neighbour Cell Flag to YES(Yes). Perform the operations in Tracing CS Domain Messages of a Single Subscriber. Run the SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT command. In this step, set Administrative State of the TCH on a timeslot of the IBCA cell to UNLOCK(Unlock) and set Administrative State of the TCHs on other timeslots of the IBCA cell to LOCK (lock). Use the MS in the cell to originate a call, and check the IE maio of the Channel Activation message in the second record in the Single User CS Trace dialog box. Repeat step Step 3, and then compare the values of maio. Expected result: The values of maio are changed. This indicates that IBCA is enabled.
5. l
Verifying IBCA 1. 2.
3. 4. l
Verifying IBCA handover Assume that cell 1 and cell 2 are configured with IBCA. 1. 2. Run the ADD G2GNCELL command to set cell 2 as an IBCA neighboring cell of cell 1. Run the SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT command. In this step, set Administrative State of the TCH on a timeslot of cell 2 to UNLOCK(Unlock) and set Administrative State of the TCHs on other timeslots of the IBCA cell to LOCK(Lock). Use the MS in cell 1 to originate a call, and run the SET FHO command to hand over the call from cell 1 to cell 2. In this step, set Object type to CELL(Cell), Cell ID to the index of cell 2 or Cell Name to the name of cell 2 , and Handover Scope to OUTCELL(Outgoing cell). Tracing CS Domain Messages of a Single Subscriber, and check and record the value of maio in the Channel Activation message of cell 2. Use the MS in cell 1 to originate a call, and repeat steps Step 3 through Step 4. Compare the two recorded maio values. Expected result: The values of maio are changed. This indicates that IBCA handover is performed.
3.
4. 5. 6.
----End
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
8-83
8.38 Configuring Soft-Synchronized Network

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature GBFD-118201 SoftSynchronized Network.
Prerequisite
l l
The license is activated. Each BSC is configured with at least two BTSs, which support the soft-synchronized network. Each BTS is configured with two or more cells. In addition, the longitude, latitude, and antenna azimuth of each cell are configured. The link between BSCs is configured and the communication between BSCs is normal.
Context
A license is required to activate soft-synchronized network. The soft-synchronized network applies to the scenario of tight frequency reuse and requires the cooperation of network planning and features such as IBCA. It can effectively improve the performance of the KPIs associated with the wireless network. In addition, this feature can convert an asynchronous network into a synchronous network. In cooperation with other associated technologies, this technology eliminates random and unpredictable interference and thus increases the system capacity.
Procedure
To activate the intra-BSC soft-synchronized network, do as follows: 1. Run the SET BTSAISS command repeatedly. In this step, specify BTS Index or BTS Name of each BTS involved in the intra-BSC soft-synchronized network. In addition, set Site Sync Zone of each BTS to the same value.
NOTE
BTS Symbol Offset is optional. This parameter specifies the frame offset between BTSs and is set as required.
2.
Run the ADD AISSCFG command. In this step, set Offset Information Collection Switch to ON(ON), and then set Reference BTS Index to the index of a BTS that supports the soft-synchronized network. In addition, set Offset Time Adjustment Switch to ON(ON), and set Support BSC AISS to NO(NO). (Optional) Run the ADD NCELL command. In this step, set AISS Task Index to the index of the soft-synchronized network task specified in step 1. Then, set Cell Index Type to BYIDX(By Cell Index) and set First Cell Index and Second Cell Index to add a pair of neighboring cells in the BSC.
NOTE
3.
A pair of neighboring cells in the BSC are automatically generated according to certain rules. If the neighboring cells do not meet the measurement requirements, reconfigure the neighboring cells as required.
To activate the inter-BSC soft-synchronized network, do as follows:

8-84

NOTE
The configuration of the soft-synchronized network between BSC1 and BSC2 is taken as an example.
1.
Run the SET BTSAISS command repeatedly. In this step, specify BTS Index or BTS Name of each BTS involved in the intra-BSC soft-synchronized network. In addition, set Site Sync Zone of each BTS to the same value. Run the ADD AISSCFG command on BSC1 to set Reference BTS Index to the index of a BTS that supports the soft-synchronized network. In addition, set Offset Information Collection Switch and Offset Time Adjustment Switch to ON, and set Support BSC AISS and Base BSC to YES. Run the ADD AISSCFG command on BSC2 to set Reference BTS Index to the index of a BTS that supports the soft-synchronized network. In addition, set Offset Information Collection Switch and Offset Time Adjustment Switch to ON, Support BSC AISS to YES, Base BSC to NO, and Control BSC DPC to the DPC of BSC1. (Optional) Run the ADD GEXT2GCELL command on BSC1 to configure a cell under BSC2 as the external cell of BSC1. (Optional) Run the ADD G2GNCELL command on BSC1 to configure the external cell added in step 4 as the neighboring cell of a cell under BSC1. (Optional) Run the ADD EXTNCELL command on BSC1 to add a pair of neighboring cells between BSCs.
NOTE
2.
3.
4. 5. 6.
A pair of neighboring cells between BSCs are automatically generated according to certain rules. If the neighboring cells do not meet the measurement requirements, reconfigure the neighboring cells as required. Steps 4 to 6 are performed to add a pair of optimal neighboring cells between BSCs.
To verify the intra-BSC soft-synchronized network, do as follows: 1. Run the LST AISSCFG command to query the information on the softsynchronized network.
NOTE
If you do not specify AISS Task Index, the information on all the soft-synchronized network tasks is queried. Check whether AISS Task Index of the added intra-BSC softsynchronized network exists. If the index exists, you can infer that the intra-BSC softsynchronized network is added successfully.
2. 3.
Run the DSP AISSRUNSTATE command to query the BTS synchronization information. Run the DSP BTSSYNCINFO command to query the frame offset in the synchronization between BTSs.
To verify the inter-BSC soft-synchronized network, do as follows: 1. Run the LST AISSCFG command to query the information on the softsynchronized network. Ensure that Support BSC AISS is set to Support on the control BSC and Control BSC DPC on the collaborating BSC is the DPC of the control BSC. Run the DSP BSCSYNCINFO command to query the information about the synchronization between BSCs.
2.
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)

NOTE
l l
The status of the local BSC is queried if the specified Adjacent BSC DPC is the DPC of the control BSC. The status of the collaborating BSC is queried if the specified Adjacent BSC DPC is the DPC of the collaborating BSC.
3. l
Run the DSP BTSSYNCINFO command to query the frame offset in the synchronization between BTSs.
Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the RMV AISSCFG command to specify BTS Index or BTS Name of the BTS involved in the intra-BSC or inter-BSC soft-synchronized network.
----End
8.39 Configuring BTS GPS Synchronization

This section describes how to activate the optional feature GBFD-510401 BTS GPS Synchronization.
Prerequisite
l

The BTS3006C, BTS3002E, and BTS3900B/E do not support the feature. In the case of the BTS3012/BTS3012AE, the DGPS board needs to be added. In the case of the DBS3900/BTS3900/BTS3900A, the USCU board needs to be added. None The license is activated.
License
Context
Converting an asynchronous network into a synchronous network can effectively reduce the interference, increase the network capacity, and improve the performance of the KPIs related to the radio network. The following procedure takes how to configure the GPS synchronization of the BTS3900 GSM as an example.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSBRD to add a USCU board. In this step, set Board Type to USCU(USCU). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSUSCUBP. In this step, set GPS or Glonass to GPS(GPS), GPS Antenna Delay to 800, and Antenna Power Supply Switch to NOPOWER(No Power).
8-86

NOTE
GPS or Glonass needs to be set according to the type of the GPS satellite card. Antenna Power Supply Switch is set to NOPOWER(No Power) only in the co-antenna scenario. GPS Antenna Delay needs to be set according to the feeder length.
3. l
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK. In this step, set Clock Type to TRCGPS_CLK(Trace GPS Clock).
----End
8.40 Configuring HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-117601 HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm.
Prerequisite
The BSC that the test cell belongs to is connected to the M2000, and cell-level counters can be retrieved on the M2000.
Context
Power control is a process through which the transmit power of the BTS and MS is tuned to guarantee the communication quality. The purpose of power control is to reduce the transmit power as long as the transmission quality is ensured, thus reducing the entire network interference and power consumption. Power control is mainly used in networks with tight frequency reuse, high traffic volume, and high system interference levels. In GSM, power control can be applied to both uplink and downlink and can be performed on each MS separately.Huawei III power control algorithm is optimized in the follow aspects:
l
Measurement preprocessing phase: Exponential filtering is introduced, thus increasing the tracing speed. Power control decision: A unified formula considering receive level and receive quality comprehensively is used to make power control decision. The impact of frequency hopping gain on quality is also considered. In this manner, the power control step is more accurate. By setting different power control thresholds for AMR FS and HS services, the requirement for optimized AMR power control is met.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. Run the SET GCELLPWRBASIC command. In this step, set Power Control Switch to PWR3(Power controlIII). Run the SET GCELLPWR3 command. In this step, set Allow III Power Control For AMR to ON(Allowed) and Allow III Power Control For Non-AMR to ON (Allowed), and set power control III parameters or use default values according to the actual network situation.
NOTE
The values of the parameters Allow III Power Control For AMR and Allow III Power Control For Non-AMR are set to ON(Allowed) by default.
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
8-87
Verification Procedure 1. Configure Cell0 and Cell1 on the BSC and set the frequencies of the BCCH TRXs of the two cells as non co-channel or adjacent-channel frequencies while the frequencies of the non-BCCH TRXs as co-channel or adjacent-channel frequencies. On the M2000, retrieve the following counters related to Cell0. Table 8-3 Counters for verifying HUAWEI III power control Measurement Unit Measurement of Power Control Messages in MR per Cel Counter Average MS Power Level of Non-AMR Call Average BTS Power Level of Non-AMR Call Rate of Duration (Maximum Downlink Transmit Power) (%) Rate of Maximum Uplink Power Duration (%) Mean Strength of Downlink Signals Mean Strength of Uplink Signals Mean Quality of Downlink Signals Mean Quality of Uplink Signals Interference Band Measurement per TRX Mean Number of SDCCHs in Interference Band 1 Mean Number of SDCCHs in Interference Band 2 Mean Number of SDCCHs in Interference Band 3 Mean Number of SDCCHs in Interference Band 4 Mean Number of SDCCHs in Interference Band 5 Mean Number of TCHFs in Interference Band 1 Mean Number of TCHFs in Interference Band 2 Mean Number of TCHFs in Interference Band 3 Mean Number of TCHFs in Interference Band 4 Mean Number of TCHFs in Interference Band 5 Mean Number of TCHHs in Interference Band 1 Mean Number of TCHHs in Interference Band 2 Mean Number of TCHHs in Interference Band 3 Mean Number of TCHHs in Interference Band 4 Mean Number of TCHHs in Interference Band 5 Receive Quality Measurement per TRX Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 0)
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
2.
8-88
Measurement Unit
Counter Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 1) Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 2) Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 3) Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 4) Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 5) Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 6) Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 7) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 0) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 1) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 2) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 3) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 4) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 5) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 6) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 7) Number of MRs on Uplink TCHH (Mean Rank of Receive Quality 0) Number of MRs on Uplink TCHH (Mean Rank of Receive Quality 1) Number of MRs on Uplink TCHH (Mean Rank of Receive Quality 2) Number of MRs on Uplink TCHH (Mean Rank of Receive Quality 3)
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
8-89
Measurement Unit
Counter Number of MRs on Uplink TCHH (Mean Rank of Receive Quality 4) Number of MRs on Uplink TCHH (Mean Rank of Receive Quality 5) Number of MRs on Uplink TCHH (Mean Rank of Receive Quality 6) Number of MRs on Uplink TCHH (Mean Rank of Receive Quality 7) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHH (Mean Receive Quality Rank 0) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHH (Mean Receive Quality Rank 1) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHH (Mean Receive Quality Rank 2) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHH (Mean Receive Quality Rank 3) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHH (Mean Receive Quality Rank 4) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHH (Mean Receive Quality Rank 5) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHH (Mean Receive Quality Rank 6) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHH (Mean Receive Quality Rank 7)
3. 4.
Run the SET GCELLPWRBASIC command. In this step, set the Power Control Switch of Cell0 and Cell1 to PWR3(Power control II). Run the LST GCELLPWRBASIC command to check the Power Control Switch of Cell0 and Cell1. The expected result: The value of the Power Control Switch is Power Control Switch II. Initiate a large number of calls in Cell0 and Cell1. Check the counters for one hour and save them. Run the SET GCELLPWRBASIC command. In this step, set the Power Control Switch of Cell0 and Cell1 to PWR3(Power controlIII). Run the LST GCELLPWRBASIC command to check the Power Control Switch of Cell0 and Cell1. The expected result: The value of the Power Control Switch is Power Control SwitchIII.
5. 6. 7. 8.
8-90
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
9.
Run the SET GCELLPWR3 command. In this step, set Allow III Power Control For AMR to ON(Allowed) and Allow III Power Control For Non-AMR to ON (Allowed) of Cell0 and Cell1.
10. Run the LST GCELLPWR3 command to check Allow III Power Control For AMR and Allow III Power Control For Non-AMR of Cell0 and Cell1. The expected result: Allow III Power Control For AMR is ON(Allowed), and Allow III Power Control For Non-AMR is ON(Allowed). 11. Initiate a large number of calls in Cell0 and Cell1. 12. Check the counters for one hour and save them. 13. Compare the measured counter results obtained from Step 12 and Step 6. The expected result: Concerning the counters related to power level, the counter values obtained in Step 12 are smaller than those obtained in Step 6. Concerning the counters related to interference band, the value of a counter with lower quality rank obtained in Step 12 is larger than that obtained in Step 6. Concerning the counters related to receive quality, the value of a counter with lower quality rank obtained in Step 12 is larger than that obtained in Step 6. In conclusion, the power control III algorithm outperforms the power control II algorithm in terms of network performance improvement. l Deactivation Procedure 1. 2. Run the SET GCELLPWRBASIC command. In this step, set Power Control Switch to PWR3(Power Control II). Run the LST GCELLPWRBASIC command to check the Power Control Switch. The expected result: The value of the Power Control Switch is Power Control Switch II. ----End
8.41 Configuring the DTX

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114801 DTX.
Prerequisite
l
Configuration

The uplink DTX is implemented at the BSC. The downlink DTX must be set at both the BSC and MSC. Otherwise, the downlink DTX does not work. Data configuration at the MSC: The setting of DTX Flag in Service/BSC Table determines whether downlink DTX is allowed at the MSC.
When it is set to Yes, the downlink DTX is enabled. The MSC sends an assignment message carrying the DTX flag to request the BSS to read the DTX flag. When it is set to No, the downlink DTX is disabled. The MSC does not request the BSS to read the DTX flag.
Verification

The MSC supports the downlink DTX. Idle channels are available in the test cell.
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
RSLmust be selected when an Abis Interface CS Trace task is enabled, BSSAP must be selected an A Interface Trace task is enabled.
Context
License is required to implement the DTX. DTX reduces the data to be transmitted during inactive speech periods, thus reducing the system interference and saving system resources. In addition, DTX reduces the workload of the TX module of the MS, thus enabling the MS to enjoy a longer call duration and standby time.
CAUTION
DTX cannot be configured in multi-site cell mode.
Procedure
l Activating DTX 1. Run the SET GCELLBASICPARA command. In this step, set FR Uplink DTX to Shall_Use(Shall Use) and FR Use Downlink DTX to YES(Yes).
NOTE
If the HR service is processed currently, set HR Uplink DTX to Shall_Use(Shall Use) and HR Use Downlink DTX to YES(Yes).
Verifying DTX Verifying the uplink DTX 1. Run the SET GCELLBASICPARA command. In this step, set HR Uplink DTX to Shall_Use(Shall Use), HR Uplink DTX to Shall_Use(Shall Use), FR Use Downlink DTX to YES(Yes), and HR Use Downlink DTX to YES(Yes). Run the SND GCELLSYSMSG command to forcibly send the system message to the test cell. Check the messages with the type of BCCH Information over the Abis interface for the one whose system-info-type is system-information-3. Check whether the dtx field in the IE cell-options of this message is 1. If yes, the system message is correct. Use an MS to originate a call. The call is set up successfully. Perform the operations in Tracing Messages on the A Interface and Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface. Expected result: Message tracing on different interfaces are normal. the Channel Activation message is traced over the Abis interface. The IE channel-type of this message is bm-acch, and the field dtx-uplink in the IE channel-mode of this message is 1. This indicates that the BSC supports the uplink DTX. Run the SET GCELLBASICPARA command. In this step, set HR Uplink DTX to Shall_Use(Shall Use), HR Uplink DTX to Shall_Use(Shall Use), FR Use Downlink DTX to YES(Yes), and HR Use Downlink DTX to YES(Yes). Use an MS to originate a call. The call is set up successfully. Perform the operations in Tracing Messages on the A Interface and Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface.
2. 3.
4. 5.
Verifying the downlink DTX 1.
2. 3.
8-92
Expected result: Message tracing on different interfaces are normal. The Assignment Request message is traced over the A interface, and the IE downlink-dtx-flag in this message is 0. This indicates that the MSC supports the downlink DTX. The CS message Channel Activation is traced over the Abis interface, and the field dtxdownlink contained in the IE channel-mode of this message is 1. This indicates that the BSC supports the downlink DTX. l Deactivating DTX 1. Run the SET GCELLBASICPARA command to set the basic parameters of a cell. In this step, set FR Uplink DTX to Shall_NOT_Use(Shall not Use) and FR Use Downlink DTX to NO(No).
----End
8.42 Configuring TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111602 TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown.
Prerequisite
l
None This feature and the feature GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (Baseband Hopping) cannot be used together. The license for this feature is activated.
Dependency on License
Context
The TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown function can be enabled at a specific period. After this function is enabled, idle TRXs can be shut down to save energy according to the prediction of traffic load and traffic volume, and the disabled TRXs can be switched on so that they are available for use anytime. Generally, channel allocation measures are used together with this function. During channel allocation, channels on some centralized TRXs are allocated. The channels on the BCCH TRX are preferentially assigned so that the utilization of the non-BCCH TRX channels is decreased and the overall power consumption of the BTS is reduced. In addition, the BTS allocates channels based on the priorities of TRXs. Channels on the TRXs with high priorities are preferentially assigned to MSs. In this way, the BSC centralizes busy channels into a few TRXs so that idle TRXs can be shut down as many as possible.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the SET BSCDSTPA command. In this step, set Allow Dynamic Shutdown Trx by BSC to YES(Yes).
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
2.
Optional: When the traffic is heavy, do not shut down the power amplifiers of TRXs. Do as follows: (1) Run the ADD BSCDSTPADATE command to add a period of preventing TRX power amplifier intelligent shutdown. A maximum of 12 periods can be set. (2) Run the SET BSCDSTPA command to set the start time and end time of the TRX power amplifier intelligent shutdown. Run the LST BSCDSTPA command to query the value of Prohib DynShutdown TRX Pwr DateRangeIdx.
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. l
Optional: Run the RMV BSCDSTPADATE command to remove a period of preventing intelligent shutdown of the TRX power amplifier. Run the SET GCELLBASICPARA command. In this step, set Allow Dynamic Shutdwn TRX to YES(Yes). Run the SET GTRXDEV command. In this step, set Allow Dynamic Shutdown TRX to YES(Yes). Optional: Run the SET GCELLBASICPARA command. In this step, set Adjust Voltage to YES(Yes) to allow the dynamic adjustment of voltage. Optional: Run the SET BSCDSTPA command. In this step, set Allow Turning Off Time Slot to YES(Yes). Run the SET BSCDSTPA command. In this step, set Allow Dynamic Shutdown Trx by BSC to YES(Yes). Set Time When the Function Is Enabled and Time When the Function Is Disabled according to the actual requirements. Run the SET GCELLBASICPARA command. In this step, set Allow Dynamic Shutdwn TRX to YES(Yes). Run the SET GTRXDEV command. In this step, set Allow Dynamic Shutdown TRX to YES(Yes). Wait for five minutes. Then, run the DSP GTRXSTAT command to query the value of Close TRX Power. The expected result: The value of Close TRX Power is YES(Yes).
2. 3. 4.
Deactivation Procedure 1. 2. 3. Run the SET BSCDSTPA command. In this step, set Allow Dynamic Shutdown Trx by BSC to NO(No). Run the SET GCELLBASICPARA command. In this step, set Allow Dynamic Shutdwn TRX to NO(No). Run the SET GTRXDEV command. In this step, set Allow Dynamic Shutdown TRX to NO(No).
----End
8.43 Configuring Intelligent Combiner Bypass

This section describes how to activate the optional feature GBFD-111604 Intelligent Combiner Bypass.
Prerequisite
l
8-94
Intelligent Combiner Bypass (ICB) is applicable to only the double-transceiver TRXs and must be configured as combining output. The TRXs supporting ICB are the optimized DTRU, DRRU, and DRFU. This feature and the feature GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (baseband hopping) are mutually exclusive. The license is activated.
License
Context
The ICB can be enabled only when all the non-BCCH carriers are idle and there are idle channels on the BCCH carrier in the cell. The ICB function cannot be enabled on channels that are configured as static PDCHs. Neither can the function be enabled on dynamic PDCHs (TCHs) that are converted to PDCHs. The enabled ICB feature does not save energy in all cases. It is energy-saving only when the output power of the TRX is 40 W and the static power level is 0, when the output power of the TRX is 60 W and the static power level is 0, or when the output power of the TRX is 60 W and the static power level is 1.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. l Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, change ICB Allowed to YES(YES).
----End
8.44 Configuring Active Backup Power Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111605 Active Backup Power Control.
Prerequisite
l
None None The license for this feature is activated.
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
8-95
Context
The BSC takes the cell coverage, capacity, and backup power time into consideration when performing the Active Backup Power Control function. An operator can configure three backup power control strategies:
l
Coverage preferred The BTS shuts down some TRXs and then gradually decreases the transmit power of the remaining TRXs.
Capacity preferred The BTS gradually decreases the transmit power of all the TRXs and then shuts down some TRXs.
Backup power time preferred The BTS shuts down some TRXs and at the same time decreases the transmit power of the remaining TRXs.
The Active Backup Power Control function gradually reduces the coverage area of a cell, and thus the calls on the edge of the cell are absorbed by neighboring cells. Therefore, the network KPIs are not affected.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the SET BTSBAKPWR command. In this step, set Backup Power Saving Method to BYPWR(Reduce Backup Power), and set Backup Power Saving Policy, Drop Power Start Time[T1], Shutdown TRX Start Time[T2], Drop Power Start Time[T3], Drop Power Step, and Max Drop Power Threshold according to the actual requirements. Run the LST BTSBAKPWR command to query the value of Backup Power Saving Policy. The expected result: The value of Backup Power Saving Policy is not NULL. l Deactivation Procedure 1. ----End Run the SET BTSBAKPWR command. In this step, set Backup Power Saving Method to BYTRX(Turn off TRX).
8.45 Configuring Power Optimization Based on Channel Type

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111606 Power Optimization Based on Channel Type.
Prerequisite
l
None

8-96

l
None The license for this feature is activated.
Context
The power consumption optimization based on channel type has two functions: dynamic voltage adjustment and dynamic PDCH voltage adjustment. With the dynamic voltage adjustment function, different working voltages are provided for the TRX power amplifiers according to the applied modulation scheme. If all channels on a TRX are configured as TCHs and the TRX works in GMSK mode, the BTS provides the TRX with the working voltage required in GMSK mode. If a channel on the TRX is configured as dynamic or static PDCH and the TRX works in 8PSK mode; the BTS provides the TRX with the working voltage required in 8PSK mode. The BTS provides the TRX with appropriate working voltage, thus reducing the power consumption.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. 3. l Run the SET GCELLGPRS command. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu (Support as built-in PCU) and EDGE to YES(Yes). Run the SET GCELLSOFT command. In this step, set PDCH Power Saving Enable to YES(Yes). Run the SET GCELLBASICPARA command. In this step, set Adjust Voltage to YES(Yes). Run the LST GCELLSOFT command to query the value of PDCH Power Saving Enable. The expected result: The value of PDCH Power Saving Enable is YES(Yes). 2. Run the LST GCELLBASICPARA command to query the value of Adjust Voltage. The expected result: The value of Adjust Voltage is Yes. l Deactivation Procedure 1. 2. ----End Run the SET GCELLSOFT command. In this step, set PDCH Power Saving Enable to NO(No). Run the SET GCELLBASICPARA command to set Adjust Voltage to NO(No).
8.46 Configuring PSU Smart Control

This section describes how to activate the optional feature GBFD-111608 PSU Smart Control.
Prerequisite
l
The BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3012(DTRU/QTRU), and BTS3900B/E do not support the feature.
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)

l
None None
License
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. l Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOTHPARA. In this step, change PSU Turning Off Enable to YES(YES).
----End
8.47 Configuring Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111609 Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization.
Prerequisite
l
Context
The Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization feature aims to reduce the transmit power of the non-BCCH timeslots of the BCCH TRX, thus reducing the power consumption of the BTS. After this feature is enabled, the accuracy of measuring the receive levels of neighboring cells may be affected. Therefore, it is recommended that this feature be enabled when the traffic is light, for example, at night.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the SET GCELLOTHEXT command. In this step, set Power Derating Enabled to YES(Yes), and set other parameters such as Power Derating Start Time, Power Derating End Time, and Power Derating Range.
8-98
WARNING
When the power of the non-BCCH timeslots of the BCCH TRX is reduced, the downlink receive level of the cell detected by the MS camping on the neighboring cells may be inaccurate and the handover of the MS to the cell may fail. Therefore, perform this operation with caution. l Verification Procedure 1. l Run the LST GCELLOTHEXT to query the value of Power Derating Enabled. The expected result: The value of Power Derating Enabled is Yes. Deactivation Procedure 1. ----End Run the SET GCELLOTHEXT command. In this step, set Power Derating Enabled to NO(No).
8.48 Configuring Dynamic Cell Power Off

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature GBFD-111610 Dynamic Cell Power Off.
Prerequisite
l
Activation

The license is activated. The BTS that is configured with the specified cell supports the feature of dynamic cell power off. There are concentric cells in the cell. The cell to be verified is enabled with the feature of dynamic cell power off and works properly. The BTS of the cell to be verified supports the feature of dynamic cell power off. There is no call access request in the cell to be verified. There is a concentric cell in the cell to be verified and the concentric cell works properly. The traffic of the concentric cell is lower than Same Coverage Cell Load Threshold, whose default value is 50%. The current date is not the date of prohibiting dynamic cell power off. Run the LST BSCDSTPADATE command to query the date, and run the ADD BSCDSTPADATE or RMV BSCDSTPADATE command to change the date.
Verification
Context
For a dual-band network, when the traffic volume is low, a fully covered network can carry all the traffic on the existing network. In such a case, all the network equipment of the other frequency band can be disabled, and the network power consumption can be reduced. A license is required to implement the feature of dynamic cell power off.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the SET GCELLDYNTURNOFF command. In this step, set Enable Turning Off Cell to ENABLE, and set the parameters related to the time of dynamic cell power off.
NOTE
If the concentric cell does not support certain services in the cell, the related services in the concentric cell are not supported after the dynamic cell power off is deactivated.
Verification Procedure 1. Run the SET GCELLDYNTURNOFF command. In this step, set Cell Index to the index of the cell to be verified, Enable Turning Off Cell to ENABLE, Same Coverage Cell No to the index of the concentric cell, and set Dyn. Turning Off Cell Start Time and Dyn. Turning Off Cell Stop Time to ensure that the current time ranges between the time interval of the two parameters. Five minutes later, run the DSP GCELLSTAT command to check the current status of the cell. If Cell Dynamic Switch is set to YES, you can infer that the dynamic cell power off feature is valid. Run the SET GCELLDYNTURNOFF command. In this step, set Dyn. Turning Off Cell Start Time and Dyn. Turning Off Cell Stop Time to ensure that the current time is beyond the time period specified by the two parameters. One minute later, run the DSP GCELLSTAT command to check the current status of the cell. If Cell Dynamic Switch is set to YES, you can infer that the dynamic cell power off feature is enabled. Run the SET GCELLDYNTURNOFF command. In this step, set Enable Turning Off Cell to DISABLE.
2.
3.
4.
----End
8.49 Configuring TRX Working Voltage Adjustment

This section describes how to activate the optional feature GBFD-111611 Configuring TRX Working Voltage Adjustment.
Prerequisite
l
The BTS3900B does not support the feature. None The license is activated.
License
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1.
8-100
Run the BSC6900 MML command . In this step, set Adjust Voltage to YES(Yes).
2. l
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Power Level and Power Type.
----End
8.50 Configuring Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Adjustment

This section describes how to activate the optional feature GBFD-111612 Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Adjustment.
Prerequisite
l
BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3012/AE(DTRU), DBS3900(RRU3004), BTS3900/A/L (DRFU), and BTS3900B do not support the feature. None The license is activated.
License
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. l Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOTHPARA. In this step, set PA Intelligent Adjust Voltage to YES(YES).
----End
8.51 Configuring Flex Abis

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117301 Flex Abis.
Prerequisite
l l l
The license is activated. The XPUa board is configured, and there are idle ports on the configured EIUa board. The bypass BTS works in Flex Abis mode, and the upper-level and lower-level BTSs must also work in Flex Abis mode.
Context
A license is required to activate Flex Abis.
Traditionally, the Um interface resource is mapped onto the Abis interface resource in 1:1 manner. After Flex Abis is enabled, the Abis interface resources work in resource pool mode to increase the utilization. When both the BTS ring topology I and Flex Abis are enabled, the restrictions are as follows:
l
Flex Abis must be enabled in all the BTSs, and an E1 link is supported in the forward and reverse directions. The Abis bypass function is not supported. The 16 kbit/s LAPD link is not supported. The self-healing and self-detection on the slot of the Abis interface are not supported.
l l l
When Flex Abis is enabled, and the parameter LDR First, LDR Second, LDR Third, or LDR Fourth is set to PSDOWN(PS Downspeeding) by using the SET LDR command, the idle timeslots of the BTS must not be configured. When Flex Abis is enabled, each BTS in Flex Abis mode must be configured with a dedicated ESL to carry the signaling. In 64 kbit/s multiplexing mode, the ESL and OML are physically multiplexed on one 64 kbit/s timeslot. To add more ESLs, you can reduce the number of RSLs. That is, you need to reduce the number of RSLs multiplexed with the OML (Multiplexing Mode). A maximum of two RSLs can be multiplexed with the OML. When Flex Abis is enabled, the Multiplexing Mode can be set to 5:1 or 6:1 to multiplex five or six RSLs onto a 64 kbit/s timeslot and to prevent an additional 64 kbit/s timeslot from being occupied. When Flex Abis is enabled and TCHH Function Switch is set to YES(YES), the system allocates half-rate TCHs preferentially if the fixed Abis channel seizure rate exceeds the Fix Abis Prior Choose Load Thred and the Flex Abis channel seizure rate exceeds the Flex Abis Prior Choose Load Thred. After Flex Abis is enabled on the BSC, if the actual traffic volume is lower than the estimated value in network design, static PDCHs and idle timeslots are assigned the fixed Abis timeslots, and the dynamic PDCHs and secondary link for PS service are dynamically assigned Abis timeslots. When the CS service is preferred, some Abis timeslots must be reserved for PS service. This can prevent the CS service from occupying all the timeslots that are dynamically assigned. When Flex Abis is enabled and the CS services and PS services share the Abis interface transmission resources, the following conditions are met:
l
The CS services can preempt the resources of PS services on the secondary link (or even the primary link if necessary) in the same-level and lower-level BTSs. In the case of the built-in PCU, if Sublink Resources Preemption Switch is set to YES (Yes), the CS services can preempt the resources of PS services on the secondary link in the same-level BTS. If Low-level Sublink Resource Preempt Switch is set to YES (Yes), the CS services can preempt the resources of PS services on the secondary link in the lower-level BTS. In the case of an external PCU, if the PCU supports the preemption of the Abis interface transmission resources, set PCU Support PREEMPT_ABIS_LINK message to YES (YES). Then, the BSC instructs the PCU to allow the CS services to preempt the transmission resources occupied by the PCU.
Procedure
l
8-102
1. 2. l
Run the ADD BTS command to add a BTS. In this step, set Flex Abis Mode to FLEX_ABIS(Flex Abis). Run the SET BTSFLEXABISPARA command to set the parameters related to Flex Abis. Run the MOD BTS command. In this step, set Flex Abis Mode to FLEX_ABIS(Flex Abis) and Multiplexing Mode to MODE16K. Run the LST BTSPORTTS command to query the parameters related to timeslots and commands. In this step, set BTS In Port NO to the number of the port the base station is connected to, Port Direction to the same direction as the base station, and TS Type to ALL(All). Run the SET BTSFORBIDTS command to block the Flex timeslots. In this step, adjust Start Timeslot No., Start Sub Timeslot No., End Timeslot NO., and End Sub Timeslot NO. until only two consecutive 8 kbit/s timeslots on the port are used for Flex Abis.
NOTE
3.
Do not block the other timeslots except for the Flex Abis timeslots. In actual application, the blocked timeslot is 16 kbit/s. Therefore, only one timeslot is unblocked for services.
4.
On the test base station, run the DEA GCELL to deactivate cells and run the SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT to block channels. Ensure that only one cell (cell 1) under the base station is available and only the BCCH, SDCCH, and two TCHs are available in cell 1.
NOTE
When running the DEA GCELL command to deactivate the cell, set Index Type to either BYNAME(By Name) or BYID(By ID). If you select BYID(By ID), set Cell Index to the ID of the cell to be blocked. When running the SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT command, specify TRX ID and Channel No. to the channel to be blocked and the corresponding TRX, and set Administrative State to Lock(Lock).
5.
Use the test MS to select network in cell 1, initiate a call to a fixed phone, and hold the call. Run the DSP ABISTS command to query the timeslot state. In this step, specify Subrack No., Slot No., Port No., and set State to OCCUPIED (OCCUPIED). Check that the Flex Abis timeslot corresponding to the TCH occupied by the call service is the timeslot that is unblocked. Hand off the call, and block the TCH for the call by performing the previous steps. In this case, only one TCH is unblocked. Use the test MS to select network in cell 1, initiate a call, and hold the call. Run the DSP ABISTS command to check the state of timeslots. In this step, specify Subrack No., Slot No., and Port No., and set State to OCCUPIED(OCCUPIED). Check that the call initiated by the MS is carried on a new TCH whose Flex Abis timslot is unblocked. Release the call. Run the DEA BTS to deactivate the BTS. Run the MOD BTS command. In this step, set Flex Abis Mode to FIX_16K_ABIS (Fix Abis). Run the ACT BTS command to activate the BTS.
6. 7.
8. l 1. 2. 3. ----End
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
Deactivation Procedure
8-103
8.52 Configuring BTS Local Switch

This section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-117702 BTS Local Switch.
Prerequisite
l
The BTS local switching applies to only the double-transceiver BTS and the 3900 series base stations in TDM or IP transmission mode. In Abis TDM transmission mode, the feature depends on GBFD-117301 Flex Abis. In Abis IP transmission mode, the feature depends on GBFD-118601 Abis over IP and GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1. The feature are the following features are mutually exclusive: GBFD-118602 A over IP and GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1. The license is activated.

License
The BSC can work in either BM/TC separate mode or BM/TC combined mode, and TDM transmission mode is applied over the Ater and A interfaces. In the sites with combined BTS cabinets, BSS local switching can be enabled only when the BTS software and TRX software both support BSS local switching.
Context
The BTS local switching applies to only the double-transceiver BTS and the 3900 series base stations in TDM or IP transmission mode. When a BTS uses the TDM transmission mode, the BTS must be enabled with Flex Abis. The BTS local switching can save the transmission resources on the Abis and Ater interfaces and reduce the TC processing delay during the call. If the MSC is not provided by Huawei, the following functions are unavailable in BTS local switching mode: lawful interception, MSC playing the announcement during a call, DTMF number receiving during a call, speech service and then fax service, and independent billing of BSS local switching.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSSLS. In this step, set BSS Local Switching General Strategy to BTSPRIORITY(BTS Priority) or BTSONLY (BTS Only), and specify Options for BTS Local Switch and Avoid Number for BTS.
If Options for BTS Local Switch is set to ABISCONGESTS(Start When Abis Congests), you need to specify Abis Jam Rate for BTS Local Switch. If Options for BTS Local Switch is set to PREFIXNUMBER(Start by Prefix Number), you need to specify Prefix Number for BTS.
8-104
2.
Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNNODE to determine whether the BSS local switching performed by the BSC only or by both the BSC and the MSC.
NOTE
l l
If the BSC6900 is expected to perform the BSS local switching, you need to set MSCCollaborated BSS Local Switching to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support). If the MSC is expected to involve in the BSS local switching you need to set MSCCollaborated BSS Local Switching to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support) or ENHANCED (Enhanced Function), and then to set related parameters on the MSC side.
3.
When the BTS uses the TDM service-bearing mode, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTS. In this step, set Flex Abis Mode to FLEX_ABIS(Flex Abis). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSLSW. In this step, set Support BTS Local Switch to YES(Yes). Ensure that the calling and called MSs are controlled by the same BTS. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP CALLRES to query the call resources used by an MS.
NOTE
4. l
If BTS local switching is enabled successfully, no information on the Ater or Abis interface is displayed.
----End
8.53 Configuring the Abis Transmission Optimization

This section describes how to configure the Abis transmission optimization.
Prerequisite
l l
The license is activated. The BTS software version supports this function.
Context
CAUTION
The HDLC_HubBTS does not support ring topology, bypass, and FLEX_ABIS. HDLC does not support bypass and FLEX_ABIS. A license is required to activate the Abis transmission optimization. The Abis transmission optimization allows multiple links to be multiplexed onto a channel composed of several timeslots, thus enabling more efficient use of transmission resources.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the ADD BTS command. In this step, set Service Type to HDLC or HDLC_HubBTS. Step 2 Perform the operations in Configuring the BTS. ----End
8.54 Configuring Flex Ater

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate Flex Ater.
Prerequisite
l l
The license for this feature is activated. The TC subrack of the BSC is remotely configured and TDM transmission is used over the Ater interface.
Context
Flex Ater is license-controlled.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. l Run the SET OTHSOFTPARA command. In this step, set Switch of 8K on Ater to YES(Yes). Run the DSP ATERTS command. In this step, set BM/TC config flag to CFGBM (BM) or CFGTX(TX), and set Ater connection path index to the index of an Ater connection path. The expected result: The number of occupied 16 kbit/s resources is equal to that of full-rate calls. In addition, the number of occupied 8 kbit/s resources is equal to that of half-rate calls. In this case, Flex Ater is enabled. l Deactivating Procedure 1. ----End Run the SET OTHSOFTPARA command. In this step, set Switch of 8K on Ater to NO(No).
Verifying Procedure 1.
8.55 Configuring BSC Local Switch

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117701 BSC Local Switch.
Prerequisite
l l
The license is activated. The BSC can be work in either BM/TC separate mode or BM/TC combined mode, and TDM transmission mode is applied over the Ater interface.
8-106

l
A BTS in transmission optimization mode or an IP-based BTS cannot involve in the BSC local switch. In the sites with combined BTS cabinets, BSS local switch can be enabled only when the BTS software and TRX software both support BSS local switch.
Context
When the calling and called MSs are served by the same BSC, the BSC performs loopback on the speech signals inside the BSC rather than transmitting them over the Ater and A interfaces, therefore releasing the Ater transmission resources and TC resources. It helps save the local or remote resources on the Ater interface. If the MSC is not provided by Huawei, the following functions are unavailable in BSC local switch mode: lawful interception, MSC playing the announcement during a call, DTMF number receiving during a call, speech service and then fax service, and independent billing of BSS local switch.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the SET BSSLS command. In this step, set BSS Local Switching General Strategy to BSCPRIORITY(BSC Priority) or BSCONLY(BSC Only), and specify Options for BSC Local Switch and Avoid Number for BTS.
NOTE
l l
If Options for BSC Local Switch is set to ATERCONGESTS(Start When Ater Congests), you need to specify Ater Jam Rate for BSC Local Switch. If Options for BSC Local Switch is set to PREFIXNUMBER(Start by Prefix Number), you need to specify Prefix Number for BSC.
2.
Run the MOD GCNNODE command to determine whether the BSS local switch performed by the BSC only or by both the BSC and the MSC.
NOTE
l l
If the BSC is expected to perform the BSS local switch, you need to set MSC-Collaborated BSS Local Switching to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support). If the MSC is expected to involve in the BSS local switch you need to set MSCCollaborated BSS Local Switching to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support) or ENHANCED (Enhanced Function), and then to set related parameters on the MSC side.
3. l
Optional: Run the SET BTSLSW command. In this step, set Support BTS Local Switch to YES(Yes). Ensure that the calling and called MSs are controlled by the same BSC. Run the DSP CALLRES command to query the resources of an MS.
NOTE
If BSC local switch is enabled successfully, no information on the Ater interface is displayed in the result.
Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the SET BSSLS command. In this step, set BSS Local Switching General Strategy to NEITHERSTART(Neither Start) or BTSONLY(BTS Only).
----End
8.56 Configuring Ater Compression Transmission

This section describes how to configure the GBFD-116902 Ater Compression Transmission.
Prerequisite
l l
The license is activated. The BM/TC subracks are in separated configuration mode, and the TC subrack is configured remotely. The PEUa/POUc board is configured and installed. The SS7 signaling point is accessible.
l l
Context
A license is required to implement the Ater over IP. When the BM/TC subracks are in separated configuration mode and the TC subrack is configured remotely, the compressed IP transmission mode over the Ater interface can be adopted to improve the transmission efficiency over the Ater interface and reduce the transmission cost. The Ater over IP does not support IP over FE/GE, but only supports IP over E1 for transmitting the user plane data. The configuration on the signaling plane is similar to that in Ater over TDM mode.
Procedure
l Configuring the Ater over IP 1. 2. 3. Run the SET BSCBASIC command. In this step, set Service Mode to SEPARATE (Separate) and Ater Interface Transfer Mode to IP(IP). Run the ADD BRD command to add the IP-based Ater interface board. Determine the type of link carried on the E1/T1 link (PPP link or MLPPP group). If the E1/T1 Link Carries a/an... PPP link MLPPP group 4. Then... Perform step Step 4. Perform step Step 5.
Add PPP link data. Run the ADD PPPLNK command to add a PPP link. To add more PPP links, repeat this step. Add MLPPP group data. (1) Run the ADD MPGRP command to add an MLPPP group. (2) Run the ADD MPLNK command to add an MLPPP link.
5.
6. 7.
Run the ADD ADJNODE command to add an adjacent node. In this step, set Adjacent Node Type to BSC(Ater Interface on BSC). Run the ADD IPPATH command to add an IP path. To add more IP paths, repeat this step.
8-108
Verifying Ater over IP 1. 2. 3. Run the DSP E1T1 command to check the setting of Port State. If the PPP link is used, run the DSP PPPLNK command to query Link State, Local IP Address, and Peer IP Address. If the MLPPP link is used, run the DSP MPGRP to query Link State, Local IP Address, and Peer IP Address, and run the DSP MPLNK command to query Link State and LCP Negotiation State. If the PPP link is used, run the PING IP. In this step, set Source IP Address to the same value as Local IP Address in the DSP PPPLNK command and Destination IP Address to Peer IP Address in the DSP PPPLNK command. If the statistics on PING packets can be received, the MLPPP link is functional. If the MLPPP link is used, run the PING IP. In this step, set Source IP Address to the same value as Local IP Address in the DSP MPGRP command and Destination IP Address to Peer IP Address in the DSP MPGRP command. If the statistics on PING packets can be received, the MLPPP link is functional. Run the DSP LAPDLNK to check whether the LAPD link is functional. If Usage State is NORMAL, the LAPD link is functional. Run the DSP ADJNODE command to obtain the state of an adjacent node, number of paths to the adjacent node, and available bandwidth by checking related parameters, for example, Operation state. If Operation state is Available?, the adjacent node is functional and the bandwidth is greater than 0. Run the DSP IPPATH check whether the IP path is available. If Operation state is Available and the available bandwidth is greater than 0, the IP path is functional. After the dialing, the call is set up successfully. When the call is set up, run the DSP IPCHN command to query the usage of the Ater interface resources. If the UDP usage on the BM side and the TC side are the same, and the service types are correct, you can infer that the Ater over IP feature is enabled.
NOTE
4.
5.
6. 7.
8. 9.
You can proceed with the next step only when the previous step is executed successfully and the result is correct.
----End
8.57 Configuring BTS Ring Topology

This section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-117801 BTS Ring Topology.
Prerequisite
l

The BSC is configured with the XPUa and EIUa boards. The BTS3900B does not support the feature. Huawei BTS ring topology II depends on GBFD-117802 Fast Ring Network Switch. The license is activated.
License
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
Context
Ring topology is a special type of chain topology. In the topology, sites connect to each other to form a normal chain. The lowest-level site is connected to the BSC through a transmission link, thus forming a ring. If the communication of the ring is broken at a point, the topology of the sites that precede the breakpoint remains the same. The sites that follow the breakpoint form a new chain connection in the reverse direction. Compared with the ordinary chain topology, the advantage of the ring topology is as follows: When a connection is broken at a point, the ring automatically breaks into two chains. In this way, the sites precede and follow the breakpoint can work normally, thus improving the robustness of the system.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. Configure the BTS data by referring to Configuring the BTS. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTS. In this step, set Config Ring to YES(Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT repeatedly to add BTS connections.
NOTE
You need to configure at least one connection whose BTS In Port No. is set to 0.
3.
Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRINGATTR to set ring topology attributes of the BTS. In this step, set Configure Ring II to YES(Yes), and then set Ring II Wait Time Before Switch, and Ring II Try Rotating Duration Time. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTS to check that Config Ring is set to Yes.
----End
8.58 Configuring the TRX Mutual Aid

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113801 TRX Mutual Aid.
Prerequisite
l
Configuration

The license is activated. TRX Mutual Aid is supported in a cell. At least two TRXs in the same band are configured in the cell. BCCH TRX mutual aid is supported in the test cell. Baseband FH TRX mutual aid is supported in the test cell. Switchback of BCCH TRX mutual aid is supported in the test cell.
Verification

8-110
Switchback of baseband FH TRX mutual aid is supported in the test cell.
Context
TRX mutual aid is a function with which the BSC designates an available TRX in the cell to replace a faulty TRX. TRX mutual aid ensures that the cell works normally when faults occur on some TRXs in the cell. BCCH mutual aid is a function with which the BSC selects a normal TRX as the new BCCH TRX by means of the TRX cooperation algorithm when the BCCH TRX is faulty. In this way, the cell is always functional. When the fault in the original BCCH TRX is rectified, the BSC can switch the BCCH back to the original TRX. Baseband FH TRX mutual aid is a function enabled by the BSC when a TRX involved in FH is faulty in a cell whose Frequency hopping mode is set to BaseBand_FH(Baseband frequency hopping). In such a case, the BSC removes the faulty TRX from the FH group, whereas other TRXs in the FH group remain BaseBand_FH(Baseband frequency hopping). No license is required to implement TRX mutual aid. TRX mutual aid is specific for each cell. That is, you can enable or disable the TRX Mutual Aid function for each cell independently.
Procedure
l Activating Procedure 1. Run the SET GCELLCCACCESS command. In this step, set TRX Aiding Function Control to AllowReImmed(Allow & Recover Immediately) and Switchback Policy of Baseband FH Mutual Aid to PART(Part)
Verification Procedure Verifying BCCH TRX mutual aid and switchback of BCCH TRX mutual aid 1. 2. Power off the BCCH TRX board for the test cell. In this way, the BCCH TRX becomes faulty and BCCH mutual aid is triggered. Wait 15 minutes for cell initialization, and then run the DSP CHNSTAT command to query the channel status. Check whether Channel Type of channel 0 (not the BCCH TRX in initial configuration) is set to Main BCCH. Use an MS to access the cell with the BCCH TRX mutual aid function enabled, and make a call. Check whether the call is set up successfully and whether voice can be heard clearly during the call. Power on the TRX mentioned in step Step 1 to enable switchback of BCCH TRX mutual aid. Wait 15 minutes for cell initialization, and then run the DSP CHNSTAT command to query the channel status. Check whether Channel Type of channel 0 (the BCCH TRX in initial configuration) is set to Main BCCH. Use an MS to access the cell with the switchback of BCCH TRX mutual aid function enabled, and then make a call. Check whether the call is set up successfully and whether voice can be heard clearly during the call. Run the SET GCELLHOPQUICKSETUP command. In this step, set Frequency Hopping Mode to BaseBand_FH(Baseband frequency hopping) and Frequency Hopping Mode of BCCH TRX to NO_Hop(No hop).
3.
4. 5.
6.
Verifying baseband FH TRX mutual aid and switchback of baseband FH TRX mutual aid 1.
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)

NOTE
There are at least two operational TRXs in a baseband FH group to ensure the baseband hopping frequency when a TRX in the same group is faulty.
2.
Trace the CS messages over the Abis interface by referring to #mbsc-10-83. In the Abis Interface CS Trace dialog box, click the OML tab. Then, power off a TRX in the baseband FH group to enable Baseband FH Mutual Aid. Wait 15 minutes, and then check that the IE arfcnLst in the Set Channel Attributes message of the faulty TRX includes only one frequency whereas arfcnLst in Set Channel Attributes of other TRXs in the same baseband FH group includes multiple frequencies except the frequency of the faulty TRX. Trace the messages over the A interface by referring to #mbsc-10-76. In the A Interface Trace dialog box, click the BSSAP tab, and set related parameters to start the tracing task. Trace the CS messages over the Abis interface by referring to #mbsc-10-83. In the Abis Interface CS Trace dialog box, click the RSL tab, and set related parameters to start the tracing task. Use an MS to access the test cell and then to originate a call. Check whether voice can be heard clearly in the call and whether the messages traced over the Abis and A interfaces are correct. Ensure that the field h in the IE hoppingchannel of the ASSIGNMENT COMMAND message must be 1. Power on the TRX mentioned in step Step 2 to enable the switchback of baseband FH mutual aid. Wait 15 minutes, and then check that the IE arfcnLst in Set Channel Attributes of the fault-rectified TRX includes all frequencies in the baseband FH group. Use an MS to access the test cell and then to originate a call. Check whether voices can be heard clearly in the call and whether the messages traced over the Abis and A interfaces are correct. Ensure that h in hopping-channel of the ASSIGNMENT COMMAND message must be 1. Run the SET GCELLCCACCESS command. In this step, set TRX Aiding Function Control to TRXAid_NotAllow(TRX Aiding Not Allowed).
3.
4.
5. 6. 7.
Deactivating Procedure 1.
----End
8.59 Configuring the MSC Pool

This section describes how to configure the MSC pool. The MSCs in the pool enable load sharing and resource sharing for even distribution of traffic in the MSC pool, thus reducing inter-MSC handovers and achieving redundancy backup. 8.59.1 Configuring MSC Pool (A over TDM) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117401 MSC Pool in the case of A over TDM. 8.59.2 Configuring MSC Pool (A over IP) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117401 MSC Pool in the case of A over IP.
8.59.1 Configuring MSC Pool (A over TDM)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117401 MSC Pool in the case of A over TDM.
Prerequisite
l
None None The license for this feature is activated. The MSC servers and the MGW are fully connected and the relevant data configuration is correct. The OSP is configured.
Other prerequisites
Context
An MSC pool is defined as a group of MSCs handling the traffic generated from one MSC pool area. A BSC6900 belonging to an MSC pool area is connected to each MSC in the MSC pool. All the MSCs in the MSC pool implement load balancing and resource sharing for equal distribution of traffic in the MSC pool, thus reducing inter-MSC handovers and providing redundancy.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Configure the MSC server and the MGW. For details, see the user manuals related to the MSC products.

Enable the MSC Pool function on the MSC side. Set BSC6900 A-Flex to YES(Yes) on the MSC side. Configure the parameters related to MSC Pool, such as the NRI and NULL_NRI of each MSC, available capacity of the MSC, MNC, and MSC ID. The settings of these parameters must be consistent with those on the BSC6900 side.
NOTE
2.
Run the ADD N7DPC command on the BSC6900 side to add a DSP.
When multiple DSPs are added, the first DSP is the default DSP.
3. 4.
Run the ADD GCNNODE command to add a CN node and set parameters such as MSC Available Capability, MSC ID, and MSC Administrable State. Run the ADD AE1T1 command to add an E1/T1 on the A interface.
NOTE
The start CICs of different ports within a DPC group cannot be the same.
5.
Run the ADD GCNOPERATOR command. In this step, set MSC Pool Function Enabled to YES(Yes), and set Length of NRI in TMSI and MSC NULL-NRI Value. The settings must be consistent with those on the MSC side. Run the ADD NRIMSCMAP command to add a mapping between the NRI and the MSC. The setting must be consistent with that on the MSC side.
6. l
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
1. 2. 3.
Configure MSC 1 and MSC 2 as an MSC Pool, and enable the TMSI re-allocation function on the CN side. Register two test MSs to the MSC Pool. Open the A interface Trace dialog box on the LMT. On the Basic tab page, set DPC (Hex) to the DPC of the MSC. On the BSSAP tab page, set Cell ID (cell1,cell2,...cell16) to the ID of the cell where the MS is located. Switch on MS 1. Use MS 1 to initiate a location update procedure on MSC 1 side. The CN assigns a TMSI to MS 1. Switch on MS 2. Use MS 2 to initiate a location update procedure on MSC 2 side. The CN assigns a TMSI to MS 2.
NOTE
4. 5.
You can run the MOD GCNNODE command to change the administrative states of other MSCs to UNAVAIL(Unavailable). In this way, an MS can initiate a location update procedure on the specified MSC. After the location update procedure is complete, you need to change the states of the MSCs to NORMAL(Normal) again.
6.
Move MS 1 and MS 2 out of the coverage area of the MSC pool. Then use the MSs to originate calls. The expected result: MS 1 sets up the call through MSC 1, MS 2 sets up the call through MSC 2, and the home MSCs of MS 1 and MS 2 remain unchanged.
NOTE
In the TMSI re-allocation procedure, the MSC assigns the TMSI that contains NRI (configured by the CN) to the MS. With this information, the BSC6900 can allocate the service to the appropriate MSC when the MS initiates a call service. Note that the mapping between the NRI and the MSC on the BSC6900 side must be consistent with that on the CN side. You can use the ADD NRIMSCMAP command to configure the mapping between the NRI and the MSC on the BSC side.
Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the MOD GCNOPERATOR command. In this step, set MSC Pool Function Enabled to NO(No).
----End
8.59.2 Configuring MSC Pool (A over IP)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117401 MSC Pool in the case of A over IP.
Prerequisite
l
None None The license for this feature is activated. The MSC servers and the MGW are fully connected and the relevant data configuration is correct.
Other prerequisites
8-114
The M3UA local entity and the mapping between the subrack and the signaling point are configured.
Context
An MSC pool is defined as a group of MSCs handling the traffic generated from one MSC pool area. A BSC6900 belonging to an MSC pool area is connected to each MSC in the MSC pool. All the MSCs in the MSC pool implement load balancing and resource sharing for equal distribution of traffic in the MSC pool, thus reducing inter-MSC handovers and providing redundancy.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Configure the MSC server and the MGW. For details on parameter settings, see the user manuals related to the MSC products.

Enable the MSC Pool function on the MSC side. Set BSC6900 A-Flex to Yes on the MSC side. Configure the parameters related to the MSC pool, such as the NRI and NULL_NRI of each MSC, available capacity of the MSC, MNC, and MSC ID.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Run the ADD M3DE command on the BSC6900 side to add an M3UA destination entity. Run the ADD M3LKS command to add an M3UA link set. Run the ADD M3RT command to add an M3UA route. Run the ADD M3LNK command to add an M3UA link. Run the ADD GCNOPERATOR command. In this step, set MSC Pool Function Enabled to YES(Yes), and set Length of NRI in TMSI and NULL-NRI. The settings must be consistent with those on the MSC side. Run the ADD NRIMSCMAP command to add a mapping between the NRI and the MSC. The setting must be consistent with that on the MSC side. Configure MSC 1 and MSC 2 as an MSC Pool, and enable the TMSI re-allocation function on the CN side. Register two test MSs to the MSC Pool. Open the A interface Trace dialog box on the LMT. On the Basic tab page, set DPC (Hex) to the DPC of the MSC. On the BSSAP tab page, set Cell ID (cell1,cell2,...cell16) to the ID of the cell where the MS is located. Switch on MS 1. Make MS 1 to initiate a location update procedure on MSC 1 side. The CN assigns a TMSI to MS 1. Switch on MS 2. Use MS 2 to initiate a location update procedure on MSC 2 side. The CN assigns a TMSI to MS 2.
NOTE
7. l
Verification Procedure 1. 2. 3.
4. 5.
You can run the MOD GCNNODE command to change the administrative states of other MSCs to UNAVAIL(Unavailable). In this way, an MS can initiate a location update procedure on the specified MSC. After the location update procedure is complete, you need to change the states of the MSCs to NORMAL(Normal) again.
6.
Move MS 1 and MS 2 out of the coverage area of the MSC pool. Then use the MSs to originate calls. The expected result: MS 1 sets up the call through MSC 1, MS 2
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
sets up the call through MSC 2, and the home MSCs of MS 1 and MS 2 remain unchanged.
NOTE
In the TMSI re-allocation procedure, the MSC assigns the TMSI that contains NRI (configured by the CN) to the MS. With this information, the BSC6900 can allocate the service to the appropriate MSC when the MS initiates a call service. Note that the mapping between the NRI and the MSC on the BSC6900 side must be consistent with that on the CN side. You can use the ADD NRIMSCMAP command to configure the mapping between the NRI and the MSC on the BSC side.
Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the MOD GCNOPERATOR command. In this step, set MSC Pool Function Enabled to NO(No).
----End
8.60 Configuring the SGSN Pool

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119701 SGSN Pool.
Prerequisite
l
Configuration

The license is activated. The communication between the BSC6900 and the SGSN is normal. The BSC to be verified supports SGSN pool.
Verification
Context
A license is required to implement the SGSN pool function. The SGSNs in the SGSN pool share the load and resources in the pool. The SGSN pool can expand network capacity, reduce investment on equipment, implement redundancy backup, and improve network reliability. In addition, it decreases the inter-SGSN cell reselections, thus improving network performance.
Procedure
l Activating Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Run the ADD GCNOPERATOR command. In this step, set Allow SGSN Pool to YES(Yes), and specify SGSN NRI Length and SGSN NullNRI Value. Run the ADD SGSNNODE command to add an SGSN node. In this step, set Operator Name and SGSN Node ID. Run the ADD NRISGSNMAP command to configure the mapping between the NRI and the SGSN. Run the ADD NSE command to add an NSE to the added SGSN node. Run the ADD PTPBVC command. In this step, set NSE Identifier to complete the configuration of the first SGSN corresponding to CELL_1.
8-116
6. l
Repeat Step 2 to Step 5 to add a second SGSN node to complete the configuration of the second SGSN corresponding to CELL_1. Run the DSP PTPBVC command to check the state of PTP BVC, and then record the state. Trace the PTP BVC message over the Gb interface in CELL_1 by referring to Trace the PTP BVC messages on the Gb interface in cell 1, and check the FLOW CONTROL BVC messages that the BSC sends to the SGSN through all the optional PTP BVC. If these messages are correct, SGSN pool is enabled and functional. Run the ADD GCNOPERATOR command. In this step, set Allow SGSN Pool to NO(No).
Verifying Procedure 1. 2.
Deactivating Procedure 1.
----End
8.61 Configuring Abis Bypass

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116601 Abis Bypass.
Prerequisite
l

The BTS3900B/E does not support the feature. The BTS3006C and BTS3002E need to be configured with the DMCM board supporting Abis Bypass. The DABB board needs to be added to the BTS3012(DTRU/QTRU) and BTS3012AE (DTRU/QTRU). Under TDM networking, when ring topology is not used, Abis bypass can be used together with Flex Abis. When ring topology is used, Abis bypass cannot be used together with Flex-Abis. The license is activated.
License
Context
Abis bypass is applicable to GBSS chain topology. When the power supply to BTSs at a level fails, this feature makes the BTSs at the level bypassed and used only as the transmission path so that signals of lower-level BTSs can be transmitted to the BSC6900. After power supply is restored, the BTS and lower-level BTSs in the chain topology automatically reset and restore. To enable the Abis bypass function for cascaded BTSs, you only need to set Abis ByPass Mode to TRUE(Support) for each cascaded BTS. A maximum of five levels of cascaded NGBTSs support Abis bypass in TDM transmission mode. This function requires the support from DIP switches. Table 8-4 and Table 8-5 describe the bits of DIP switches.
Table 8-4 Description of bit values on the DIP switch S4 DIP Switch Bit Status of S4 BIT1 S4 ON OFF BIT2 ON OFF BIT3 ON OFF BIT4 ON OFF E1 bypass is supported. E1 bypass is not supported. Unavailable Remarks
Others
Table 8-5 Description of bit values on the DIP switch S5 DIP Switch Bit Status of S4 BIT1 S5 ON BIT2 ON BIT3 ON BIT4 ON E1 bypass is not supported. Setting of the DIP switch S5 for the first-level cascaded bypass BTSs Setting of the DIP switch S5 for the second-level cascaded bypass BTSs Setting of the DIP switch S5 for the third-level cascaded bypass BTSs Setting of the DIP switch S5 for the fourth-level cascaded bypass BTSs Remarks
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
8-118
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
DIP Switch
Bit Status of S4 BIT1 OFF BIT2 ON BIT3 OFF BIT4 OFF
Remarks
Setting of the DIP switch S5 for the fifth-level cascaded bypass BTSs Unavailable
Others
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. 3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTS to add an upper-level BTS. In this step, set Abis ByPass Mode to TRUE(Support). Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTS to add a lower-level BTS. In this step, set Abis ByPass Mode to TRUE(Support). Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT to add a connection for the lower-level BTS. If more cascaded BTSs need to be added, repeat step 1 to step 3. In this step,

Set Dest Node Type to BTS. Set Dest Father Index Type to BYID(By Index). Set Dest Father BTS Index to the index of the upper-level BTS. Set Dest Father BTS Port No. to the number of the port that connects the lowerlevel BTS to the upper-level BTS.
4. l
Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate the BTS specified by the BTS index. Power off the upper-level BTS. Click Device Maintenance on the LMT and then enter the lower-level BTS maintenance page. Select a BTS that is configured with GPS clock synchronization. Then right-click a GTMU board and choose Query Board Information. A dialog box is displayed. Click Basic Information. If the basic information about the GTMU board is displayed properly, you can infer that the Abis bypass function is enabled. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTS. In this step, specify the index of the upper-level BTS. Set Abis ByPass Mode to FALSE(Not Support). Power off the upper-level BTS. Click Device Maintenance on the BSC6900 LMT and then enter the lower-level BTS maintenance page. Select a BTS that is configured with GPS clock synchronization. Then right-click a GTMU board and choose Query Board Information. A dialog box is displayed. Click Basic Information. If a message is promoted, indicating that the OML is faulty, you can infer that the Abis bypass function is disabled.
Deactivation Procedure 1. 2. 3.
----End
8.62 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117803 Abis Transmission Backup.
Prerequisite
l

Resources are available for terrestrial transmission and satellite transmission. The BTS supports the Ring I topology.. This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-113901 Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface or GBFD-117801 Ring Topology. The license for this feature is activated.
Context
When a disaster-caused failure occurs in the active SDH transmission link over the TDM-based Abis interface, the system automatically switches transmission link to a backup satellite transmission link. In this manner, the normal operation of the network is ensured. With Abis transmission backup enabled, the transmission mode in the forward link is different from that in the reverse link. That is, the forward link uses terrestrial transmission and the reverse link uses satellite transmission, as shown in Figure Figure 8-5. Figure 8-5 Network topology when Abis transmission backup is enabled
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. l
8-120
Run the MOD BTS command. In this step, set Config ring to YES(Yes). Run the SET BTSTRANS command. In this step, set Transmission Mode to TER_AND_SAT_TRANS(Terrestrial and Satellite).
1.
Optional: Use the MS to originate a call.

NOTE
Before verification, ensure that the MS can make a call through terrestrial transmission in a nonring topology network.
2. 3.
Run the MOD BTS command. In this step, set Config ring to YES(Yes). Run the LST BTS command to query the value of Config Ring. The expected result: The value of Config Ring is Yes.
4. 5.
Run the SET BTSTRANS command. In this step, set Transmission Mode to TER_AND_SAT_TRANS(Terrestrial and Satellite). Run the LST BTSTRANS command to query the value of Transmission Mode. The expected result: The value of Transmission Mode is TER_AND_SAT_TRANS.
6.
Disrupt the terrestrial transmission between the BTS and the BSC. For example, remove the E1 cable from port 0 on the BTS. The expected result: The BTS is reset. Five minutes later, the MS can make a call.
Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the SET BTSTRANS command. In this step, set Transmission Mode to TER_TRANS(Terrestrial Transmission) or SAT_TRANS(Satellite Transmission). Run the MOD BTS command. In this step, set Config ring to NO(No).
2. ----End
8.63 Configuring the BSC Node Redundancy

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113725 BSC Node Redundancy.
Prerequisite
l l l
The license is activated. The network is IP based. The BSC node redundancy group consists of two BSCs, between which the communication is normal. If the BTS controlled by the BSC in the BSC node redundancy group is single-homed, it can be configured only under one BSC; if the BTS is dual-homed it should be configured as primary host under one BSC, and secondary host under the other BSC.
Context
A license is required to implement the BSC node redundancy. The BSC node redundancy feature can improve the reliability of the running services. When one BSC is faulty, the services of the cells controlled by this BSC can be taken over by the other BSC in a short period, thus preventing service disruption.
Assume that a BSC node redundancy group consists of two BSCs, BSC1 and BSC2. In addition, BSC1 controls BTS1, and BSC2 controls BTS2. The configuration of the BSC node redundancy group consisting of BSC1 and BSC2 is taken as an example.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Configure the homing type of the signaling point. (1) Run the MOD OPC command on BSC1. In this step, set The host type of signalling point to PRIMHOST(PRIMHOST). (2) Run the ADD OPC command on BSC1. In this step, set OSP code of BSC1 to be the same as OSP code of BSC2, and set The host type of signalling point to SLAVEHOST(SLAVEHOST). (3) Run the MOD OPC command on BSC2. In this step, set The host type of signalling point to PRIMHOST(PRIMHOST). (4) Run the ADD OPC command on BSC2. In this step, set OSP code of BSC2 to be the same as OSP code of BSC1, and set The host type of signalling point to SLAVEHOST(SLAVEHOST). 2. Configure the homing type of the BTS (1) Run the SET BTSIP command on BSC1. In this step, set HostType of BTS1 to PRIMHOST(PRIMHOST). (2) Run the ADD BTS command on BSC1 to add BTS2. In this step, set HostType of BTS2 to SLAVEHOST(SLAVEHOST). (3) Run the SET BTSIP command on BSC2. In this step, set HostType of BTS2 to PRIMHOST(PRIMHOST). (4) Run the ADD BTS command on BSC2 to add BTS1. In this step, set HostType of BTS1 to SLAVEHOST(SLAVEHOST). 3. Configure the link between two BSCs. (1) Run the ADD SCTPLNK command. In this step, set Signalling link mode to SERVER(SERVER MOD) and Application type to BBAP(BBAP). 4. 5. 6. l 1. Run the SET GBSCREDGRP command to set the configuration information about the BSC node redundancy group. Run the SET GREDGRPPRIMHOSTPOLICY command to set the re-hosting policy of the BSC node redundancy group. Run the ACT GBSCREDGRP command to activate the BSC node redundancy group. Run the DSP BTSSTAT command at BSC1 to check the hosting status of BTS1. The expected result: Hosted is Yes. 2. Run the DSP BTSSTAT command at BSC2 to check the hosting status of BTS1. The expected result: Hosted is No. 3. Disrupt all connections over the A interface between BSC1 and MSC, and wait for 15 minutes. Run the DSP BTSSTAT command to query the hosting status of BTS1 under BSC1 and BSC2. The Hosted status of BTS1 is set to No under BSC1, and to Yes under BSC2. The hosting status is changed.
8-122
4.
Resume the connections over the A interface between BSC1 and MSC, and wait for 15 minutes. Run the DSP BTSSTAT command at BSC1 and BSC2 to set Hosted of BTS1 to No and Yes respectively. The hosting status is restored to the original status.
Deactivation Procedure No need to deactivation.
----End
8.64 Configuring the TC Pool

This section describes how to configure and verify the TC pool. 8.64.1 Configuring the TC Pool This section describes how to configure the TC pool. 8.64.2 Verifying the TC Pool This section describes how to verify the TC pool.
8.64.1 Configuring the TC Pool

This section describes how to configure the TC pool.
Prerequisite
l l l
The license is activated. There are two BSC in the network at least, and the two BSC are configured completely. The BM and TC are separated.
Context
l l l l
A license is required to implement the TC pool function. The settings of TC CRC Allow must be consistent on the primary and secondary BSCs. All the BSCs connected to the same TC pool must have the same clock source. If TFO Switch of the secondary BSCs is set to ENABLE(Enable), the TFO setting is effective only when TFO Option Switch of each TCS is set to ON(On) on the primary BSC. For details of setting the TFO, see 8.84 Configuring TFO.
Procedure
l Configuring the Ater interface resources
In Ater over TDM mode, do as follows: 1. Run the SET BSCBASIC command on the primary BSC to set Service mode to SEPARATE(separate) , Is Support Tc Pool to YES(Yes) , Is Main BSC to YES (Yes), and Ater Interface Transfer Mode to TDM(TDM). In addition, set the parameters TC Pool ID. Run the SET BSCBASIC command on the secondary BSC to set Service mode to SEPARATE(separate) , Is Support Tc Pool to YES(Yes) , Is Main BSC to NO (No), and Ater Interface Transfer Mode to TDM(TDM). In addition, set the parameters TC Pool ID, and the ID of Slave BSC in TC Pool.
2.
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Run the ADD ATERCONPATH command on the primary BSC to add an Ater E1/T1 between the primary BSC and the TC subrack. Run the ADD ATERE1T1 command on the secondary BSC to add an Ater connection path between the secondary BSC and the TC subrack. Run the ADD ATEROML command on the primary BSC to add an Ater OML between the primary BSC and the TC subrack. Run the ADD ATERCONSL command on the primary BSC to add an Ater signaling link between the primary BSC and the TC subrack. Run the ADD ATERSL command on the secondary BSC to add an Ater signaling link between the secondary BSC and the TC subrack. Run the SET BSCBASIC command on the primary BSC to set Service mode to SEPARATE(separate) , Is Support Tc Pool to YES(Yes) , Is Main BSC to YES (Yes), and Ater Interface Transfer Mode to IP(IP). In addition, set the parameters TC Pool ID. Run the SET BSCBASIC command on the secondary BSC to set Service mode to SEPARATE(separate) , Is Support Tc Pool to YES(Yes) , Is Main BSC to NO (No), and Ater Interface Transfer Mode to IP(IP). In addition, set the parameters TC Pool ID, and the ID of Slave BSC in TC Pool. Run the ADD ATERCONPATH command on the primary BSC to add an Ater E1/T1 between the primary BSC and the TC subrack. Run the ADD ATERE1T1 command on the secondary BSC to add an Ater connection path between the secondary BSC and the TC subrack. Run the ADD ATEROML command on the primary BSC to add an Ater OML between the primary BSC and the TC subrack. Run the ADD ATERCONSL command on the primary BSC to add an Ater signaling link between the primary BSC and the TC subrack. Run the ADD ATERSL command on the secondary BSC to add an Ater signaling link between the secondary BSC and the TC subrack. Determine the type of link carried on the E1/T1 link (PPP link or MLPPP group).
In Ater over IP mode, do as follows: 1.
2.
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Add PPP link data. Run the ADD PPPLNK command to add a PPP link. To add more PPP links, repeat this step.
NOTE
To add a PPP link on the primary BSC or Secondary BSC, you need to run the ADD PPPLNK command on the BM side and the TC side separately.
Add MLPPP group data. (1) Run the ADD MPGRP command to add an MLPPP group. (2) Run the ADD MPLNK command to add an MLPPP link. To add more MLPPP links, repeat this step.
NOTE
To add a MLPPP gruup on the primary BSC or Secondary BSC, you need to run the ADD MPGRP and the ADD MPLNK command on the BM side and the TC side separately.
9.
8-124
Run the ADD ADJNODE command to add an adjacent node.


NOTE
To add an adjacent node on the primary BSC or Secondary BSC, you need to run the ADD ADJNODE command on the BM side and the TC side separately.
10. Run the ADD IPPATH command to add an IP path. To add more IP paths, repeat this step.
NOTE
To add an Ip path on the primary BSC or Secondary BSC, you need to run the ADD IPPATH command on the BM side and the TC side separately.
Configuring the A interface resources The resources on the A interface can be carried only in TDM mode. The CICs on the A interface E1 in the TCS are under the centralized management and maintenance of the BSC. Therefore, the configuration simpler than for the Ater interface. The operations are as follows: 1. Run the ADD AE1T1 command on the primary BSC to add an E1/T1 between the BSC and the MSC.
NOTE
To configure resources for the secondary BSC, set BSC Flag to SUBBSC(SUB BSC) and specify ID of slave BSC in TC Pool of the secondary BSC.
2.
Do as follows to configure the SS7 signaling link on the A interface of the BSC in the TC pool: (1) Run the ADD MTP3LNK command on the primary and secondary BSCs to add an MTP3 link for transmitting signaling. (2) Run the ADD SEMILINK command on the primary BSC to add a semipermanent link of the MTP2 type in the TCS. The MTP2 semipermanent link is used to transparently transmit the A interface SS7 signaling from the TCS of the primary BSC to the BM subrack of the secondary BSC through the A interface SS7 signaling channel. Then, set BSC in TC Pool ID to specify the secondary BSC to which the semipermanent link belongs.
----End
8.64.2 Verifying the TC Pool

This section describes how to verify the TC pool.
Prerequisite
A TC Pool is configured.
Procedure
Step 1 In a cell under the primary BSC, use the MS to perform voice services. Step 2 Run the DSP ACIC command. In this step, specify OPC Index and DPC Group No, and set Query mode to BYDPC(BY DPC Group), CIC state to OCCUPIED(OCCUPIED), and BSC Flag to MAINBSC(MAIN BSC). The expected result is that the CIC state is displayed and that the primary BSC works properly. Step 3 In a cell under a secondary BSC, use the MS to perform voice services.
Step 4 Run the DSP ACIC command. In this step, specify OPC Index, DPC Group No, and ID of BSC in TC Pool, and set Query mode to BYDPC(BY DPC Group), CIC state to OCCUPIED (OCCUPIED), and BSC Flag to SUBBSC(SUB BSC). The expected result is that the CIC state is displayed and that the secondary BSC works properly. ----End
8.65 Configuring Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510101 Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC).
Prerequisite
l
Currently, only the BTS3012, BTS3012AE, BTS3900 GSM, BTS3900A GSM, and DBS3900 GSM support the AFC feature. None The license is activated.
License
Context
AFC is frequency correction algorithm used on the BTS side for fast-moving MS. This algorithm can ensure the reliability of the radio links carrying high-quality speech services for MS moving at 500 km/h and the service continuity.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT. If... The AFC function is available in the uplink The AFC function is available in the downlink l Verification Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLOTHEXT. Then... Set UL Frequency Adjust Switch to YES(Yes). Set both UL Frequency Adjust Switch and DL Frequency Adjust Switch to YES(Yes).
8-126
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
If... The value of UL Frequency Adjust Switch is YES(Yes).
Then... The AFC function is available in the uplink
The values of both UL Frequency Adjust The AFC function is available in the Switch and DL Frequency Adjust downlink Switch is YES(Yes). 2. Perform FTP upload on a fast-moving vehicle, for example, on a maglev train, intercity high-speed train, or express train. If the AFC function is activated, the uploading speed is fast. If the AFC function is not activated, the uploading speed is slow. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT. In this step, set UL Frequency Adjust Switch and DL Frequency Adjust Switch to NO(No).
----End
8.66 Configuring Fast Move Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510102 Fast Move Handover.
Prerequisite
During a fast PBGT handover, an MS can only be handed over to a chain neighboring cell. Therefore, when configuring the fast PBGT handover, one must specify the chain neighboring cells. For details, see section "Configuring Chain Cell Handover" in the Chain Cell Handover Feature Parameter Description.
Context
None
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. l Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command. In this step, set Quick Handover Enable to YES(Yes). Run the LST GCELLHOBASIC command to list the setting of Quick Handover Enable. The expected result: The value of Quick Handover Enable is YES(Yes). l Deactivation Procedure 1. ----End
Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command. In this step, set Quick Handover Enable to NO(No).
8.67 Configuring Chain Cell Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510103 Chain Cell Handover.
Prerequisite
None
Context
None
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the ADD G2GNCELL command. In this step, set Chain Neighbor Cell to YES (Yes). Optionally, run the MOD G2GNCELL command. In this step, set Chain Neighbor Cell to YES(Yes). Run the LST G2GNCELL command to list the setting of Chain Neighbor Cell. The expected result: The value of Chain Neighbor Cell is YES(Yes). l Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the MOD G2GNCELL command. In this step, set Chain Neighbor Cell to NO (No). Optionally, run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command. In this step, set Quick Handover Enable to NO(No).
----End
8.68 Configuring Multi-Site Cell

This section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-510104 Multi-Site Cell.
Prerequisite
l
The base station must be a distributed base station (for example, DBS3036 GSM or DBS3900 GSM). In the multi-site cell, only three TRX boards are supported, namely, DRRU, MRRU, and GRRU. None The license is activated.
License
8-128
Context
The multi-site cell feature enables multiple subsites to be configured as one cell logically. Such cell is also called cascaded cell. A subsite is defined as an area physically covered by multiple RRUs/RFUs belonging to a BBU. In coverage scenarios such as high-speed railways, tunnels, or indoor space, the use of cascaded cells can reduce handovers, increase coverage efficiency, and improve user experience.
l
One BTS can be configured with a maximum of 36 location groups, and one multi-site cell can be configured with a maximum of 18 location groups. In a multi-site cell, only one main location group can be configured. For cabinet number, subrack number, and slot number of the base station mentioned in the operation steps, a non-SingleRAN base station is taken as an example. For details about the configuration principles of the cabinet, subrack, and slot of a SingleRAN base station, see Numbering Rules of BTS Components.
l l
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSLOCGRP. In this step, set Location Group No. to 0, Is Main Local Group to YES(YES). The main location group is added successfully. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSLOCGRP. In this step, set Location Group No. to 1, Is Main Local Group to NO(NO). The sub-location group is added successfully. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSRXU2LOCGRP. In this step, set Location Group No. to 0, Cabinet No. to 0, Subrack No. to 3, and Slot No. to 0. The RXU board is successfully added to the main location group. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSRXU2LOCGRP. In this step, set Location Group No. to 1, Cabinet No. to 0, Subrack No. to 3, and Slot No. to 1. The RXU board is successfully added to the sub-location group. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSBINDLOCGRP. In this step, set Main Location Group No. to 0, Sub-Location Group No. to 1, TRX ID to 1, Cabinet No. to 0, Subrack No. to 3, and Slot No. to 1, and Sub-Location Group TRX Board Pass No. to 0. In this manner, the TRX in the main location group is successfully bound to idle channel 0 of the board in the sub-location group. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSBINDLOCGRP. In this step, set Main Location Group No. to 0, Sub-Location Group No. to 1, TRX ID to 2, Cabinet No. to 0, Subrack No. to 3, and Slot No. to 1, and Sub-Location Group TRX Board Pass No. to 1. In this manner, the TRX in the main location group is successfully bound to idle channel 1 of the board in the sub-location group.
NOTE
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
l l
This configuration takes effect only when the carriers in the main location group and those in the secondary location group are the same. When deleting the BTS or cell, the location groups under the BTS or cell must be deleted.
Verification Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSLOCGRP. Check that the value of Is Main Local Group is YES when Location Group No. is set to 0. Check that the value of Is Main Local Group is NO when Location Group No. is set to 1.
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
2.
Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSRXU2LOCGRP. Check that the value of Cabinet No. is 0, the value of Subrack No. is 3, and the value of Slot No. is 0 when Location Group No. is set to 0. Check that the value of Cabinet No. is 0, the value of Subrack No. is 3, and the value of Slot No. is 1 when Location Group No. is set to 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSBINDLOCGRP. Check that the value of Cabinet No. is 0, the value of Subrack No. is 3, the value of Slot No. is 1, and the value of Sub-Location Group TRX Board Pass No. is 0 when Main Location Group No. is set to 0, Sub-Location Group No. is set to 1, and TRX ID is set to 1. Check that the value of Cabinet No. is 0, the value of Subrack No. is 3, the value of Slot No. is 1, and the value of Sub-Location Group TRX Board Pass No. is 1 when Main Location Group No. is set to 0, Sub-Location Group No. is set to 1, and TRX ID is set to 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SWP BTSLOCGRP to swap the main location group and the sub-location group. In this step, set Location Group No. to 1.
NOTE
3.
4.
Location Group No. in the BSC6900 MML command SWP BTSLOCGRP is set to the original value of Sub-Location Group No..
5.
Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSLOCGRP. Check that the value of If Current Main Location is NO for the group whose Location Group No. is 0. Check that the value of If Current Main Location is YES for the group whose Location Group No. is 1.
----End
8.69 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Interoperability

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114301 GSM/WCDMA Interoperability.
Prerequisite
l
The MS supports the GSM and WCDMA/TD-SCDMA networks at the same time. In addition, it supports bidirectional (2G to 3G and 3G to 2G) cell reselection and handovers. The BSS and NSS support the bidirectional 2G/3G cell reselection and handover. In addition, they support the inter-RAT cell selection, cell reselection, location update, flow control during inter-RAT handovers, handover decision, and handover signaling procedure. The license is activated.
Context
A license is required to activate 2G/3G interoperability. The 2G/3G interoperability feature enables an MS to be handed over to or reselects a GSM cell if the serving cell of the MS is not covered by the WCDMA/TD-SCDMA network or if the serving WCDMA/TD-SCDMA cell is the area with weak coverage. When a dual-mode MS enters the coverage of the WCDMA/TD-SCDMA network again, or the MS detects that the WCDMA/TD-SCDMA cell is better than the serving GSM cell, the MS can be handed over to
or reselects a WCDMA/TD-SCDMA cell if the handover or cell reselection conditions are met. Then, the MS can enjoy the various services provided by the WCDMA/TD-SCDMA network. 2G/3G interoperability can be applied to the cell reselection and handover between the GSM network and the WCDMA/TD-WCDMA network, and the interoperability between the GSM network and other 3G networks. This feature has no impact on the service. The network elements involved are the MS, BTS, BSC, MSC, PCU, SGSN, GGSN, and HLR.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the ADD GEXT3GCELL command to add a 3G external cell. In this step, set Utran Cell Type to FDD(FDD).
NOTE
To configure the GSM/TD-SCDMA interoperability, set Utran Cell Type to TDD(TDD).
2.
Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command to set the basic handover parameters of the cell. In this step, set Inter-RAT Cell Reselection Enable to YES(Yes), InterRAT Out BSC Handover Enable to YES(Yes), and Inter-RAT In BSC Handover Enable to YES(Yes). Run the SET GCELLCCBASIC command to set the basic call control parameters of the cell. In this step, set ECSC to YES(Yes). Run the SET GCELLHOUTRANFDD command to set the UTRAN FDD handover parameters of a cell. In this step, set Better 3G Cell HO Allowed to YES(Yes), Interrat HO Preference to Pre_3G_Cell(Preference for 3G cell), RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO to 0, and Ec/No Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO to 0.
NOTE
3. 4.
If the Utran Cell Type of the newly added external 3G neighboring cell is TDD(TDD), run the SET GCELLHOUTRANFDD command.
5.
Run the SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS command to set the UTRAN system message parameters for call control in a cell. In this step, set Qsearch I to 7, Qsearch C to 7, Qsearch P to 7, and Qsearch C Initial to Always(Always). When Utran Cell Type is set to TDD(TDD), run the SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS command to modify the UTRAN system message parameters for call control in a cell. In this step, set TDD System Information Optimized Allowed to YES(Yes). Run the ADD G3GNCELL command to add a neighboring 3G cell. Run the ADD GEXT3GCELL command to add a 3G external cell. In this step, set Utran Cell Type to FDD(FDD). Run the ADD G3GNCELL command to add a neighboring 3G cell. In this step, set Source Cell Index to the index of the cell to be verified and set Neighbor Cell Index to the index of the newly added 3G external cell. Run the SET BSCBASIC command. In this step, set A Interface Tag to GSM_PHASE_2Plus. Run the SET OTHSOFTPARA command to set the other software parameters of the BSC. In this step, set Support Sent 2QUATER to YES(Yes), Send 3G Class Flag to YES(Yes), and Classmark Enquiry With 3G Request to YES(Yes).
6.
7. l 1. 2.
3. 4.
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
5.
Run the SET GCELLCCBASIC command to set the basic call control parameters of the cell. In this step, set Cell Index to the index of the source cell, and set ECSC to YES(Yes). Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command to set the basic handover control parameters of a cell. In this step, set Cell Index to the index of the source cell, and then set Inter-RAT Cell Reselection Enable to YES(Yes), Inter-RAT Out BSC Handover Enable to YES(Yes), and Inter-RAT In BSC Handover Enable to YES (Yes). Run the SET GCELLHOUTRANFDD command. In this step, set Cell Index to the index of the source cell, and then set Better 3G Cell HO Allowed to YES(Yes), Inter-rat HO Preference to Pre_3G_Cell(Preference for 3G cell), RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO to 0, and Ec/No Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO to 0. Run the SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS command. In this step, set Cell Index to the index of the source cell, and then set Qsearch I to 7, Qsearch C to 7, Qsearch C Initial to Always(Always) . Click the Trace tab on the LMT. In the Trace Navigation Tree on Trace tab page, choose Trace > GSM Services, and then double-click > A Interface Trace. The A Interface Trace dialog box is displayed.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10. On the Basic tab page, specify the DPC of the test cell in the DPC(Hex) text box. Click BSSAP tab, and then specify the ID of the test cell in the Cell ID(cell1,cell2, cell16) text box on the BSSAP tab page. Then click Submit. 11. After the A interface message tracing window is displayed, use a dual-mode MS to initiate a call in the source cell. After the call is normally initiated, move the MS to a strong coverage area in a 3G cell. Hold on the call, and query the traced messages on the A interface. Verify that the Handover Required message is traced. l Deactivation Procedure 1. 2. Run the RMV G3GNCELL command to delete a neighboring 3G cell. Run the SET GCELLHOUTRANFDD command. In this step, set Better 3G Cell HO Allowed to NO(No) and Inter-rat HO Preference to Pre_2G_Cell(Preference for 2G cell). Run the SET GCELLCCBASIC command to set the basic call control parameters of the cell. In this step, set ECSC to NO(No). Run the RMV GEXT3GCELL command to delete the 3G external cell.
3. 4. ----End
8.70 Configuring the Fast 3G Reselection at 2G CS Call Release

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114325 Fast 3G Reselection at 2G CS Call Release.
Prerequisite
l l
The network involves the 2G network and the 3G network The 2G cell and 3G cell are neighboring cells.
8-132

l l
The UE supports the 2G and 3G frequency bands at the same time. The license is activated.
Context
In a 2G and 3G overlapped network, the UE camps on the 3G cell when idle. When a call is set up, the UE is handed over to the 2G cell. After this feature is enabled, the UE returns to and camps on the 3G cell when the call is released. In this way, the cell reselection time is reduced.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. l Run the SET GCELLCCAD command. In this step, set Select 3G Cell After Call Release to YES(Yes). Run the SET GCELLCCAD command. In this step, set Select 3G Cell After Call Release of cell 0 (2G cell) to YES(Yes). Run the ADD GEXT3GCELL command to configure a FDD neighboring 3G cell. Run the ADD G3GNCELL command to configure this 3G cell as a neighboring cell of cell 0. Run the SET BSCBASIC command to set the basic attributes of the BSC. In this step, set A Interface Tag, Um Interface Tag , and Abis Interface Tag to GSM_PHASE_2Plus. Open the Abis interface tracing window. Use an MS to make a call in cell 0, ensure that the call is set up successfully, and hold the call. Release the call, and check the network identifier displayed on the MS. Ensure that the MS is in the 3G cell.
NOTE
3. 4.
If the identifier of the 2G network is the same as that of the 3G network, ensure that you can check the 2G or 3G functions through the MS.
5. l
Check whether the IE cell-selection-indicator-after-release is contained in the downlink Channel Release message over the Abis interface. Run the SET GCELLCCAD command. In this step, set Select 3G Cell After Call Release to NO(No).
----End
8.71 Configuring the Satellite Transmission

In remote mountainous areas or sparsely populated plains, satellite transmission can be applied to achieve wide coverage, long transmission distance, and flexible link scheduling. 8.71.1 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113901 Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface. 8.71.2 Configuring Satellite Transmission over A Interface This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113902 Satellite Transmission over A Interface.
8.71.3 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface. 8.71.4 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Pb Interface This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113904 Satellite Transmission over Pb Interface. 8.71.5 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Gb Interface This section describes how to configure and verify the optional feature GBFD-113905 Satellite Transmission over Gb Interface.
8.71.1 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113901 Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface.
Prerequisite
l
Activation The license for this feature is activated. Verification The cell to be verified is in normal state and has idle channels.
Context
Satellite transmission over Abis interface is controlled by a license. Satellite transmission over Abis interface solves the communication problem for the base station in time when installing transmission lines is geographically impossible. Satellite transmission over Abis interface has a longer delay in information exchanges than terrestrial transmission. To ensure the normal processing of PS services in the satellite transmission mode, the PS cell GPRS parameters T3168 must be set to 2000ms(2000ms), T3192 must be set to 0ms(0ms), and BS_CV_MAX must be set to 15.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. 3. Run the SET BTSTRANS command. In this step, set Transmission Mode to SAT_TRANS(Satellite Transmission). Run the SET BTSCLKPARA command. In this step, set Clock Mode to INCLK (Internal Clock). Optional: Run the SET BTSLAPDWS command. In this step, set RSL LAPD Window Size to a proper value according to the actual delay.
NOTE
RSL LAPD Window Size is set to 48 by default and can be set by the operator according to the actual delay. The longer the delay, the larger the value needs to be set.
4.
Optional: Run the SET GCELLCCTMR command. In this step, set T200 SDCCH to 200, T200 SACCH SDCCH to 100, and T200 SDCCH SAPI3 to 200. Adjust the setting according to the actual delay over Abis interface. A longer delay requires a larger value.
8-134
5.
Optional: Run the SET GCELLCCBASIC command. In this step, adjust MS MAX Retrans as practically required.
NOTE
Adjusting MS MAX Retrans to a larger value increases successful radio access rate and adjusting MS MAX Retrans to a smaller value reduces the load of the RACH and SDCCH.
6. l
Optional: Run the SET GCELLPSBASE command. In this step, set T3168 to 2000ms(2000ms), T3192 to 0ms(0ms), and BS_CV_MAX to 15. Run the DSP GCELLSTAT command to query the status of the cell. The expected result: Cell Service State is Yes. The MS initiates a call. Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface, and select RSL in Trace Type. The expected result: The complete signaling procedure of the mobile-originated call can be seen.
4. l
The MS runs the PING command after being connected to the network through dialup. The service succeeds. Run the DEA BTS command to deactivate the BTS. Run the SET BTSTRANS command. In this step, set Transmission Mode to TER_TRANS(Terrestrial Transmission). Run the SET BTSCLKPARA command. In this step, set Clock Mode as practically required. Optional: Run the SET GCELLCCTMR command. In this step, set T200 SDCCH to 60, T200 SACCH SDCCH to 60, and T200 SDCCH SAPI3 to 60. Adjust the settings according to the actual delay over Abis interface. A longer delay requires a larger value. Optional: Run the SET GCELLCCBASIC command. In this step, set MS MAX Retrans to 2_Times(2_Times). Ajust MS MAX Retrans as practically required. Optional: Run the SET GCELLPSBASE command. In this step, set T3168 to 0ms (0ms), T3192 to 0ms(0ms), and BS_CV_MAX to 10. Run the ACT BTS command to activate the BTS.
Deactivation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4.
5. 6. 7. ----End
8.71.2 Configuring Satellite Transmission over A Interface

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113902 Satellite Transmission over A Interface.
Prerequisite
l
Activation The OPC and DPC are configured. For details, see Configuring the OPC and DPC. The EIUa/OIUa/POUc board is configured. For details, see Configuring a Board. The license supporting satellite transmission over A interface is activated on the BSC.
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
8-135

l
Verification The OPC and DPC are configured. For details, see Configuring the OPC and DPC. The EIUa/OIUa/POUc board is configured. For details, see Configuring a Board. The cell to be verified is in normal state and has idle channels. The license supporting satellite transmission over A interface is activated on the BSC.
Context
Satellite transmission over A interface is controlled by a license. Satellite transmission over A interface can be used when setting up the terrestrial transmission between the BSC and the MSC is impossible in the cases such as a temporary emergency office or satellite transmission as the backup transmission line.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the ADD AE1T1 command to add an E1/T1 over A interface.
NOTE
One EIUa board provides 32 E1/T1 ports. One E1 port supports thirty-two 64 kbit/s timeslots and one T1 port supports twenty-five 64 kbit/s timeslots. Every timeslot corresponds to one Circuit Identification Code(CIC). If the Start CIC of the first E1/T1 is 0, then the Start CIC of the second E1/T1 and that of the first E1/T1 must be in different groups. That is, the Start CIC of the second E1 must be larger than 31 and the Start CIC of the second T1 must be larger than 24. When MSC pool is configured, E1/T1 lines with the same OPC and DPCs in the same DPC group cannot share the Start CIC .
2. 3. 4. l 1. 2. 3.
Run the ADD MTP3LKS command to add an MTP3 signaling link set over A interface. Run the ADD MTP3LNK command to add an MTP3 signaling link over A interface. In this step, set Satellite flag to YES(YES). Run the ADD MTP3RT command to add an MTP3 signaling route over A interface. The MS initiates a call and the call succeeds. Run the DSP MTP3LNK command to query the status of the MTP3 signaling link. Tracing Messages on the A Interface, and select BSSAP in Trace Type, Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface, and select RSL in Trace Type. The expected result: The complete signaling procedure of the mobile-originated call can be seen.
Deactivation Procedure 1. 2. Run the RMV MTP3LNK command to remove the configured MTP3 signaling link. Run the ADD MTP3LNK command to add an MTP3 signaling link over A interface. In this step, set Satellite flag to NO(NO).
----End
8-136
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
8.71.3 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface.
Prerequisite
l
Activation The OPC and DPC are configured. For details, see Configuring the OPC and DPC. The EIUa/OIUa board is configured. For details, see Configuring a Board. The license supporting satellite transmission over Ater interface is activated on the BSC.
Verification The cell to be verified is in normal state and has idle channels.
Context
Satellite transmission over Ater interface is controlled by a license. In BM/TC separated mode with the TC configured remotely, satellite transmission over Ater interface can be used when installing transmission lines is geographically impossible.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the ADD ATERCONPATH command to add an Ater connection path between the MPS and the TCS.
NOTE
If the TC pool function is supported, the command only applies to the primary BSC. The secondary BSC needs to be configured through the ADD ATERE1T1 command.
2. 3.
Run the ADD ATEROML command to add an Ater OML. Run the ADD ATERCONSL command to add an Ater signaling link. In this step, set Transmission Mode to SATEL(Satellite Transmission).
NOTE
If the TC pool function is supported, the command only applies to the primary BSC. The secondary BSC needs to be configured through the ADD ATERSL command.
4.
Optional: Run the MOD ATERCONSL command. In this step, set Window Size to a proper value according to the actual delay.
NOTE
If the TC pool function is supported, the command only applies to the primary BSC. The secondary BSC needs to be configured through the MOD ATERSL command. The longer the delay in satellite transmission, the larger the value needs to be set.
Verification Procedure 1. Run the DSP ATERSL command to query the status of the Ater signaling link. The expected result: Usage Status is Normal. Run the MOD ATERSL command. In this step, set Transmission Mode to TRRS (Terrestrial Transmission).
----End
8.71.4 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Pb Interface

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113904 Satellite Transmission over Pb Interface.
Prerequisite
l
Activation The license for this feature is activated. PCU version: G3PCUV300R005C03 or later BTS version: G3BTS32.30000.03.0529A or later
Verification On the PCU side, configure the cell as a satellite-capable cell. Then, check whether the cell is in normal operation.
Context
l
If terrestrial lines between the BSC and the external PCU cannot be installed or the installation cost of the terrestrial lines is high, satellite transmission can be deployed over the Pb interface. The transmission delay over the G-Abis interface of a satellite-capable cell is longer than that over the G-Abis interface of an ordinary cell. If the same amount of data is transmitted by these two types of cell, it takes more time for the satellite-capable cell to wait for a response message from the MS. Therefore, the transmission performance of a satellitecapable cell is worse than that of an ordinary cell. Under the condition that the average downlink rate of an MS is not affected, the network reduces the maximum number of downlink PDCHs allocated to the MS so that the time for the RLC sending window to reach its maximum size is prolonged.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Activating satellite transmission over the Pb interface through the LMT
Run the ADD PBE1T1 command to add an E1/T1 link over the Pb interface. In this step, set Transmission Mode to SATEL(Satellite Transmission).
NOTE
The value of Start PCIC must be a multiple of 128. After satellite transmission is applied on the Pb E1 link, the Pb signaling link switches to the satellite transmission mode automatically.
2.
Configuring satellite transmission over the Pb interface through PCU LocalWS

Run the mt gcell deactive<LCNo> command to deactivate a cell. Run the pcu add sattrans<LCNo> yes command to configure satellite transmission for the cell. Run the mt gcell active <LCNo> command to activate the cell.
Verifying satellite transmission over the Pb interface 1. 2. Run the mt gcell deactive<LCNo> command to deactivate a cell. Run the pcu add sattrans<LCNo> yes command to configure satellite transmission for the cell.
8-138
3. 4. 5. l 1.
Run the mt gcell active<LCNo> command to activate the cell. Run the mt gcell show stat<LCNo> command to check whether the state of the cell is UNBLOCK. Use the MS to perform PS services. Services are processed properly. Deactivating satellite transmission over the Pb interface through the LMT
Deactivation Procedure Run the MOD PBE1T1 command. In this step, set Transmission Mode to TRRS (Terrestrial Transmission). Run the mt gcell deactive<LCNo> command to deactivate a cell. Run the pcu set sattrans<LCNo> no command to configure terrestrial transmission for the cell. Run the mt gcell active <LCNo> command to activate the cell.
2.
Configuring terrestrial transmission over the Pb interface through PCU LocalWS

----End
8.71.5 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Gb Interface

This section describes how to configure and verify the optional feature GBFD-113905 Satellite Transmission over Gb Interface.
Prerequisite
l l
The license for this feature is activated. A DPUd board is configured.
Context
A license is required to implement satellite transmission over the Gb interface.
Procedure
l Configuring satellite transmission over the Gb interface 1. The procedure for configuring satellite transmission over the Gb interface is the same as the procedure for configuring terrestrial transmission over the Gb interface. For details, see Configuring the Gb Interface (over FR) and Configuring the Gb Interface (over IP). After an NSE is added, run the DSP SIGBVC command to query the state of the SIG BSSGP virtual connection (SIG BVC). If the value of SIG BVC State is Normal, you can infer that the SIG BVC works properly. After a PTP BVC is added, run the DSP PTPBVC command to query the state of the PTP BSSGP virtual connection (PTP BVC). If the value of Manage State is Unblock and the value of Service State is Normal, you can infer that the PTP BVC works properly.
Verifying satellite transmission over the Gb interface 1.
2.
----End
8.72 Configuring High Speed Signaling

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115201 High Speed Signaling.
Prerequisite
l
The MSC supports high-speed signaling. None The license for this feature is activated. TDM transmission is applied over the A interface. The EIUa/OIUa board is configured. The OPC and DPC are configured.
Other prerequisites

Context
A high-speed signaling link is a 2 Mbit/s signaling link. Compared with the 64 kbit/s signaling link, the 2 Mbit/s signaling link is configured with more timeslots; thus, the signaling transmission capacity of the 2 Mbit/s signaling link is greatly enhanced. Generally, high-speed signaling links are used for terrestrial transmission. Satellite transmission does not use high-speed signaling links.
WARNING
Reconfiguring the signaling link over the A interface will disrupt the services of the BSC6900. Therefore, perform the operation when the traffic is light, for example, in the early morning. The whole process (including board restart) takes about 10 minutes.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. 3. Run the ADD AE1T1 command to add an E1/T1 on the A interface. Run the ADD MTP3LKS command to add an MTP3 signaling link set. Run the ADD MTP3LNK command. In this step, set Link Bear Type to MTP2 (MTP2) and Link rate type to 2M(2Mbit/s).
NOTE
In BM/TC separated mode where the TCS is configured remotely, you are advised to set Ater Mask of the MTP3 signaling links on the main TCS to values rather than TS1.
4.
8-140
Run the ADD MTP3RT command to add an MTP3 route.

Verification Procedure 1. Run the LST MTP3LNK command to query the information about the MTP3 signaling link. The expected result: The value of Link rate type is 2Mbit/s.
Deactivation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. Run the RMV MTP3LNK command. In this step, set Signalling link set index and Signalling link code. Run the RMV MTP3RT command. In this step, set DSP index and Signalling link set index. Run the RMV MTP3LKS command. In this step, set Signalling link set index. Run the RMV AE1T1 command to remove an E1/T1 on the A interface.
----End
8.73 Configuring Local Multiple Signaling Points

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115301 Local Multiple Signaling Points.
Prerequisite
l
None This feature and the feature GBFD-118602 A over IP or the feature GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1 cannot be used together. The license for this feature is activated. Mltiple OSPs are configured. Multiple DSPs are configured. The route, link set, and link data are configured. The Operation State of the link is Available.
Other prerequisites

Context
The local multiple signaling point feature enables one physical BSC to serve as multiple logical BSCs so that each logical BSC can exchange signaling with the MSC. The traffic load is distributed to each logical BSC. Therefore, the impact on the paging traffic of the BSC is reduced.
CAUTION
The original intra-BSC handover or intra-BSC directed retry may be converted into outgoing BSC handover or outgoing BSC directed retry after local multiple signaling points are configured. As a result, the signaling load on the A interface and the call establishment time are increased.
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
8-141
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the ADD OPC command repeatedly to add the OSPs. The parameters Network ID and OSP code bits of the multiple OSPs must be consistent. OSP Codes must be different among the OSPs. In addition, OSP Codes must be different from DSP Codes. Run the ADD N7DPC command repeatedly to add the desired DSPs. In this step, the OSP index and DSP type specified in Step 1 must be set.
NOTE
2.
After the DSP is configured, the connection from a logical BSC to the MSC is configured. Take the establishment of the connections from two logical BSCs to the same MSC as an example. First, you need to add two OSPs with different OSP codes. Then, add two DSPs with identical DSP code, which is the signaling code of the MSC. In this manner, the connections from two logical BSCs to the same MSC are established.
Verification Procedure 1. Run the ADD OPC command to configure the OSP of the logical BSC. In this step, set Network ID, OSP code bits, and OSP code according to network planning. The OSP codes of multiple logical BSCs must be different. Run the ADD N7DPC command to configure the logical link between the OSP and DSP.
NOTE
2.
If multiple logical BSCs need to be connected to the same DPC, then the DSP code and DSP type for each logical connection must be the same. The OSP index needs to be set to the OSP index of the logical BSC set in Step 1. The DSP bear type needs to set according to network planning. In the case of ATM/TDM transmission, select MTP3(MTP3); in the case of IP transmission, select M3UA(M3UA); in the case of co-transmission, select MTP3_M3UA(MTP3 and M3UA).
3.
Configure the transmission link between OSP and DSP. If the bear type is MTP3, then the MTP3 link set, MTP3 link, and MTP3 route need to be configured. If the bear type is M3UA, then the M3UA link set, M3UA link, M3UA route, M3UA local entity, and M3UA destination entity need to be configured. The following takes the MTP3 bear type as an example. Run the ADD MTP3LKS command to configure the link set between the OSP and DSP. In this step, set DSP index to that configured in Step 2. Run the ADD MTP3LNK command to configure the physical link between the OSP and DSP. In this step, set the Signaling link set index as specified in Step 4. Run the ADD MTP3RT command to configure the route from the OSP to the DSP. The route from the OSP to the DSP can be set up either in direct connection or transfer manner.
NOTE
4. 5. 6.
In direct connection manner, the DSP index in this command must be the same as the DSP index corresponding to the link set configured in Step 4. If a signaling transfer point is used, the DSP index in this command must be different from the DSP index corresponding to the link set configured in Step 4 and the DSP corresponding to the link set must provide the signaling link transfer functionality.
7.
Run the DSP N7DPC command to query the status of the DSP configured in Step 2. The expected result: The value of SCCP DSP state is Accessible.
l
8-142
1. 2. ----End
Run the RMV N7DPC command to remove a DSP. Run the RMV OPC command to remove an OSP.
8.74 Configuring Semi-Permanent Connection

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114701 Semi-Permanent Connection.
Prerequisite
l
Context
After a semi-permanent connection is configured, the information received by the E1 timeslot at the receiving end is exchanged to an E1 timeslot at the transmitting end by the internal timeslot switching function of the BSC. In this way, the collected information is transparently transmitted in the BSC. Huawei BSS supports two types of semi-permanent connection:
l
Semi-permanent link The input and output of a semi-permanent link are located at the BSC interface board. In this case, the BSC performs timeslot switching between the input timeslot and the output timeslot.
Monitoring timeslot One end of the channel associated with a monitoring timeslot is a BTS port, and the other end of the channel is a BSC interface board. In this case, the BTS and the BSC together perform timeslot switching.
Procedure
l Activating a semi-permanent link 1. Run the ADD SEMILINK command to add a semi-permanent link in the BSC. In this step, set Application Type to OTHER(OTHER), and set Semipermanent Link Rate according to the bandwidth requirements.
NOTE
In BSC Start Timeslot No. and Out BSC Start Timeslot No. need to be set according to the network planning. Ensure that the associated timeslots are not occupied.
Activating a monitoring timeslot 1. Run the ADD BTSMONITORTS command to add a monitoring timeslot. In this step, set Time Slot Rate according to the bandwidth requirements.
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
Verifying a semipermanent link 1. Run the DSP SEMILINK command to view the state of a semi-permanent link. The expected result: The value of State is OK.
Verifying a monitoring timeslot 1. Run the LST BTSMONITORTS command to view the state of a monitoring timeslot. The expected result: The information about the monitoring timeslot is displayed.
l l
Deactivating a semi-permanent link 1. 1. Run the RMV SEMILINK command to remove a semi-permanent link. Run the RMV BTSMONITORTS command to remove a monitoring timeslot from a BTS. Deactivating a monitoring timeslot
----End
8.75 Configuring End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116401 End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing.
Prerequisite
l
The MSC and M2000 support end-to-end MS signaling tracing. None The license for this feature is activated.
Context
End-to-end MS signaling tracing is a function based on which tracing tasks are created by each NE on the call path. After each NE traces the MS signaling, the M2000 interprets and summarizes the MS signaling and then displays the MS signaling on the M2000 client. By using the end-to-end MS signaling tracing function, the system can collect the information about the specified MS when required. This function occupies a small number of system resources. By recording the signaling about an MS, this function helps to identify the NE where the fault occurs, thus facilitating fault handling.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. l Run the SET OTHSOFTPARA command. In this step, set Support End-to-end User Tracing Function to YES(Yes). Run the LST OTHSOFTPARA command to query the value of Support End-toend User Tracing Function.
8-144
The expected result: The value of Support End-to-end User Tracing Function is YES(Yes). 2. Activate a task of end-to-end MS signaling tracing at the M2000 and use an MS to make a call under the BSC. The expected result: The M2000 generates a report on the end-to-end MS signaling tracing. l Deactivation Procedure 1. ----End Run the SET OTHSOFTPARA command. In this step, set Support End-to-end User Tracing Function to NO(No).
8.76 Configuring Active Power Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-117602 Active Power Control.
Prerequisite
None
Context
Active power control enables the BSC to tune uplink/downlink power after the MS accesses the network or the intra-BSC handover succeeds so that the MS/BTS can transmit signals with appropriate power levels. In this manner, the problem of untimely power control is solved. With active power control, the system interference is reduced, the service quality is improved, and the power consumption of the MS/BTS is reduced.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. l Run the SET GCELLPWRBASIC command.In this step, set Power Forecast Allowed to YES(Yes). Run the SET GCELLBASICPARA command.In this step, set UL PC Allowed to YES(Yes) and DL PC Allowed to YES(Yes). Run the SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT command repeatedly. In this step, specify TRX ID and Channel No., and then set Administrative State to Lock(Lock) to block all TCHs on the BCCH TRX of Cell 0 except SDCCH. Start the CS Domain Messages of a Single Subscriber trace for Cell 0. Use the MS to initiate a call. Ensure that the level is good during the test with the uplink/downlink level being greater than 60 dBm when the measurement report is sent to the BSS. Check the result in Single User CS Trace window. The expected result: The call is initiated successfully and the communication is normal. The TCH occupied by the call is on a non-BCCH TRX, and the Measurement Result message concerning the TCH is present before the Channel Activation message is delivered. In this case, the values of the fields bs power and ms power in the Channel
2. 3.
4.
Activation message are not the maximum (the maximum power level of the 900M cell is 5 and that of the 1800M cell is 0). l Deactivation Procedure 1. 2. Run the SET GCELLPWRBASIC command. In this step, set Power Forecast Allowed to NO(No). Run the LST GCELLPWRBASIC command to check the value of Power Forecast Allowed. The expected result: The value of Power Forecast Allowed is NO(No). ----End
8.77 Configuring Ciphering

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate ciphering.
Prerequisite
l
Context
Ciphering helps ensure information security. The use of ciphering algorithms in telecommunications increases the signaling load and the access delay of a call. If the BSS does not support a specified ciphering algorithm, call accesses or handovers might fail. In this case, the performance counters such as assignment success rate and handover success rate are affected. The configuration of A5/3 ciphering algorithm is taken as an example. Ciphering needs to be configured at both the BSC6900 and the MSC.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. Run the SET BSCBASIC command. In this step, set A Interface Tag to GSM_PHASE_2Plus. Run the SET GCELLSOFT command. In this step, set SD Quick HO to ON(On).
NOTE
SD Quick HO is configured to improve the security of the A5 ciphering algorithm.
3.
Run the SET GCELLBASICPARA command to select the A5/0 and A5/3 ciphering algorithms.
NOTE
A5/0 in the Encryption Algorithm drop-down list must be selected.
l
8-146
1. 2. 3. 4.
Run the SET BSCBASIC command. In this step, set A Interface Tag to GSM_PHASE_2Plus. Run the SET GCELLSOFT command. In this step, set Cell Index to the index of the test cell, and SD Quick HO to ON(On). Run the SET GCELLBASICPARA command. In this step, set Cell Index to the index of the test cell, and set Encryption Algorithm to A5/0-1&A5/3-1. On the LMT, open the A Interface Trace dialog box. On the Basic tab page, set DPC (Hex) of the test cell. In the Trace Type area, select BSSAP. On the BSSAP tab page, set Cell ID (cell1,cell2,cell16) of the test cell. Then, click Submit. After the A interface tracing window is opened, use the MS to initiate a call in the test cell. The expected result: The call is set up. The chosen-encryption-algorithm IE in the Cipher Mode Complete message is gsm-a5-3.
5.
----End
8.78 Configuring Speech Version

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the speech version.
Prerequisite
l
Context
When Huawei MSC is used, the BSC6900 must support FR speech version 3 or HR speech version 3. If a BTS supports AMR but its software version does not, then the AMR cannot be configured. In this case, the BTS needs to be installed with a software version supporting AMR.
NOTE
l l
The 7.95 kbit/s AMR HR is supported only when Service Mode of the Abis interface is IP or HDLC. In A over IP mode, the EFR function cannot be enabled.
Procedure
l Activating EFR 1. l
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
Run the SET GCELLCCACCESS command. In this step, set Speech Version of a cell to FULL_RATE_VER2(Full-rate VER 2).
Activating AMR
1. 2.
Run the SET BSCBASIC command. In this step, set A Interface Tag to GSM_PHASE_2Plus. Run the SET GCELLCCACCESS command. In this step, set Speech Version to FULL_RATE_VER3(Full-rate VER 3). If the cell supports the HR service, set Speech Version to HALF_RATE_VER3(Half-rate VER 3). Optional: Run the SET GCELLCCAMR command. In this step, set call control parameters when AMR is applied on the FR and HR channels.
NOTE
3.
l l l
AMR ACS[F] and AMR ACS[H] can be set to one to four coding rates respectively. By setting AMR Rate Control Switch, you can select different algorithms. By setting AMR Downlink Adaptive Threshold Allowed to YES(Yes), you can enable the adaptive adjustment function of AMR downlink thresholds.
4.
Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command. In this step, set the parameters of the handover between the TCHF and the TCHH in an AMR cell, such as Intracell F-H HO Allowed, Intracell F-H HO Stat Time, Intracell F-H HO Last Time, F2H HO Threshold, and H2F HO Threshold. Run the SET GCELLPWR2 command. In this step, set the AMR power control parameters such as AMR PC Interval. Run the SET GCELLCHMGAD command. In this step, set AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed and AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold. Run the SET GCELLCCACCESS command. In this step, set Speech Version of a cell to HALF_RATE_VER1(Half-rate VER 1), HALF_RATE_VER2(Half-rate VER 2), and HALF_RATE_VER3(Half-rate VER 3). HALF_RATE_VER2 (Half-rate VER 2) of Speech Version is reserved. Currently, no service uses HR speech version 2. Run the LST GCELLCCACCESS command to query the value of Speech Version. The expected result: The activated speech versions are in the USED state.
5. 6. l
Activating HR 1.
Deactivation Procedure The BSC6900 must be configured with at least one speech version. Thus, the speech versions cannot be deactivated. The SET GCELLCCACCESS command, however, can be used to modify the selected speech versions.
----End
8.79 Configuring Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113402 Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR.
Prerequisite
l l
The cell is a non-concentric cell and works properly. The core network, cell, and MS support half-rate speech.
8-148

l
All the TCHs in the cell are full-rate channel.
Context
With this feature, the full-rate (FR) channels and the half-rate (HR) channels are dynamically converted to automatically adapt to the proportions of FR channels and HR channels in a cell during the call. In this manner, the situation in which one type of channel is congested whereas the other type of channel is idle can be prevented.
Procedure
l Activation Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR Function 1. l Run the SET GTRXDEV command to set the device attributes of TRXs in the cell. In this step, set TCH Rate Adjust Allow to YES(Yes). Run the SET GCELLCHMGAD command to specify a cell. In this step, set TCH Traffic Busy Threshold to 0 to ensure that the new call is preferentially assigned half-rate TCH. Use an MS to initiate a call in the cell. The expected result: The call is successfully initiated and the communication is normal. A full-rate TCH is converted into two half-rate TCHs and are used by the MS. 3. End the call. The expected result: The half-rate TCHs are not converted into full-rate TCH. 4. Run the SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT command to specify all the full-rate TCHs in the cell. In this step, set Administrative State to Lock(Lock) and block all fullrate TCHs in the cell.Reserve only half-rate TCHs. Run the SET GCELLCHMGAD command to specify a cell. In this step, set TCH Traffic Busy Threshold to 100 to ensure that the new call is preferentially assigned full-rate TCH. Use an MS to initiate a call in the cell. The expected result: The call is successfully initiated and the communication is normal. The MS uses a full-rate TCH.
NOTE
Verifying Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR Function 1.
2.
5.
6.
In Step 5, if the caller and the called party camp on the same cell, you need to reserve a full-rate TCH to ensure the successful setup of the call.
Deactivating Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR Function 1. 2. Run the SET GTRXDEV command to set the device attributes of TRXs in the cell. In this step, set TCH Rate Adjust Allow to NO(No). Run the LST GTRXDEV command to check the value of TCH Rate Adjust Allow. The expected result: The value of TCH Rate Adjust Allow is NO.
----End
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
8-149
8.80 Configuring the Cell Broadcast

Through the cell broadcast service, the mobile operator can broadcast specified short messages in the cells controlled by one or more BTSs in the mobile network. All the MSs in the cells can receive the short messages. 8.80.1 Configuring Short Message Service Cell Broadcast This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature GBFD-113601 Short Message Service Cell Broadcast. 8.80.2 Configuring Simplified Cell Broadcast This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature GBFD-113602 Simplified Cell Broadcast.
8.80.1 Configuring Short Message Service Cell Broadcast

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature GBFD-113601 Short Message Service Cell Broadcast.
Prerequisite
l l l
The license is activated. The XPUa/XPUb board is configured and works normally. The cell broadcast center (CBC) works properly.
Context
A license is required to activate short message service cell broadcast. To enable short message service cell broadcast, you must install the hardware and software of the cell broadcast center (CBC) and the corresponding networking equipment.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. Run the MOD GCNOPERATOR command to modify the attributes of a GSM operator. In this step, set Support Cell Broadcast to SPPRTSTANDARD. Run the ADD XPUVLAN command to add the VLAN attributes of the XPU board. In this step, specify IP addresses as required and set the VLAN attributes on the BSC that is connected to the CBC. Run the SET XPUPORT command to set the port attributes of the XPU board. In this step, set Panel Port Switch to OPEN(Open). Run the ADD GCBSADDR command to add the parameters related to the CBC IP address. Run the SET GTRXCHAN command. In this step, set the type of CBCH supported by the cell.
3. 4. 5. l
8-150
1.
Run the MOD GCNOPERATOR command. In this step, set Operator Index to the ID of the operator whose cell is to be verified and Support Cell Broadcast to SPPRTSTANDARD(SupportStandard CB). Run the ADD XPUVLAN command. In this step, set Subrack No., Slot No., and Subsystem No. to the subrack number, slot number, and subsystem number corresponding to the XPU board that manages the cell broadcast service, and set MAC Address to 0, IP Address to the lab IP address, and Net Mask to 255.255.255.0. Run the SET XPUPORT command. In this step, set Subrack No., Slot No., and Port No. to the subrack number, slot number, and port number of the XPU board that is added through the ADD XPUVLAN command. Set Panel Port Switch to OPEN (Open), and then connect to the port through an Ethernet cable to check whether this IP address of this port can be pinged. Run the ADD GCBSADDR command. In this step, set CBC INDEX to 0 and OP INDEX SET to the ID of the operator whose cell is to be verified. Set Subrack No., Slot No., CPU NO, and BSC IP to those of the XPU board added by the ADD XPUVLAN command. Set BSC Port to 5000, BSC GateWay IP to the gateway IP address of the lab, CBC IP to the IP address of the CBC, Mask to 255.255.255.0, CBC Port to 6000, and If CB Shake Hand to YES(Yes). Run the SET GTRXCHAN command. In this step, set TRX ID to the index of the BCCH TRX in the cell, Channel No. to 0, and Channel Type to BCCH_CBCH (BCCH+CBCH). Add the settings of the BSC, cell, channel, and user at the CBC side, and divide cells into different cell groups. Enable the BSC-CBC interface tracing task when using an MS with the CBC function enabled to connect to the network in different cells, and check whether the CBCH Query message and its response can be traced. Add the message Select Channel 0 on the CBC side, and set the same channel on the MS side (the configuration procedure depends on the MS brand). Set the priority to Normal (1), number of broadcast services to 6, broadcast interval to 10s, coding scheme to English, content of the message to "Happy new year". Send this message to the MSs in the cells. Then, enable the BSC-CBC tracing task and Abis interface tracing task on the LMT, and check whether the Write/Replace message and Report message are traced on the BSC-CBC trace window, whether the SMS Broadcast Command message is traced on the Abis interface, and whether the MS can receive the "Happy new year" message correctly. Run the MOD GCNOPERATOR command to set Support Cell Broadcast to NOTSPPRTBC(NotSupport CB).
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
----End
8.80.2 Configuring Simplified Cell Broadcast

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature GBFD-113602 Simplified Cell Broadcast.
Prerequisite
l l
The license is activated. The XPUa board is configured and works normally.
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
Context
A license is required to activate simplified cell broadcast. The simplified cell broadcast provides the simplified cell broadcast services without the CBC system.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the MOD GCNOPERATOR command to modify the attributes of a GSM operator. In this step, set Support Cell Broadcast to SPPRTSIMPLE (SupportSimple CB). Run the SET GTRXCHAN command. In this step, set the type of CBCH supported by the cell. Run the SET GCELLSBC command. In this step, set Support Cell Broadcast Name to YES(Yes). Run the ADD GSMSCB command to add information about the simplified cell broadcast. Run the MOD GCNOPERATOR command. In this step, set Operator Index to the ID of the operator whose cell is to be verified, and Support Cell Broadcast to SPPRTSIMPLE(SupportSimple CB). Run the SET GTRXCHAN command. In this step, set TRX ID to the index of the BCCH TRX in the test cell, Channel No. to 0, and Channel Type to BCCH_CBCH (BCCH+CBCH). Run the SET GCELLSBC command. In this step, set Cell Index to the index of the test cell, Support Cell Broadcast Name to YES(Yes), Chan ID to 0, and Broadcast Content to Welcome. Enable the Abis interface signaling tracing task on the LMT, set the same channel (Channel 0) on the MS side as that on the CBC side (the setting procedure depends on the MS brand), and then check whether the SMS Broadcast Common message can be traced over the Abis interface and whether the MS can receive the "Welcome" message correctly. Run the SET GCELLSBC command. In this step, set Cell Index to the index of the cell to be verified, and Support Cell Broadcast Name to NO(No). Enable the Abis interface signaling tracing task on the LMT, and check that the SMS Broadcast Common message cannot be traced over the Abis interface. Run the ADD GSMSCB command. In this step, set Cell Index List to the index of the test cell, Geography Scope to LAC_CI(CELL IMME), Code to 1, Update to 0, Chan ID to 0, Coding Scheme to ENGLISH(English), Content of Message to Better City Better Life, Repeat to 60, and Broadcast Interval to 60. Specify Start Time and End Time. Enable the Abis interface signaling tracing task on the LMT, and set the same channel (Channel 0) on the MS side as that on the CBC side (the setting procedure depends on the MS brand), and then to check whether the SMS Broadcast Command message is traced over the Abis interface and whether the MS can receive the "Better City Better Life" message correctly.
2. 3. 4. l
2.
3.
4.
5.
8-152
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)

NOTE
l l
Start Time set through the ADD GSMSCB command must be later than the real time of the OMU. To ensure that the simple broadcast message can be transmitted for 60 times, the interval from Start Time to End Time must be greater than one hour.
Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the MOD GCNOPERATOR command to set Support Cell Broadcast to NOTSPPRTBC(NotSupport CB).
----End
8.81 Configuring Automatic Level Control (ALC)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature GBFD-115601 Automatic Level Control (ALC).
Prerequisite
l l l
The license is activated. A over TDM is applied. TFO Option Switch for all the DSPs on the tested DPU board is set to OFF(Off) through the SET TCPARA command. Support TFO Codec Optimize of the test cell is set to NO(Not Support) through the SET BSCBASIC command. TFO Switch of the test cell is set to DISABLE(Disable) through the SET GCELLBASICPARA command.
Context
With the ALC function, the gain of the digital voice signals on the uplink and downlink is adjusted every 20 ms, and the amplitude of the digital voice signals is changed statically or dynamically. This keeps the voice level of the entire network in a defined state, thus preventing the interference to a call due to the volume fluctuation of the two parties involved in the call.
Procedure
Set ALC Mode to FIXEDLEVEL(Fixed level mode). To do so, run the SET TCPARA command. In this step, set ALC Switch to OPEN (Open), ALC Mode to FIXEDLEVEL(Fixed level mode), and ALC Fix Target Level to its recommended value.
NOTE
If DSP No. is not specified, the attributes of all the DSPs are set. To increase the acoustic volume, set ALC Fix Target Level to -4; to decrease the acoustic volume, set ALC Fix Target Level to -23.
SetALC Mode to FIXEDGAIN(Fixed gain mode). To do so, run the SET TCPARA command. In this step, set ALC Switch to OPEN (Open), ALC Mode to FIXEDGAIN(Fixed gain mode), and ALC Fix Gain to its recommended value.
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
8-153

NOTE
To increase the acoustic volume, set ALC Fix Gain to 12; to decrease the acoustic volume, set ALC Fix Gain to 3.
SetALC Mode to ADAPTIVE(Adaptive mode). To do so, run the SET TCPARA command. In this step, set ALC Switch to OPEN (Open) and ALC Mode to ADAPTIVE(Adaptive mode). In addition, set ALC Max Target Level and ALC Min Target Level to their recommended values.
Verification Procedure Assume that ALC Mode is set to FIXEDGAIN(Fixed gain mode). 1. Run the SET TCPARA command. In this step, set ALC Switch of all the DSPs on the tested DPU board to OPEN(Open), ALC Mode to FIXEDGAIN(Fixed gain mode), and ALC Fix Gain to 0. In the same cell, use MS 1 to make a call to MS 2 with a normal voice. Then, hang up the phone. Run the SET TCPARA command. In this step, set ALC Switch of all the DSPs on the tested DPU board to OPEN(Open), ALC Mode to FIXEDGAIN(Fixed gain mode), and ALC Fix Gain to 12. Run the LST TCPARA command to check whether all the parameters set in step Step 3 are listed. If all the parameters are listed, the previous commands are executed successfully. Use MS 1 to make a call to MS 2 again with a normal voice. The volume of the heard voice increases.
NOTE
2. 3.
4.
5.
The previous steps are performed when ALC Mode is set to FIXEDGAIN(Fixed gain mode). Similar steps are required when ALC Mode is set to FIXEDGAIN(Fixed gain mode) or ADAPTIVE(Adaptive mode).
Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the SET TCPARA command. In this step, set ALC Switch to OFF(Off).
----End
8.82 Configuring Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature GBFD-115602 Acoustic Echo Cancellation(AEC).
Prerequisite
l l l
The license is activated. A over TDM is applied. TFO Option Switch for all the DSPs on the tested DPU board is set to OFF(Off) through the SET TCPARA command. Support TFO Codec Optimize of the test cell is set to NO(Not Support) through the SET BSCBASIC command. TFO Switch of the test cell is set to DISABLE(Disable) through the SET GCELLBASICPARA command. Two MSs that are easy to generate acoustic echo are ready.
8-154

NOTE
The echo is easily generated when a common MS enabled with the handsfree function is placed in a sealing box.
Context
TFO and AEC cannot be used together. The AEC helps reduce the acoustic echo caused by the terminal, thus improving the speech quality. Acoustic echo is generated when the MS speaker is not completely isolated from the MS receiver. After the voice of one party (suppose Party A) reaches the MS, some voice is transmitted back to Party A through the receiver. Then, Party A can hear his/her own voice. The phenomena is known as acoustic echo. AEC is a function with which acoustic echoes can be pre-assessed and eliminated by means of the analysis on forward and backward voice signals.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. l Run the SET TCPARA command. In this step, set AEC Switch to OPEN(Open) and other parameters to their default values. Run the SET TCPARA command. In this step, set AEC Switch to CLOSE(Close) and other parameters to their default values. Use one test MS (MS1) to make a call to another test MS (MS2), check that acoustic echo occurs, and then hand off the call. Run the SET TCPARA command. In this step, set AEC Switch of the DPU board on the tested BSC to OPEN(Open) and other parameters to their default values. Run the LST TCPARA command to check whether all the parameters set in step Step 3 are listed. If all the parameters are listed, the previous commands are executed successfully. Use MS1 to make a call to MS2 again, and check whether acoustic echoes are reduced. If the echoes are reduced, finish the verification. If the echoes are not reduced, hand off the call and then run the SET TCPARA command. In this step, set AEC Echo Return Loss to a smaller value. If AEC Echo Return Loss is set to the smallest value, set AEC Echo Path Delay to a greater value. Repeat step Step 5 to check whether the echoes are reduced.
NOTE
Verification Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4.
5.
l l
The acoustic echo is generated between MSs. The echo generated between an MS and a fixedline phone is termed the electric echo. The electric echo problem is solved by the CN side. When satellite transmission on the Abis or Ater interface is required, AEC Path Delay must be set, so as to eliminate the extra delay caused by satellite transmission.
Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the SET TCPARA command. In this step, set AEC Switch to OFF(Off).
----End
8.83 Configuring the ANR

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature GBFD-115603 automatic noise restraint (ANR).
Prerequisite
l l
The license is activated. Configuration The TDM transmission is applied over the A interface. Verification

Run the SET TCPARA command. In this step, TFO Option Switch to OFF(off). Support TFO Codec Optimize is for the cell to be verified is set to NO(Not Support) by running the SET BSCBASIC command. TFO Switch for the cell to be verified is set to DISABLE(Disable) by running the SET GCELLBASICPARA command.
Context
ANR reduces the background noise in the uplink speech signals and improves the SNR and speech intelligibility. Thus, the voice is clear at the peer end.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the SET TCPARA command. In this step, set ANR Switch to OPEN(Open).
NOTE
TFO and ANR cannot be used together.
Verification Procedure 1. 2. Run the SET TCPARA command. In this step, set ANR Switch for all the DSPs on the DPU board to be tested to CLOSE(Close). Ensure that two test MSs (MS1 and MS2) are in the same cell. Use MS1 to make a call to MS2 in a noisy environment. Check that great background noises can be heard through the MS2, and then hand off the call. Run the SET TCPARA command. In this step, set ANR Switch for all the DSPs on the DPU board to be tested to OPEN(Open). Run the LST TCPARA command to check whether all the parameters set in step Step 3 are listed. If all the parameters are listed, this command is executed successfully. Use MS1 to make a call to MS2 again. Speak at the normal volume on MS1, and check that the background noises heard through MS2 are reduced. Run the SET TCPARA command. In this step, set ANR Switch for all the DSPs on the DPU board to be tested to CLOSE(Close).
3. 4.
5. l
----End
8.84 Configuring TFO

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature GBFD-115701 Tandem Free Operation (TFO).
Prerequisite
l l
A License is activated. Configuration A over TDM is applied. Verification Run the SET GCELLCCACCESS command. In this step, set Speech Version of a cell to FULL_RATE_VER1(Full-rate VER 1).
NOTE
When FULL_RATE_VER1(Full-rate VER 1) is selected, two test MSs can use the same FR coding scheme. This ensures the implementation of TFO.
Context
NOTE
TFO cannot be used together with ALC, ANR, and AEC.
The TFO improves the speech quality by passing one encoding and decoding process. The speech quality is improved without the codec that may cause signal loss. With TFO enabled, the TFO frame is inserted into the PCM stream and speech frames are transparently transmitted when the same codec algorithm is used on both MSs in a call. In this way, one codec is eliminated.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. l Run the SET GCELLBASICPARA command. In this step, set TFO Switch to ENABLE(Enable). Run the SET GCELLCCACCESS command. In this step, set Speech Version of a cell to FULL_RATE_VER1(Full-rate VER 1). Run the SET GCELLBASICPARA command. In this step, set TFO Switch to DISABLE(Disable). Use MS1 and MS2 to access the test cell , and make a call from MS1 to MS2. Run the DSP CALLRES command. In this step, set User Identity Type to BYMSISDN(By MSISDN), MSISDN to the ISDNs of MS1 and MS2. Check whether Tfo State is TFO not start in the result area. Hand off the call. Run the SET GCELLBASICPARA command. In this step, set TFO Switch to ENABLE(Enable). Make a call from MS1 to MS2 again. Run the DSP CALLRES command. In this step, set User Identity Type to BYMSISDN(By MSISDN), MSISDN to the ISDNs of MS1 and MS2. Check whether
5. 6. 7. 8.
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
Tfo State is TFO immediate success in the result area. If Tfo State is TFO immediate success and the speech quality is improved, TFO is configured successfully.
NOTE
Ensure that an inter-BSC or inter-cell handover for the MSs is not performed during the call when verifying TFO. This is because the DSP CALLRES command cannot be executed in such a handover.
Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the SET GCELLBASICPARA command. In this step, set TFO Switch to DISABLE(Disable).
----End
8.85 Configuring Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature GBFD-115703 Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC) on the DPUa/DPUb/DPUc board.
Prerequisite
l l
A over TDM is applied. The DPUa/DPUb/DPUc board starts normally.
Context
A license is required to activate ANC.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. 3. l 1. 2. l Run the SET TCPARA command. In this step, set ANC Switch to ON(On). Set ANC Target SNR to its recommended value. Set ANC Max Gain to its recommended value. Run the LST TCPARA command. In this step, specify Subrack No. and Slot No.. In the results returned from the LMT, check the values of ANC Switch (the value On indicates that the feature is enabled), ANC Target SNR, and ANC Max Gain. Run the SET TCPARA command. In this step, set ANC Switch to OFF(Off).
----End
8.86 Configuring Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature GBFD-115704 Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC).
Prerequisite
l l
The site is functional. The Mean Opinion Score (MOS) test tool, for example, DSLA, is available for verifying EPLC. This feature can be enabled only when the AMR feature is enabled. A license is required to implement EPLC.
l l
Context
With this feature, the frames of the lost packets can be recovered and compensated. This, to a certain extent, solves the problem of speech frame loss during transmission and in a poor radio environment. Thus, the speech quality is improved, the user satisfaction is improved, and a network with enhanced performance is provided. In the case of packet loss of different severity levels, the MOS can be increased by 0.1 to 0.2.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. l Run the SET TCPARA command. In this step, set EPLC Switch to ON(On). All other parameters remain unchanged. Run the LST GCELLCCAMR command to check the values of AMR ACS[F] and AMR ACS[H]. The expected result: One to four coding rates in AMR ACS (F) and AMR ACS (H) are displayed. 2. 3. Run the SET TCPARA command. In this step, set EPLC Switch to OFF(Off). All other parameters remain unchanged. Run the LST TCPARA command to check the configuration information about the TC DSP. The expected result: The command is successfully executed. The value of EPLC Switch is OFF(Off). 4. In the case that only one DPU board is configured, run the SET FHO command to manually hand over the MS to another cell. Record the MOS value of the voice quality during the handover. Run the SET TCPARA command. In this step, set EPLC Switch to ON(On). All other parameters remain unchanged. Run the LST TCPARA command to check the configuration information about the TC DSP. The expected result: The command is successfully executed. The value of EPLC Switch is ON(On). 7. 8. Run the SET FHO command to manually hand over the MS to another cell. Record the MOS value of the voice quality during the handover. Compare the MOS value recorded in Step 7 and Step 4. The expected result: The command is successfully executed. The recorded MOS value recorded in Step 7 is higher than the MOS value recorded in Step 4. l
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
5. 6.
1. ----End
Run the SET TCPARA command. In this step, set EPLC Switch to OFF(Off). All other parameters remain unchanged.
8.87 Configuring the Voice Quality Index

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116801 Voice Quality Index.
Prerequisite
The BTS that controls the cell support downlink VQI.
Context
Downlink VQI and related counters are added to facilitate the evaluation on the downlink speech quality.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the SET GCELLSOFT command. In this step, set Report Downlink VQI Allowed to ENABLE(Enable).
NOTE
VQI is recorded in a measurement report during a voice service only when Report Downlink VQI Allowed is set. When the MS does not support enhanced measurement reports or Measurement Report Type is not set to EnhMeasReport(Enhanced Measurement Report), VQI is 255.
Verification Procedure 1. Run the SET GCELLSOFT command. In this step, set Cell Index to the index of the cell to be verified, and Report Downlink VQI Allowed to ENABLE(Enable). Perform the voice service test, and check whether the value of VQI in the measurement report is 255 (invalid value). Run the SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS command. In this step, set Cell Index to the index of the cell to be verified, and Measurement Report Type to EnhMeasReport (Enhanced Measurement Report).
NOTE
2.
You need to configure a 2G neighboring cell if no enhanced measurement report is obtained when the MS support enhance measurement reports.
3.
Run the SET GCELLCCACCESS command. In this step, set Speech Version to the speech version that matches the channel of different types. Voice version includes versions 1 to 3 for FR\HR\EFR\HAMR\FAMR respectively. Perform the voice service test, and check whether the value of VQI in the measurement report is a valid value. Run the SET GCELLHOCTRL command. In this step, set MR.Preprocessing to BTS_Preprocessing(BTS preprocessing), and set Sent Freq.of preprocessed MR based on site requirements. Perform the voice service test, and check the value of VQI.
4.
l
8-160
1. ----End
Run the SET GCELLSOFT command. In this step, set Report Downlink VQI Allowed to DISABLE(disable).
8.88 Configuring of Enhanced Measurement Report

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117501 Configuring of Enhanced Measurement Report.
Prerequisite
The cell is configured with 2G neighboring cells and supports enhanced measurement report (EMR).
Context
EMR is a new downlink measurement report available from R99. Measurement results, such as Bit Error Probability (BEP) and Frame Erase Ratio (FER), are added to an EMR. This improves the performance of power control algorithm and handover algorithm. This function brings the following benefits:
l
The capability of monitoring voice quality is improved, and the performance of power control algorithm and handover algorithm is improved as well. As many as 15 3G neighboring cells can be configured with EMR. This provides a better performance of interoperability between the GSM/WCDMA/TD-SCDMA systems.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. l Run the SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS command. In this step, specify the test cell as cell 0 and set Measurement Report Type to EnhMeasReport.
Verification Procedure Assume that cell 0 and cell 1 are 2G neighboring cells. 1. 2. Use the test MS to make a cell in cell 0. Query the result of the RSL message tracing over the Abis interface. The expected result: The call is established successfully and the voice quality is good. An EMR on RSL messages over the Abis interface is reported.
NOTE
A common MR is reported if the MS does not support EMR.
Deactivation Procedure 1. 2. Run the SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS command. In this step, specify the test cell as cell 0 and set Measurement Report Type to ComMeasReport. Run the LST GCELLCCUTRANSYS command. In this step, specify the test cell as cell 0 and set Measurement Report Type to ComMeasReport. The expected result: Measurement Report Type is set to ComMeasReport.
----End
8.89 Configuring Dynamic HRFR Adaptation

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115522 Dynamic HR/FR Adaptation.
Prerequisite
l l
The license for this feature is activated. The cell is enabled with HR function.
Context
Dynamic HR/FR Adaptation is a function based on which dynamic adjustment of TCHH/TCHF resources is performed on the call that is established.
l
When TCH resources are sufficient, the call that occupies a TCHH and whose transmission quality is bad is handed over a TCHF to improve voice quality. When TCH resources are insufficient, the call that occupies a TCHF and whose transmission quality is good is handed over a TCHH to increase cell capacity.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command. In this step, set Intracell HO Allowed to YES(Yes), Current HO CTRL Algorithm in Source Cell to HOALGORITHM2(Handover algorithm II), and AMR F-H Ho Allowed to YES (Yes). Configuring Dynamic TCHF-to-TCHH Handover 1. 2. Run the SET GCELLCCACCESS command. In this step, set Speech Version to all the speech versions. Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command. In this step, setAMR F-H Traffic Threshold to 0, AMR F-H Ho Qual. Threshold to 7, AMR F-H Ho Pathloss Threshold to 255, and AMR F-H Ho ATCB Threshold to 0. Trace the BSSAP message on the A interface and Trace the RSL message on the Abis interface. Use the UE to make a cell in cell 0. View the BSSAP messages traced over the A interface and RSL messages traced over the Abis interface. The expected result: The call is established successfully and the voice quality is good. The speech version FAMR is used when the call is set up. During the call, the speech version switches to HAMR. Handover Detection and Handover Complete message are traced over the Abis interface.
3. 4. 5.
Configuring Dynamic TCHH-to-TCHF Handover 1. Run the SET GCELLCCACCESS command. In this step, set Speech Version to all the speech versions.
8-162
2.
Run the SET GCELLCHMGAD command. In this step, set AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed to ON(On), AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold to 0, and TCH Traffic Busy Threshold to 0. Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command. In this step, set AMR H-F Traffic Threshold to 100, AMR H-F Ho Qual. Threshold to 0, AMR H-F Ho Pathloss Threshold to 0, and AMR H-F Ho ATCB Threshold to 255. Trace the BSSAP message on the A interface and Trace the RSL message on the Abis interface. Use the UE to make a cell in cell 0. View the BSSAP messages traced over the A interface and RSL messages traced over the Abis interface. The expected result: The call is established successfully and the voice quality is good. The speech version HAMR is used when the call is set up. During the call, the speech version switches to FAMR. Handover Detection and Handover Complete message are traced over the Abis interface.
3.
4. 5. 6.
Deactivation Procedure 1. 2. Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command. In this step, set AMR F-H Ho Allowed to NO(No). Run the LST GCELLHOBASIC command to view the value of AMR F-H Ho Allowed. The expected result: AMR F-H Ho Allowed is set to NO(No).
----End
8.90 Configuring AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115506 AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment.
Prerequisite
l
The test BTS supports AMR coding rate threshold adaptive adjustment. The BTS3006C/ BTS3002E/BTS3012/BTS3012AE that is configured with non-optimized DTRUs does not support this feature. An MOS tester and a vehicle for drive test are ready. The features that this feature depends on are configured. Downlink AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment depends on the feature GBFD-117501 Enhanced Measurement Report (EMR). The license for this feature is activated.
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
8-163
Context
AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment is a function based on which the target voice quality of the network is set and the coding rate threshold is adjusted adaptively, so that a proper coding rate is selected for the AMR speech service and thus to gain optimal AMR voice quality. AMR coding rate threshold adaptive adjustment, which is uplink/downlink specific, brings the following benefits:
l l
A proper coding rate is selected for the AMR speech service. Optimal AMR voice quality is gained.
Procedure
l Activating the Uplink AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment function 1. l Run the SET GCELLCCAMR command. In this step, set AMR Uplink Adaptive Threshold Allowed to YES(Yes).
Verifying the Uplink AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment function Select a test BTS. Assume that the coverage of the test BTS is continuous. Select a test path from the area that the test cell covers. The downlink level that ranges from -50 dBm to -110 dBm, is evenly distributed on the test path. 1. Run the SET GCELLCCACCESS command. In this step, set Speech Version to FULL_RATE_VER3(Full-rate VER 3) and HALF_RATE_VER3(Half-rate VER 3). Run the SET GCELLCCAMR command. In this step, set AMR Uplink Adaptive Threshold Allowed to YES(Yes). Connect the MOS tester to the test MS. Use the test MS to make a call, and then perform a drive test on the test path.
NOTE
2. 3.
The recommended distance of the test path is 1-2 km. The recommended speed of the drive test vehicle is 20 km/h. It is recommended that the drive test be performed three times (three come-andgoes). Record the MOSs and calculate the average MOS.
4. 5. 6.
Run the SET GCELLCCAMR command. In this step, set AMR Uplink Adaptive Threshold Allowed to NO(No). Repeat Step 3. Based on the data recorded in Step 3 and Step 5, compare the speech quality obtained when AMR Uplink Adaptive Threshold Allowed is set to YES(Yes) with the speech quality obtained when AMR Uplink Adaptive Threshold Allowed is set toNO (No). The expected result: The MOS obtained when AMR Uplink Adaptive Threshold Allowed is set to YES(Yes) is higher than the MOS obtained when AMR Uplink Adaptive Threshold Allowed is set toNO(No).
Deactivating the Uplink AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment function 1. 2. Run the SET GCELLCCAMR command. In this step, set AMR Uplink Adaptive Threshold Allowed to NO(No). Run the LST GCELLCCAMR command to query the value of AMR Uplink Adaptive Threshold Allowed.
8-164
The expected result: The value of AMR Uplink Adaptive Threshold Allowed is NO (No). l Activating the Downlink AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment function 1. Run the SET GCELLCCAMR command. In this step, set AMR Downlink Adaptive Threshold Allowed to YES(Yes) and Is Ratscch Function Enabled to ENABLE (Enable). Run the SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS command. In this step, set Report Type to Enhanced Measurement Report.
2. l
Verifying the Downlink AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment function Select a test BTS. Assume that the coverage of the test BTS is continuous. Select a test path from the area that the test cell covers. The downlink level that ranges from -50 dBm to -110 dBm, is evenly distributed on the test path. 1. Run the SET GCELLCCACCESS command. In this step, set Speech Version to FULL_RATE_VER3(Full-rate VER 3) and HALF_RATE_VER3(Half-rate VER 3). Run the SET GCELLCCAMR command. In this step, set AMR Downlink Adaptive Threshold Allowed to YES(Yes). Connect the MOS tester to the test MS. Use the test MS to make a call, and then perform a drive test on the test path.
NOTE
2. 3.
The recommended distance of the test path is 1-2 km. The recommended speed of the drive test vehicle is 20 km/h. It is recommended that the drive test be performed three times (three come-andgoes). Record the MOSs and calculate the average MOS.
4. 5. 6.
Run the SET GCELLCCAMR command. In this step, set AMR Downlink Adaptive Threshold Allowed to NO(No). Repeat Step 3. Based on the data recorded in Step 3 and Step 5, compare the speech quality obtained when AMR Downlink Adaptive Threshold Allowed is set to YES(Yes) with the speech quality obtained when AMR Downlink Adaptive Threshold Allowed is set toNO(No). The expected result: The MOS obtained when AMR Downlink Adaptive Threshold Allowed is set to YES(Yes) is higher than the MOS obtained when AMR Downlink Adaptive Threshold Allowed is set toNO(No).
Deactivating the Downlink AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment function 1. 2. Run the SET GCELLCCAMR command. In this step, set AMR Downlink Adaptive Threshold Allowed to NO(No). Run the LST GCELLCCAMR command to query the value of AMR Downlink Adaptive Threshold Allowed. The expected result: The value of AMR Downlink Adaptive Threshold Allowed is NO(No).
----End
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
8-165
8.91 Configuring the WB AMR

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115507 WB AMR.
Prerequisite
l l l l
The license is activated. The core network supports the WB AMR. The type of the BTS is BTS3900. The MS supports the WB AMR.
Context
A license is required to implement the WB AMR. In the recommendation P862.2, the MOS value is increased greatly. If the WB AMR is activated, the processing capability of the DSP is reduced. Each DSP supports a maximum of 30 WB AMR calls at the same time. Table 8-6 lists the number of WB AMR calls supported by each DSP in various scenarios. Table 8-6 Number of WB AMR calls supported by each DSP in various scenarios Mode BM Subrack (BM/TC Separated) 170 TC Subrack (BM/TC Separated) 30 BM Subrack (BM/TC Remote) 170 TC Subrack (BM/TC Remote) 30 BM/TC Combined (A over IP) 170 BM/TC Combined (A over TDM) 30
Number of Calls
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. Run the SET BSCBASIC command. In this step, set A Interface Tag, Um Interface Tag , and Abis Interface Tag to GSM_PHASE_2Plus. Run the SET GCELLCCACCESS command to set the access control parameters of the cell as required.
NOTE
When setting Speech Version, select FULL_RATE_VER5(Full-rate VER 5), as well as the default speech versions.
3.
Run the SET GCELLCCAMR command to set the call control AMR parameters of the cell. The call control AMR parameters are AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1 [WB], AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th2[WB], AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1 [WB], AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1[WB], AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1 [WB], AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th2[WB], AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1 [WB], and AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst2[WB].
8-166

NOTE
For cells with good Um interface quality, the value of the coding rate adjustment threshold should be relatively low. In this way, the rate can be adjusted to a higher rate more easily. If the value of the coding rate adjustment threshold is high, the low rate coding mode should be used to improve the robustness on the Um interface. The lower the coding rate hysteresis is, the more frequent the rate adjustment is. The higher the coding rate hysteresis is, the more stable the rate is.
Verification Procedure 1. 2. Use two MSs supporting the WB AMR to call each other. Run the DSP CALLRES command to check that Channel Service Type is set to WB_AMR.
Deactivation Procedure No need to deactivate.
----End
8.92 Configuring Streaming QoS(GBR)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119901 Streaming QoS(GBR).
Prerequisite
l l l
The cell supports PS services. The MS and SGSN support the PFM procedures and R99 QoS. The cell is configured with static PDCHs.
Context
In the case of streaming class, the BSC allocates radio blocks to users according to the GBR of the QoS attributes and ensures that the data transmission rates meet the requirements of streaming class. If streaming services support resource preemption, high-priority streaming services can preempt the radio blocks of low-priority streaming services when radio resources are insufficient. This ensures that high-priority services can preferentially use radio resources. If streaming services do not support resource preemption, the GBRs are decreased; when radio resources become sufficient, the GBRs are restored to the negotiated values. When the BSC needs to decrease or restore GBRs, it requests the SGSN to modify the GBRs through the PFM procedures.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA command. In this step, set Support GBR QoS to YES(Support). If you plan to enable the streaming services to preempt PDCHs, set Preempt Switch of Streaming Resource to ON(ON). Run the MOD NSE command. In this step, set PFC Support to YES(Support).
2.
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
3.
On the SGSN side, enable network service entity (NSE) to support PFC. If you plan to enable the streaming services to preempt PDCHs, ensure that the NSE contains ARP IE in the system information. Run the RST SIGBVC command to reset the SIGBVC to ensure that the status of NSE on the CN side is consistent with that on the NE side. Enable Um Interface PS Trace and view the PSI13 message. The expected result: The value of pfc-feature-mode in the PSI13 message is 1. Enable Gb Interface PTP Trace. Perform PDP context activation on the MS whose registration type is streaming service. The expected result: Signaling such as CREATE BSS PFC and CREATE BSS PFC ACK are in the trace messages. Use the MS whose registration type is streaming service and the MSs whose registration types are interactive service or background service to perform PS services. The MSs share the same channel group. The expected result: For the MS whose registration type is streaming service, the BSS assigns resources according to the registered GBR. The other MSs share the remaining resources. Use multiple MSs whose registration types are streaming service to perform PS services. The expected result: If the priorities of the MSs are the same, the BSS preferentially assigns resources to the MS that accesses the network earlier. If the priorities are different and resource preemption is supported, the MS with higher priority can preempt the resources of the MS with lower priority.
NOTE
4. l
3.
4.
The information element ARP of the CREATE BSS PFC message over the Gb interface specifies the priority of streaming services and whether resources can be preempted.
Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA command. In this step, set Support GBR QoS to NO(Not Support). and Preempt Switch of Streaming Resource to OFF (OFF). Run the MOD NSE command. In this step, set PFC Support to NO(No Support). The expected result: The value of pfc-feature-mode in the PSI13 message is 0.
2. ----End
8.93 Configuring QoS ARP/THP

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119902 QoS ARP/THP.
Prerequisite
The cell supports PS services.
8-168
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
Context
The BSC allocates the radio resources to MSs according the ARP and THP of the QoS. The higher-priority users enjoy more radio resources and wider radio bandwidth. The BSC maps the R97/R98 QoS to the R99 QoS according to the 3GPP specifications. With this feature, the operator allocates the radio resources according to different service types and user priorities. As a result, the user with higher priority can seize more bandwidth and enjoy higher data rate and better service quality. Interactive services: The BSS allocates the radio resources according to the ARP and THP of the QoS. If the ARPs of the users are the same, the users with higher THP are allocated more radio resources. If the THPs of the users are the same, the users with higher ARP are allocated more radio resources. Background services: The BSS allocates the radio resources according to the ARP of the QoS. The users with higher ARP are allocated more radio resources. For the services that do not support the QoS, the BSS allocates the radio resources in best effort.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. Run the SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA command. In this step, set Support QoS Optimize to YES(Support). Run the SET GCELLPSCHM command. In this step, set the values of THP1ARP1PRIWEIGHT, THP1ARP2PRIWEIGHT, THP1ARP3PRIWEIGHT, THP2ARP1PRIWEIGHT, THP2ARP2PRIWEIGHT, THP2ARP3PRIWEIGHT, THP3ARP1PRIWEIGHT, THP3ARP2PRIWEIGHT, THP3ARP3PRIWEIGHT, BKGARP1PRIWEIGHT, BKGARP2PRIWEIGHT, BKGARP3PRIWEIGHT, BEARP1PRIWEIGHT, BEARP2PRIWEIGHT, and BEARP3PRIWEIGHT according to the bandwidth occupied by the users with different priorities. Use the MSs whose registration types are interactive service or background service to perform PS services. The MSs share the same channel group. The expected result: When the same coding scheme is used, the ratio of the transmission rate of the MSs is similar to the ratio of the weight of THP or ARP. Run the SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA command. In this step, set Support QoS Optimize to NO(Not Support).
----End
8.94 Configuring PS Active Package Management

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119904 PS Active Package Management.
Prerequisite
GPRS/EGPRS is already configured for the cell.
Context
Active queue management (AQM) is an algorithm used to maintain the buffer queue length within an appropriate range by discarding data packets in the buffer queue actively. It increases data throughput and reduces service delay at the price of buffer utilization. AQM is applicable to scenarios in which bandwidth is limited and congestion may occur. AQM not only ensures high link utilization but also reduces the delay of services that require low transfer delay. It also enhances fair utilization of bandwidth among services and increases data throughput. AQM is applicable to interactive services, background services, and BE services (namely, services without QoS requirements). It is not applicable to conversational services or streaming services.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the SET BSCPSSOFTPARA command. In this step, set AQM Switch to OPEN (Open). Set AQM Congestion Threshold, AQM Target Threshold, AQM Maximum Threshold, AQM Packet Discard Initial Interval, AQM Packet Discard Interval Lower Threshold, AQM Packet Discard Interval Upper Threshold, and AQM N Update Interval according to actual network conditions. It is advised that these values be set to recommended values. Use an MS to download a large-sized file (about 2 MB) through FTP. After the download is started, use the MS to download a small-sized file (about 200 KB) through FTP. View the result of downloading the small-sized file. The expected result: When AQM Switch is set to OPEN(Open), the time required to download the small-sized file is reduced, and the rate for downloading the large-sized file is decreased. l Deactivation Procedure 1. 2. ----End Run the SET BSCPSSOFTPARA command. In this step, set AQM Switch to CLOSE(Close). Run the LST BSCPSSOFTPARA command and view the value of AQM Switch. The expected result: The value of AQM Switch is Close.
2.
8.95 Configuring PoC QoS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119905 PoC QoS.
Prerequisite
The cell supports Streaming QoS.
8-170
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
Context
The push to talk over cellular (PoC) service is a type of group call service implemented on the GSM network. The PoC service adopts the packet switching technology and it is carried on the GPRS/EGPRS networks.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA command. In this step, set POC Support to Support(Support). Set Min. GBR for POC Service, Max. GBR for POC Service, and Transmission Delay of POC Service according to actual situations. Set the registration type of the MS to streaming service. Ensure that the GBR value is between the values of Min. GBR for POC Service and Max. GBR for POC Service. The transfer delay must be smaller than Transmission Delay of POC Service. Use the MS to perform PoC service. The expected result: The PoC result runs properly. 3. Use the MS whose registration type is streaming service and the MSs of other types to perform Ping service. The MSs share the same channel group. The expected result: The Ping delay is smaller after PoC QoS is activated. l Deactivation Procedure 1. ----End Run the SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA command. In this step, set Support GBR QoS to NO(Not Support).
2.
8.96 Configuring NC2

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116201 Network Control Mode 2 (NC2).
Prerequisite
l
Configuration

The license is activated. The cell can be configured to support GPRS in built-in PCU mode. The cell supports the GRPS service or EDGE service. The test cell has a neighboring cell. The serving cell supports NC2 and works properly. The MS supports NC2.
Verification

Context
A license is required to activate NC2.
NC2 can be configured to implement the network-controlled cell reselection for an MS. In NC2 mode, an MS in a cell with poor signal quality or heavy load can reselect a neighboring cell with good signal quality or light load. Compared with the MS-initiated cell reselection, the network-controlled cell reselection considers factors such as the receive level and traffic load of neighboring cells so that the MS can reselect a better cell.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the SET GCELLGPRS command. In this step, set the parameters as follows:

Set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU). Set Support NC2 to YES(Yes).
2. 3. l
Run the SET GCELLPSBASE command. In this step, set Network Control Mode to NC2(NC2). Run the SET GCELLNC2PARA command. In this step, set the thresholds at cell reselection. Run the LST GCELLPSBASE command to query Network Control Mode and ensure that this parameter is set to NC2(NC2). Run the LST GCELLGPRS command to query Support NC2 and ensure that this parameter is set to YES(Yes). Use an MS to perform the GPRS service, and then trace the messages on the Um interface in the originating cell before NC2 cell reselection on the LMT. Check the Packet Cell Change message in the displayed result. Run the SET GCELLGPRS command. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu (Support as built-in PCU) and Support NC2 to NO(No).
----End
8.97 Configuring the NACC

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116301 Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC).
Prerequisite
l
Configuration

The license is activated. The cell supports the GRPS service or EDGE service. The test cell has a neighboring 2G cell. Verification of intra-BSC NACC

Verification
Both the serving cell and the target cell support NACC. The network control modes of both the serving cell and the target cell are set to NC0 or NC1.
8-172

The target cell is a GSM cell. The MS supports NACC. The MS detects signal strength deterioration in the serving cell and detects a neighboring cell with better signal strength. Both the serving cell and the target cell support NACC. The network control modes of both the serving cell and the target cell are set to NC0 or NC1. The target cell is a GSM cell. The MS supports NACC. The MS detects signal strength deterioration in the serving cell and detects a neighboring cell with better signal strength. RIM Support in the NSE assigned to the cell under the BSC is set to Yes. RIM Support in the NSE assigned to the cell under the peer BSC/RNC is set to Yes. RIM Support in the NSE assigned to the SGSN is set to Yes.
Verification of inter-BSC NACC

Context
A license is required to implement NACC. NACC can be configured to accelerate the cell reselection of an MS and shorten the period of service disruption caused by cell reselection. The BSC sends the system information on the neighboring cells to the MS that works in packet transfer mode so that the MS can initiate packet access after cell reselection. After receiving the system information on neighboring cells through the PACCH, the MS that is in packet transfer mode can keep these information for 30s, during which it can attempt to access the neighboring cell according to these system information.
Procedure
Activating intra-BSC NACC 1. 2. Run the SET GCELLPSBASE command. In this step, set Network Control Mode to NC0(NC0) or NC1(NC1). Run the SET GCELLGPRS command. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) or SupportAsExtPcu(Support as external Pcu) as required, and set Support NACC to YES(Yes).
NOTE
To further improve the performance of PS services, the parameter PACKET SI can be set to YES(Yes).
Activating inter-BSC NACC 1. Run the SET GCELLGPRS command. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) or SupportAsExtPcu(Support as external Pcu) as required, and set Support NACC to YES(Yes).
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)

NOTE
To further improve the performance of PS services, the parameter PACKET SI can be set to YES(Yes).
2.
Run the MOD NSE command. In this step, set RIM Support to YES(Support).
NOTE
Both the serving cell and the target cell support RIM. In addition, RIM Support in the NSE assigned to the SGSN is set to Yes.
3. l 1.
Run the RST SIGBVC command to activate RIM.
Verification Procedure Run the SET GCELLGPRS command. In this step, set Support NC2 to NO(No).
NOTE
When Network Control Mode is set to NC2, you are advised to disable NC2 before verification.
2. 3. 4.
Use the MS to originate GPRS services, and monitor the signaling over the Um interface. Ensure that the MS is in the serving cell. Move the MS or increase the power of the target cell to make the receive level of the target cell higher than that of the serving cell. Perform the operations in Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface. After detecting signal strength deterioration in the serving cell and an external neighboring cell with better signal strength, the MS sends the PACKET CELL CHANGE NOTIFICATION message to the BSC. Then, the BSC responds with the PACKET NEIGHBOUR CELL DATA message, which contains the SI1, SI3, and SI13 system information about the target cell. In addition, the BSC sends the PACKET CELL CHANGE CONTINUE message to the MS, instructing the MS to proceed with the cell reselection procedure.
Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the SET GCELLGPRS command. In this step, set Support NACC to NO (No) and ACKET SI to NO(No). Expected result: Support NACC is NO(No), PACKET SI is NO(No). The cell does not support NACC and PACKET SI STATUS.
----End
8.98 Configuring GPRS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114101 GPRS.
Prerequisite
l l l l l
The license is activated. The Pb interface parameters are configured for the cell if the external PCU is used. The Gb interface parameters are configured for the cell if the built-in PCU is used. The PCU is configured to support GPRS if the external PCU is used. The DPU board of the GPCU function type is configured if the built-in PCU is used.
8-174
Context
A license is required to activate the GPRS feature.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the SET GCELLGPRS command.
In the case that the external PCU is used, set GPRS to SupportAsExtPcu(Support as external Pcu). Meanwhile, run the PCU set attr command on the PCU maintenance console to activate GPRS. In the case that the built-in PCU is used, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU).
2. 3. 4. l
Run the SET GTRXCHAN command. In this step, set Channel Type to PDTCH (PDTCH) for at least one channel. Optional: If the BTS transport mode is TDM, run the SET BTSIDLETS command to set the BTS idle timeslots. Optional: If the BTS transport mode is IP, set IPPATH according to 8.117 Configuring the Abis over IP. Use an MS that camps on the serving cell to download or upload data. The expected result: The MS downloads or uploads data successfully.
Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the SET GCELLGPRS command to set GPRS to NO(Not support).
----End
8.99 Configruing Network Operation Mode I

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510001 Network Operation Mode I.
Prerequisite
l
Activation
The Gs interface exists. The Gs interface exists. One dual-mode MS is ready.
Verification

Context
The combination of Network Operation Mode I and Gs interface (the interface between MSC/ VLR and SGSN) supports coordinated paging or CS paging in packet transfer mode.
Procedure
l
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
1. 2. l
Run the SET GCELLGPRS command. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu (Support as built-in PCU). Run the SET GCELLPSBASE command. In this step, set Network Operation Mode to NMOI(Network Operation Mode I). Use the dual-mode MS to perform PING services. The network sends CS paging messages on the PACCH. The expected result: The paging is successful and the call can be made successfully.
Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the SET GCELLPSBASE command. In this step, set Network Operation Mode to any value other than NMOI(Network Operation Mode I).
----End
8.100 Configuring Packet Performance Improvement

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119201 Packet Performance Improvement.
Prerequisite
The license for this feature is activated.
Context
The extended uplink TBF can shorten the transmission delay and reduce the MS power consumption. The 11-bit EGPRS access on the CCCH can improve the access performance of the EDGE MS. The BTS takes over the packet and immediate assignments. This can improve the access performance of the MS and shorten the access delay. For PCU commands, see the Manual of Commands related to the PCU.
NOTE
l l
In external PCU mode, the PCU supports the takeover of the immediate assignment by the BTS and the takeover of the packet assignment by the BTS by default. In external PCU mode, if you need to disable the takeover of the immediate assignment by the BTS, run the pcu cfgpara add<BoardNo>g_bCellSptImmAssDlShift 4 0 command. If you need to disable the takeover of the packet assignment by the BTS, run the pcu cfgpara add<BoardNo>g_bCellSptPackAssDlShift 4 0 command. After running the command, you should reset the cell.
Procedure
Configure the extended uplink TBF.
In external PCU mode, run the PCU add privateoptpara command on the PCU maintenance terminal to set the duration of the inactive period timer to a value greater than 0. To set the duration of the inactive period timer to 2000 ms, run the following command:
8-176
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
pcu add privateoptpara<LCNo> <PSPrecedence><UpTbfRelDelay>2000<DnTbfRelDelay>
In built-in PCU mode, run the SET GCELLPRIVATEOPTPARA command. In this step, set the duration of the inactive period timer to a value greater than 0.
NOTE
Run the SET GCELLPSBASE command. In this step, set EXT_UTBF_NODATA to NOTSEND to reduce the MS power consumption.
Configure the 11-bit EGPRS access on the CCCH.
In external PCU mode, run the PCU set egprspara command on the PCU maintenance terminal to configure the EGPRS access of 11-bit messages on the CCCH for the cell.
To enable the EGPRS access of 11-bit messages on the CCCH for the cell, run the following command: pcu set egprspara<LCNo><LQCMode> <BepPeriod>yes<UpFixMcs><UpDefaultMcs><DnFixMcs><DnDefaultM cs>
To disable the EGPRS access of 11-bit messages on the CCCH for the cell, run the following command: pcu set egprspara<LCNo><LQCMode> <BepPeriod>no<UpFixMcs><UpDefaultMcs><DnFixMcs><DnDefaultMc s>
In built-in PCU mode, run the SET GCELLPSBASE command to enable the EGPRS access of 11-bit messages. In external PCU mode, run the pcu cfgpara add<BoardNo>g_bCellSptImmAssDlShift 4 1 command on the PCU maintenance terminal to configure the takeover of the immediate assignment by the BTS. After running the command, you should reset the cell. In built-in PCU mode, run the SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA command to configure the takeover of the immediate assignment by the BTS. In external PCU mode, run the pcu cfgpara add<BoardNo>g_bCellSptPackAssDlShift 4 1 command on the PCU maintenance terminal to configure the takeover of the packet assignment by the BTS. After running the command, you should reset the cell. In built-in PCU mode, run the SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA command to configure the takeover of the packet assignment by the BTS.
Configure the takeover of the immediate assignment by the BTS.
Configure the takeover of the packet assignment by the BTS.
Verification Procedure 1. Run the LST GCELLPRIVATEOPTPARA command to check whether Inactive Period of Extended Uplink TBF is greater than 0. Use the MS to perform PS services. After transmitting the uplink data to the BSC, the MS does not release the uplink TBF immediately. Instead, it releases the uplink TBF after the duration equal to Inactive Period of Extended Uplink TBF.
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
2. 3.
Use the MS that supports 11-bit EGPRS to perform PS services. The TBF is set up after the BSC receives the phase-one channel request of the 11-bit EGPRS. Use the MS to make a dial-up connection to the network and then to perform the ping function. Enabling Move Immediate Assignment Down to BTS can reduce the first ping delay by 30 to 50 ms, which depends on the transmission over the Abis interface. Use the MS to make a dial-up connection to the network and then to perform the ping function. Enabling Move Packet Assignment Down to BTS can reduce the ping delay by 30 to 50 ms, which depends on the transmission over the Abis interface. Deactivate the extended uplink TBF.
4.
In external PCU mode, run the PCU add privateoptpara command on the PCU maintenance terminal to set the duration of the inactive period timer to 0. In built-in PCU mode, run the SET GCELLPRIVATEOPTPARA command on the LMT to set the duration of the inactive period timer to 0. In external PCU mode, run the PCU set egprspara command on the PCU maintenance terminal to configure the cell not to support the function of 11-bit EGPRS access on the CCCH. In built-in PCU mode, run the SET GCELLPSBASE command on the LMT to set Support 11BIT EGPRS Access to NO(No). In external PCU mode, run the pcu cfgpara add<BoardNo>g_bCellSptImmAssDlShift 4 1 command on the PCU maintenance terminal to configure the cell not to support the takeover of the immediate assignment by the BTS. After running the command, reset the cell. In built-in PCU mode, run the SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA command on the LMT. In this step, set Move Immediate Assignment Down to BTS to NO(No). In external PCU mode, run the pcu cfgpara add<BoardNo>g_bCellSptPackAssDlShift 4 1 command on the PCU maintenance terminal to configure the cell not to support the takeover of packet assignment by the BTS. After running the command, reset the cell. In built-in PCU mode, run the SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA command on the LMT. In this step, set Move Packet Assignment Down to BTS to NO(No).
Deactivate 11-bit EGPRS access on the CCCH.
Deactivate the takeover of immediate assignment by the BTS.
Deactivate the takeover of packet assignment by the BTS.
----End
8.101 Configuring the Feature of Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS Coding
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119204 Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS Coding.
Prerequisite
The cell is configured with EGPRS, and the uplink coding scheme of the cell can be changed.
Context
With this feature, the BSC dynamically adjusts the coding scheme adopted by the PDCH based on the uplink measurement report from the BTS. In this manner, the PDCH coding scheme can quickly adapt to the changes in the radio condition and thus the uplink throughput is increased.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the SET GCELLEGPRSPARA command. In this step, set Support EGPRS Uplink MCS Dynamic Adjust to 2(According to uplink quality measurements reported by BTS). Route downlink BTS signals to the shielding cabinet. After combining the uplink signals and interference source signals, route the combined signals to the receive end of the TRX. Set the interference source frequency to the uplink frequency of the TRX, set the transmit power, and then put the MS in the shielding cabinet. Use the MS to load files through FTP. Trace the result of uplink MCS coding adjustment through the PS Um interface. The expected result: When the interference source power increases, the rate of uplink EGPRS coding scheme decreases.
NOTE
Verification Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
The interference source power cannot be too great. Otherwise, the PS services may fail.
Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the SET GCELLEGPRSPARA command. In this step, set Support EGPRS Uplink MCS Dynamic Adjust to 2(According to uplink quality measurements reported by BTS).
----End
8.102 Configuring Packet Channel Dispatching

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119302 Packet Channel Dispatching.
Prerequisite
l l l l
The PCU type is set to built-in PCU. The cell supports the EGPRS service. An MS that supports only voice service is available. An MS (GPRS MS) that supports only GPRS service is available.
Context
l
The GPRS system uses only the GMSK modulation scheme whereas the EGPRS system uses the GMSK and 8PSK modulation schemes. When EGPRS downlink services and GPRS uplink services use the same packet channel, the EGPRS downlink data blocks with the USF should be used to schedule the GPRS uplink services. In this case, the EGPRS
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
downlink data blocks can use only the GMSK modulation scheme. This greatly affects the downlink throughput of the EGPRS MS. With this feature, the operator can separate the EGPRS service from the GPRS service, thus effectively increasing the downlink throughput of the EGPRS MS.
l
This feature reduces the probability that the EGPRS service and the GPRS service use the same channel, thus increasing the EGPRS service rate, improving the entire network performance, and enhancing the user experience.
8.102.1 Configuring the Feature of EGPRS Special Channel Be Used by Only EGPRS Service This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature EGPRS Special Channel Be Used by Only EGPRS Service. 8.102.2 Configuring EGPRS Preferred Channel This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate EGPRS Preferred Channel. 8.102.3 Configuring Channel Multiplexing in the E Down G Up Scenario This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate channel multiplexing in the E Down G Up scenario.
8.102.1 Configuring the Feature of EGPRS Special Channel Be Used by Only EGPRS Service
This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature EGPRS Special Channel Be Used by Only EGPRS Service.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. 3. Configure an EGPRS TRX for the cell. Run the SET GCELLGPRS command. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu (Support as built-in PCU) and EDGE to YES(Yes) to enable the EGPRS function. Run the SET GTRXCHAN command. In this step, set TRX ID, Channel No., Channel Type, and Timeslot Priority. The expected result: The values of Channel Type of six channels are TCHFR(TCH Full Rate), and the values of Timeslot Priority are EGPRSSPECH(EGPRS Special Channel). 4. l Set Channel Type to PDTCH(PDTCH) and PDCH Channel Priority Type to EGPRSSPECH(EGPRS Special Channel).
NOTE
An MS (GSM MS) that supports only voice service and an MS(GPRS MS) that supports only GPRS service are available.
1. 2. 3.
Monitor the channels used by the MSs. Use the GSM MS to make a voice call in the cell. Attach the GPRS MS to the GPRS network and initiate the PDP activation.
The expected result:

The GSM MS cannot make a voice call in the cell. The GPRS MS cannot be attached to the GPRS network and the PDP activation fails.
8-180
Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the SET GTRXCHAN command. In this step, set Channel Type to PDTCH (PDTCH) and PDCH Channel Priority Type to any value except EGPRSSPECH (EGPRS Special Channel).
----End
8.102.2 Configuring EGPRS Preferred Channel

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate EGPRS Preferred Channel.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. 3. Configure two EGPRS TRXs for the cell. Run the SET GCELLGPRS command. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu (Support as built-in PCU) and EDGE to YES(Yes) to enable the EGPRS function. Run the SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT command. In this step, set TRX ID, Channel No., and Administrative State. The expected result: The values of all Administrative State for all the TCHs on the BCCH TRX are Lock(Lock). 4. Run the SET GTRXCHAN command. In this step, set Channel Type and PDCH Channel Priority Type. The expected result: The values of Channel Type are TCHFR(TCH Full Rate). PDCH Channel Priority Type of four channels is EGPRSPRICH(EGPRS Priority Channel) and PDCH Channel Priority Type of the other four channels is GPRS (GPRS Channel). l Verification Procedure
NOTE
The GPRS MS1 (class10), MS2 (class10), and EGPRS MS1 (class10) are attached to the GPRS cell.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Record the process of configuring devices. EGPRS MS1 activates PDP and starts DL FTP. GPRS MS1 activates PDP and starts DL FTP. GPRS MS2 activates PDP and starts DL FTP. EGPRS MS1 stops DL FTP and releases PDCH. EGPRS MS1 starts DL FTP again after a period of time. Use a drive test tool to record the channels used by the MSs.
After EGPRS MS1 activates PDP for the first time, it starts DL FTP and uses the EGPRS preferred channel. After GPRS MS2 starts DL FTP, it shares packet channels with GPRS MS1. The system does notallocate the EGPRS preferred channel to GPRS MS2. After EGPRS MS1 stops DL FTP and releases PDCH, GPRS MS2 or GPRS MS1 is swiched to the correct channel instead of sharing the PDCH with GPRS MS1. The correct channel is the EGPRS preferred channel used by EGPRS MS1.
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
After EGPRS MS1 starts DL FTP again, GPRS MS2 or GPRS MS1 is switched out of the EGPRS preferred channel and then shares the PDCH with GPRS MS1 or GPRS MS2. The EGPRS preferred channel is allocated to EGPRS MS1 again, and EGPRS MS1 starts DL FTP on the EGPRS preferred channel. Run the SET GTRXCHAN command. In this step, set TRX ID to the index of the EGPRS-capable TRX, Channel Type to TCHFR(TCH Full Rate), and PDCH Channel Priority Type to any value except EGPRSPRICH(EGPRS Priority Channel).
----End
8.102.3 Configuring Channel Multiplexing in the E Down G Up Scenario

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate channel multiplexing in the E Down G Up scenario.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. Configure an EGPRS TRX for the cell. Run the SET GTRXCHAN command. In this step, set TRX ID, Channel No., Channel Type, and Timeslot Priority. The expected result: The values of Channel Type are TCHFR(TCH Full Rate), and the values of Timeslot Priority of at least two channels are EGPRSNORCH(EGPRS Normal Channel). 3. l Run the SET BSCPSSOFTPARA command. In this step, set Allow E Down G Up Switch to CLOSE(Close).
NOTE
Two GPRS MSs (class 8) and one EGPRS MS (class10) are available.
1. 2. 3. 4.
Attach GPRS MS1 to the GPRS network and initiate the PDP activation. GPRS MS1 starts UL FTP and uses an uplink channel. The uplink channels are not used. Attach EGPRS MS1 to the EGPRS network and initiate the PDP activation. EGPRS MS1 starts DL FTP and does not share the channel with GPRS MS1. Attach GPRS MS2 to the GPRS network and initiate the DPD activation. EGPRS MS1 starts UL FTP and share the uplink channel with GPRS MS1. Record the channels used by each MS.
After EGPRS MS1 accesses the cell and starts DL FTP, the uplink channel of GPRS MS1 does not share the channel with the downlink channel of EGPRS MS1. After GPRS MS2 accesses the cell and starts DL FTP, the uplink channel of GPRS MS2 does not share the channel with the downlink channel of EGPRS MS1.
l
8-182
1. ----End
Run the SET BSCPSSOFTPARA command. In this step, set Allow E Down G Up Switch to OPEN(Open).
8.103 Configuring BSS Paging Coordination

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119305 BSS Paging Coordination.
Prerequisite
l
Activation
The Gs interface does not exist. The Gs interface does not exist. One dual-mode MS is ready.
Verification

Context
In the case the Gs interface between the MSC/VLR and SGSN is not configured and the MS is in packet transfer mode, the network can send CS paging messages for a user on the PACCH to enable the user in packet transfer mode to respond to the CS paging.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. 3. l Run the SET GCELLGPRS command. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu (Support as built-in PCU). Run the SET GCELLPSBASE command. In this step, set BSS Paging Coordination to YES(YES). Run the SET BSCPSSOFTPARA command. In this step, set A Interface Paging Co-ordination Switch to OPEN(Open). Use the dual-mode MS to perform PING services. The network sends CS paging messages on the PACCH. The expected result: The paging is successful and the call can be made successfully. Run the SET GCELLPSBASE command. In this step, set BSS Paging Coordination to NO(NO). Run the SET BSCPSSOFTPARA command. In this step, set A Interface Paging Co-ordination Switch to CLOSE(Close).
----End
8.104 Configuring PS Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119502 PS Handover.
Prerequisite
l l l l l
The license is activated. The MS supports the PS handover. The SGSN supports the PS handover. The BSC and SGSN support the PFC procedure. The system is configured with UMTS neighboring cells.
Context
A license is required to activate PS handover. After an NSE is configured to support the PS handover, all the cells related to this NSE support the PS handover. This helps to reduce the service disruption interval when the MS in a cell reselects another cell. After the incoming inter-RAT inter-cell PS handover is supported, the MS handling the PS service can be handed over from the UMTS cell to the GSM cell. This helps to reduce the service disruption interval. After the outgoing inter-RAT inter-cell PS handover is supported, the MS handling the PS service can be handed over from the GSM cell to the UMTS cell. This helps to reduce the service disruption interval.
Procedure
Activate the PS handover on the NSE. 1. 2. Run the MOD NSE command. In this step, set Handover Support to YES (Support). Run the RST SIGBVC command to reset the SIGBVC. Run the SET GCELLGPRS command. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support In Inter-RAT Intercell PS Handover to SUPPORT(Support). Run the SET GCELLGPRS command. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support Out Inter-RAT Inter-Cell PS Handover to SUPPORT(Not Support).
Activate the incoming inter-RAT inter-cell PS handover in the cell. 1.
Activate the outgoing inter-RAT inter-cell PS handover in the cell. 1.
Verify that the NSE supports the PS handover. 1. 2. On the LMT, start the SIG message tracing over the Gb interface. Run the RST SIGBVC command to reset the SIGBVC.
Expected result: In the BVC-RESET message, the PS Handover carried in the Extended Feature Bitmap is 1.
Verify that the cell supports the incoming inter-RAT inter-cell PS handover. 1. On the LMT, start the PTP message tracing over the Gb interface.
8-184
2. 3.
The network conditions for the MS handover from a UMTS cell to the local GSM cell are met, and the PS handover request is initiated. Expected result: The message PS Handover Request carries the IE Source RNC Identifier. In addition, the message PS Handover Request Ack from the BSC can be viewed. On the LMT, start the PTP message tracing over the Gb interface. The network conditions for the MS handover from a GSM cell to a UMTS cell are met, and the PS handover request is initiated.
Verify that the cell supports the outgoing inter-RAT inter-cell PS handover. 1. 2.
Expected result: The message PS Handover Required carries the IE Target RNC Identifier. l Deactivation Procedure
Deactivate the incoming inter-RAT inter-cell PS handover in the cell. 1. Run the SET GCELLGPRS command. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support In Inter-RAT Intercell PS Handover to UNSUPPORT(Not Support). Run the SET GCELLGPRS command. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support Out Inter-RAT Inter-Cell PS Handover to UNSUPPORT(Not Support).
Deactivate the outgoing inter-RAT inter-cell PS handover in the cell. 1.
----End
8.105 Configuring EDA

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119401 Extended Dynamic Allocation (EDA).
Prerequisite
The cell is configured to support GPRS/EGPRS. For detailed operations, see the SET GCELLGPRS command.
Context
Generally, the GPRS/EGPRS traffic is higher in downlink than in uplink. In some specific situations (for example, sending large size email through the GPRS/EGPRS network), however, the requirement on uplink bandwidth is stricter. The EDA feature can allocate three or more timeslots for an MS in the uplink. If the high multislot class is supported, five timeslots can be allocated to the MS of high multislot class 34 in the uplink, thus meeting the requirement for higher bandwidth in the uplink. The use of the EDA feature needs the support from the MS. In the radio access capability reported to the network, the MS indicates whether it supports GPRS uplink EDA or EGRPS uplink EDA.
Procedure
l
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
1. l
Run the SET BSCPSSOFTPARA command. In this step, set Support EDA to SUPPORT(Support). Start the Gb Interface PTP Trace window on the LMT and use the MS to dial a number (activate PDP context). The expected result: Check in the ACTIVE PDP CONTEXT ACCEPT message that the value of gprs-extended-dynamic-allocation-capability is 1or the value of egprsextended-dynamic-alloccation is 1.
2. 3. 4. 5.
Run the SET BSCPSSOFTPARA command. In this step, set Support EDA to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support). Run the LST BSCPSSOFTPARA command to check the value of Support EDA. The expected result: The value of Support EDA is Not Support. Use the MS to perform FTP uploading services. Record the uploading speed and the number of PDCHs occupied by the MS.
NOTE
If the cell has only one MS, run the DSP PDCH command to check number of PDCHs with the Number of Uplink TBFs (GPRS) or Number of Uplink TBFs (EGPRS) being 1 and record the result.
6. 7. 8. 9.
Run the SET BSCPSSOFTPARA command. In this step, set Support EDA to SUPPORT(Support). Run the LST BSCPSSOFTPARA command to check the value of Support EDA. The expected result: The value of Support EDA is Support. Use the MS to perform FTP uploading services. Record the uploading speed and the number of PDCHs occupied by the MS. Then, compare the results obtained in Step 5 and Step 9. The expected result: As recorded in Step 9, the number of PDCHs occupied by the MS is greater than or equal to 3, and the uploading speed is improved to a great extent than that recorded in Step 5.
NOTE
If the cell has only one MS, run the DSP PDCH command to check number of PDCHs with the Number of Uplink TBFs (GPRS) or Number of Uplink TBFs (EGPRS) being 1 and record the result.
Deactivation Procedure 1. 2. Run the SET BSCPSSOFTPARA command. In this step, set Support EDA to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support). Run the LST BSCPSSOFTPARA command to check the value of Support EDA. The expected result: The value of Support EDA is Not Support.
----End
8-186
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
8.106 Configuring PDCH Dynamic Adjustment with Two Thresholds

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature GBFD-119505 PDCH Dynamic Adjustment with Two Thresholds.
Prerequisite
l l
The cell supports the GPRS. The cell is configured with dynamic TCHFs.
Context
With this feature, the conversion between PDCH and TCH can be dynamically performed according to the traffic load in the cell. This feature effectively increases the channel usage, reduces the possibility of CS services preempting the radio resources of PS services, and thus improves the CS access performance and PS retainability performance.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the SET GCELLPSCHM command to set Uplink Multiplex Threshold of Dynamic Channel Conversion, Downlink Multiplex Threshold of Dynamic Channel Conversion, Upper Threshold for CS Idle Channel Rate, and Lower Threshold for CS Idle Channel Rate.The value of Upper Threshold for CS Idle Channel Rate must be smaller than 100. Run the SET BTSOTHPARA command to set PS Service Guaranteed Rate. Enable the MS to camp on the serving cell to process PS services. Run the DSP PDCH command to specify Cell Index of the serving cell and query the number of PDCHs occupied by the MS and the number of TBFs on the PDCHs. Enable another MS to access the serving cell to process PS services. Run the DSP PDCH command to specify Cell Index of the serving cell and query the number of PDCHs occupied by this MS and the number of TBFs on the PDCHs.Comparing with the preceding query result, you can infer that the two MSs occupy different PDCHs. Run the SET GCELLPSCHM command to set Upper Threshold for CS Idle Channel Rate to 100.
2. l 1. 2. 3. 4.
----End
8.107 Configuring DTM

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114151 DTM.
Prerequisite
l l
The license is activated. If the network operation mode II or III is configured, BSS paging coordination must be configured so that CS pagings can be performed successfully in packet transmission mode. Early Classmark Sending Control (ECSC) must be configured so that the MS can automatically send the classmark control message to the network as early as possible after the immediate assignment.
Context
DTM allows simultaneous transfer of CS services and PS services. That is, a subscriber can send photos or browse websites during a voice call. In a 3G network, the speech and data services are processed in parallel. In this sense, DTM enables the GSM subscribers to enjoy the services similar to those provided by the 3G network. In addition, the 2G network can complement the 3G network in terms of coverage.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. l Run the SET GCELLGPRS command. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu (Support as built-in PCU), and SUPPORT DTM to SUPPORT(Support). Make a CS call. Initiate the operation by referring to Tracing PS Domain Messages of a Single Subscriber. Use the MS to perform PS data downloading services. Check the single-user PS signaling tracing result. PS downloading services are performed successfully while the CS call is not affected.
NOTE
The following messages are traced: Packet Notification, DTM Request, DTM Assignment Command, or Packet Assignment.
Deactivation Procedure 1. 2. Run the SET GTRXDEV command to set the device attributes of TRXs in the cell. In this step, set TCH Rate Adjust Allow to NO(No). Run the SET GCELLGPRS command. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu (Support as built-in PCU), and SUPPORT DTM to UNSUPPORT(Not Support).
----End
8.108 Configuring Class11 DTM

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119403 Class11 DTM.
Prerequisite
The license supports Class11 Dual Transfer Mode (DTM).
If the network operation mode II or III is configured, BSS paging coordination must be configured so that CS pagings can be performed successfully in packet transmission mode. Early Classmark Sending Control (ECSC) must be configured so that the MS can automatically send the classmark control message to the network as early as possible after the immediate assignment. EDA is supported.
Context
Based on common DTM, Class 11 DTM doubles the bandwidth of the uplink PS services of the MS. When an MS using Class11 DTM provides mainly uplink service, the channel assignment of Speech + 1Downlink + 2Uplink is supported. That is, two uplink PDCHs and one downlink PDCH are assigned to the MS.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the SET GCELLGPRS command. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu (Support as built-in PCU), SUPPORT DTM to SUPPORT(Support), and Support Class11 DTM to SUPPORT(Support). Make a CS call. Use the MS to perform PS data downloading services. Run the DSP MSCONTEXT command. In this step, specify the IMSI of the user. The expected result: PS services are performed successfully while the CS call is not affected. l Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the SET GCELLGPRS command. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu (Support as built-in PCU), SUPPORT DTM to SUPPORT(Support), and Support Class11 DTM to UNSUPPORT(Not Support).
----End
8.109 Configuring HMC DTM

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119404 HMC DTM.
Prerequisite
The license supports High Multislot Class Dual Transfer Mode (HMC DTM). If the network operation mode II or III is configured, BSS paging coordination must be configured so that CS pagings can be performed successfully in packet transmission mode. Early Classmark Sending Control (ECSC) must be configured so that the MS can automatically send the classmark control message to the network as early as possible after the immediate assignment. EDA is supported.
Context
Based on common DTM, HMC DTM improves the bandwidth of the uplink and downlink PS services of the MS. The MS can occupy a maximum of three uplink and downlink PDCHs respectively during a call. The following channel assignments are supported: Speech + 3Downlink + 1Uplink, Speech + 2Downlink + 2Uplink, and Speech + 1Downlink + 3Uplink. The DTM multislot classes defined in 3GPP specifications are classes 5, 6, 9, 10, 11, 3133, 36-38, and 4144. The classes 31-33 are called HMC DTM. For an MS of DTM multislot classes 32-33, the Extended Dynamic Allocation (EDA) function must be used if the MS requires more than three channels in the uplink.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the SET GCELLGPRS command. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu (Support as built-in PCU), SUPPORT DTM to SUPPORT(Support), and Support HMC DTM to SUPPORT(Support). Make a CS call. Use the MS to perform PS data downloading services. Run the DSP MSCONTEXT command. The expected result: PS services are performed successfully while the CS call is not affected. l Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the SET GCELLGPRS command. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu (Support as built-in PCU), SUPPORT DTM to SUPPORT(Support), and Support HMC DTM to UNSUPPORT(Not Support).
----End
8.110 Configuring 14.4 kbit/s Circuit Switched Data

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature 14.4 kbit/s Circuit Switched Data.
Prerequisite
The MSC supports the single-timeslot 14.4 kbit/s circuit switched data service.
Context
Huawei GSM BSS supports the transfer ofhig rate of 14.4 kbit/s for t services. This rate is higher than the common rate of Circuit Switched Data (CSD) services. In this manner, the user experience is improved.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the SET GCELLOTHEXT command. In this step, select NT14_5K and T14_4K in the Data Service Allowed parameter.
8-190
Verification Procedure 1. Run the LST GCELLOTHEXT command to check the value of Data service allowed. The expected result: The values of both T14_4K and NT14_5K in the Data service allowed parameter are USED. Use an MS to initiate a 14.4 kbit/s circuit switched data service. Then, trace the signaling on the A interface. The expected result: The service is set up successfully. Check the assignment message traced on the A interface, the value of the Channel Type IE shows that the service type is 14.4 kbit/s CS services. Run the SET GCELLOTHEXT command. In this step, deselect NT14_5K and T14_4K in the Data Service Allowed parameter.
2.
----End
8.111 Configuring Resource Reservation

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116001 Resource Reservation.
Prerequisite
l
Context
With the resource reservation feature, the system reserves a certain number of TCHFs for highpriority users to ensure their QoS.
l
Channel resources are reserved for high-priority users, thus ensuring the QoS of the VIP users and improving user experience. Resource reservation provides a segmentation function for operators. Using this function, operators can provide different levels of services for users with different priorities. In this way, the operation revenue is increased.
This feature can be used together with the feature GBFD-115001 Enhanced Multi Level Precedence and Preemption (eMLPP) to better guarantee the benefits of users and improve the user satisfaction.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the SET GCELLCHMGBASIC command. In this step, set Grade Access Allow to YES(Yes), and set Highest Priority and Reserved Channel Number to proper values.
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
Verification Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. Run the SET GCELLCHMGBASIC command. In this step, set Highest Priority to 7 and Reserved Channel Number to 1. Block the TCHs in cell 0 and reserve only one idle TCH. Start Trace BSSAP Message on the A Interface of cell 0 on the LMT. Use MS 1 to make a common call in cell 0. Then, check the priority delivered by the CN in the assignment request. The expected result: If the priority is greater than 7, the call fails. Otherwise, the call can be established and a TCHF is assigned during the assignment procedure. 5. Use MS 1 to make an emergency call in cell 0. Then, check the priority delivered by the CN in the assignment request. The expected result: If the priority is greater than 7, the call fails. Otherwise, the call can be established and a TCHF is assigned during the assignment procedure.
Deactivation Procedure 1. 2. Run the SET GCELLCHMGBASIC command. In this step, set Grade Access Allow to NO(No). Run the LST GCELLCHMGBASIC command to query the value of Grade Access Allow. The expected result: The value of Grade Access Allow is NO(No).
----End
8.112 Configuring Enhanced Multi Level Precedence and Preemption (eMLPP)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115001 Enhanced Multi Level Precedence and Preemption (eMLPP).
Prerequisite
l
Context
eMLPP offers a segmentation function. By enabling this function, operators can provide different levels of services for subscribers with different priorities. The eMLPP function is enabled to ensure the speech quality of high-priority MSs when the network is busy.
Procedure
l
8-192
1. l
Run the SET GCELLCCBASIC command. In this step, set Allow EMLPP to YES (Yes) to activate the eMLPP function. Get three test MSs ready, namely, MS 1, MS 2, and MS 3. The priorities configured for these MSs at the HLR in descending order are MS 1, MS 2, and MS 3. Configure data on the MSC side, and ensure that the resources for the MSs with low priorities can be preempted and the MSs with high priorities can preempt these resources. On the LMT, start message tracing over the A interface by referring to Tracing Messages on the A Interface. In the A Interface Trace dialog box, click the BSSAP tab, and set related parameters. Start CS message tracing over the Abis interface by referring to Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface. In the Abis Interface CS Trace dialog box, click the RSL tab, and set the related parameters. Use MS 2 and MS 3 to make PSTN calls in the test cell. Run the SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT command to block the remaining idle TCHs in the cell. Use MS 1 to make a PSTN call in the cell. The expected result: The call of MS 3 is handed over to another cell or is released. MS 1 occupies the channel of MS 3 and successfully makes the call. The call of MS 2 is not affected.
NOTE
3.
4. 5. 6.
When the eMLPP function is enabled, a low-priority MS can be handed over to another cell only if neighboring relations are correctly configured. The configuration of neighboring relations is not mandatory for the eMLPP function. When the eMLPP function is enabled, ensure that the data configuration on the CN side is correct, and the Priority information element carried in the assignment request message sent by the MSC is consistent with the setting on the BSC side. In this case, the resources of MSs can be preempted. The assignment request message is displayed in the window for tracing messages over the A interface.
Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the SET GCELLCCBASIC command. In this step, set Allow EMLPP to NO (No).
----End
8.113 Configuring Guaranteed Emergency Call

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-110521 Guaranteed Emergency Call.
Prerequisite
l
None None
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)

l
The license for this feature is activated.
Context
The Guaranteed Emergency Call feature is introduced to improve the setup success rate of emergency calls to the greatest extent. Thus, provision of communications is ensured in disaster relief activities. This feature has the following characteristics:
l l l
Emergency calls are preferentially assigned TCH/F in the immediate assignment phase. The system reserves TCH/F for the MS making an emergency call. The MS making an emergency call preempts the channel resources seized by the call with a lower priority.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. Run the SET GCELLCCAD command. In this step, set Priority of Emergency Call to a proper value according to the actual requirements, for example, 1. Run the SET GCELLCHMGBASIC command. In this step, set Max Channel Num Reserved for EC to a proper value according to the actual requirements, for example, 2. Run the SET GCELLCCAD command. In this step, set Emergency Call Preemption Permitted to ON(On). Optional: Run the SET GCELLTMR command. In this step, set Timer of Reserved TCH for EMC to a proper value according to the actual requirements, for example, 15. Run the LST GCELLCCAD command to view the value of Priority of Emergency Call. The expected result: The value of Priority of Emergency Call is 1. 2. Run the LST GCELLCHMGBASIC command to view the value of Max Channel Num Reserved for EC. The expected result: The value of Max Channel Num Reserved for EC is 2. 3. Run the LST GCELLCCAD command to view the value of Emergency Call Preemption Permitted. The expected result: The value of Emergency Call Preemption Permitted is ON (On). 4. Optional: Run the LST GCELLTMR command to view the value of Timer of Reserved TCH for EMC. The expected result: The value of Timer of Reserved TCH for EMC is 15. 5. Use MS 1 to make an emergency call in the cell. All the TCHs in the cell are occupied by common calls and there are no idle channels. There exists a call whose priority is lower than the priority of the emergency call and the channel resources of the call can be preempted.
3. 4.
The expected result: A call in the cell is released because its resources are preempted. 6. l MS 1 makes the emergency call successfully. In the immediate assignment phase, an SDCCH is assigned and in the assignment phase, a TCH/F is assigned. Run the SET GCELLCCAD command. In this step, set Priority of Emergency Call to 15. Run the LST GCELLCCAD command to view the value of Priority of Emergency Call. The expected result: The value of Priority of Emergency Call is 15. 3. 4. Run the SET GCELLCCAD command. In this step, set Emergency Call Preemption Permitted to OFF(Off). Run the LST GCELLCCAD command to view the value of Emergency Call Preemption Permitted. The expected result: The value of Emergency Call Preemption Permitted is OFF (Off). ----End
8.114 Configuring Flow Control Based on Cell Priority

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115002 Flow Control Based on Cell Priority.
Prerequisite
l
Context
When service congestion occurs in the BSC, flow control is started. The calls in the VIP cells or paging of the VIP users are preferentially processed. Thus, the normal operation of the BSC is ensured, and the call setup success rate of the VIP users is not affected.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. Run the ADD GCELL or MOD GCELL command. In this step, set VIP Cell to YES (Yes). Run the SET BSCFCPARA command. In this step, set Support Priority Based Flow Control to YES(Yes), and set VIP Share in CPU Rate, VIP Access CPU Rate, and VIP Priority.
l
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
1.
Run the LST GCELL command to query the value of VIP Cell. The expected result: The value of VIP Cell to YES(Yes).
2.
Run the LST BSCFCPARA command to query the values of Support Priority Based Flow Control, VIP Share in CPU Rate, VIP Access CPU Rate, and VIP Priority. The expected result: The value of Support Priority Based Flow Control is YES (Yes). The parameters VIP Share in CPU Rate, VIP Access CPU Rate, and VIP Priority are set to some values.
3.
When service congestion occurs in the BSC, check whether the call setup success rate of a VIP cell and the call setup success rate of VIP users are affected. The expected result: The call setup success rate of a VIP cell and the call setup success rate of VIP users are normal. No abnormal call drops occur.
Deactivation Procedure 1. 2. Run the SET BSCFCPARA command. In this step, set Support Priority Based Flow Control is NO(No). Run the MOD GCELL command. In this step, set VIP Cell to NO(No).
----End
8.115 Configuring Network Support SAIC

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118103 Network Support SAIC.
Prerequisite
l
The MS supports SAIC. None The license for this feature is activated.
Context
Single Antenna Interference Cancellation (SAIC) is a technique that restraints both intrafrequency and inter-frequency interference when the MS receives signals through a single antenna. SAIC aims to minimize the impact of interference on the receive quality of downlink signals through signaling processing. The MS that supports SAIC has a greater capability of bearing interference than the MS that does not. Therefore, the strategy of power control can be adjusted if the MS supports SAIC, to reduce the transmit power of the BTS and thus to reduce interference in the entire network.
Procedure
l
8-196
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. l
Run the SET GCELLPWRBASIC command. In this step, set Saic Allowed to YES (Yes). Run the SET GCELLPWR2 command. In this step, set Power Control Threshold Adjust for SAIC to 1. Run the SET GCELLPWR3 command. In this step, set Power Control Threshold Adjust for SAIC to 3. Run the SET GCELLSOFT command. In this step, set Switch for BTS Supporting SAIC PC Adjust to ON(On). Run the SET GCELLHOCTRL command. In this step, set MR.Preprocessing to BTS_Preprocessing(BTS preprocessing). Run the LST GCELLPWRBASIC command to query the value of Saic Allowed. The expected result: The value of Saic Allowed is Yes. Run the LST GCELLPWR2 command to query the value of Power Control Threshold Adjust for SAIC. The expected result: The value of Power Control Threshold Adjust for SAIC is 1. Run the LST GCELLPWR3 command to query the value of Power Control Threshold Adjust for SAIC. The expected result: The value of Power Control Threshold Adjust for SAIC is 3. Run the LST GCELLSOFT command to query the value of Switch for BTS Supporting SAIC PC Adjust. The expected result: The value of Switch for BTS Supporting SAIC PC Adjust is On.
3.
4.
5.
Run the LST GCELLHOCTRL command to query the value of MR.Preprocessing. The expected result: The value of MR.Preprocessing is BTS Preprocessing. Initiate a call. Then, query whether the MS supports SAIC by checking the value of the Downlink Advanced Receiver Performance information element in the Mobile Station Classmark 3 message. The expected result: The value of Downlink Advanced Receiver Performance is Support SAIC.
6.
7.
Check the MS Capability information element that is carried in the channel activation command sent to the BTS by the BSC6900. The expected result: The SAIC support capability is set to 1, which indicates that the MS supports SAIC.
Deactivation Procedure 1. 2. 3. Run the SET GCELLPWRBASIC command. In this step, set Saic Allowed to NO (No). Run the SET GCELLSOFT command. In this step, set Switch for BTS Supporting SAIC PC Adjust to OFF(Off). Run the SET GCELLHOCTRL command. In this step, set MR.Preprocessing to BSC_Preprocessing(BSC preprocessing).
----End
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
8-197
8.116 Configuring the Location Service

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the location service (LCS).
Prerequisite
l
Activation The MSC supports the LCS. The license is activated.
Verification The MSC supports the LCS. The test cell is operational, and idle channels are available in the test cell. You need to select BSSAP when enabling an Tracing Messages on the A Interface task.
Context
A license is required to implement the LCS. The LCS is used to provide a series of specific services based on the location of the MS. For example, the LCS can locate the MS that initiates an emergency call or provide the information on the MS location for other value added services (VAS).
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the ADD GEXTSMLC command to add settings of the SMLC to the test cell. In this step, set SMLC Mode to INNER(Inner).
NOTE
Run the LST GCELL to obtain Operator Name.
2. 3. l 1. 2.
Run the SET AITFOTHPARA command. In this step, set Add TA to A Interface EST IND to OPEN(Open). Run the SET GCELLLCS command to configure the LCS parameters of a cell. Use an MS to originate a call and hold the call. Check whether the Perform Location Request message and Perform Location Response message are traced over the A interface and whether the MS location can be displayed on the MSC. Run the MOD GEXTSMLC command to add settings of the SMLC to the test cell. In this step, set SMLC Mode to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support).
----End
8.117 Configuring the Abis over IP

This section describes how to configure and verify Abis over IP.
Prerequisite
l l l l l
The license is activated. The FG2a/FG2c/GOUa/GOUc/PEUa/POUc is configured and installed. The BSC supports the communication through the device IP address or port IP address. The BTS support IP transmission. If the device IP address is used for the communication, a static IP route is required between the peer device and the BSC even if the BSC is directly connected to the peer device. If the port IP address is used, the static route is not required. The IP-based A, Abis, or Gb interface board can be configured with up to 16 device IP addresses. The Abis over IP only supports the built-in PCU and BTS star topology, and does not support the HubBTS or TDM/hybrid IP transport. The Abis over IP supports only IPv4. When the layer 2 networking is used on the Abis interface, the BSC and BTS directly performs link detection through the BFD. In this case, the BTS should not use the device IP address in communication. The feature GBFD-117801 BTS Ring Topology, the feature GBFD-117701 BSC Local Switching and the feature GBFD-117301 Flex Abis are not configured in the network.
l l
Context
NOTE
The Abis over IP is not supported on the BTS3006C and the BTS3002E.
A license is required to implement Abis over IP. Abis MUX function is optional after configured Abis over IP to improve the transmission efficiency and save the use of bandwidth.
Procedure
l Configuring the Abis over IP 1. IP over FE/GE (1) Run the ADD BRD to add FG2a/FG2c/GOUa/GOUc board on the BSC. (2) Perform the operations in Configuring the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer for the FG2a/FG2c/GOUa/GOUc Board. (3) Run the ADD ADJNODE command to add an adjacent node. (4) Run the ADD IPPATH command to configure the IP-based user plane. (5) Run the ADD BTSBRD command to add a board in IP transmission mode to a BTS.
NOTE
(6) Run the SET BTSIPCLKPARA to configure the IP clock for the BTS. (7) Run the ADD BTSESN to add the ESN of the BTS. (8) Run the SET BTSIP. In this step, set BSC IP to the same value as Device IP or Port IP of the IP-based interface board on the BSC.

NOTE
When the IP address of the BSC6900 is not on the same network segment as that of the BTS in L3 networking, you need to run the ADD IPRT to configure the IP route at the BTS side.
(9) Run the SET BTSETHPORT command. In this step, set the port IP address of the BTS. 2. IP over E1/T1 (1) Run the ADD BRD to add PEUa/POUc board on the BSC. (2) Configure the physical layer and the data link layer.
(3) Run the ADD ADJNODE command to add an adjacent node. (4) Run the ADD IPPATH command to configure the IP-based user plane. (5) Run the ADD BTSBRD command to add a board in IP transmission mode to a BTS.
NOTE
(6) Run the ADD BTSCONNECT command to add a connection between a BTS and the BSC6900. To add more BTS connections, repeat this step. (7) Run the ADD BTSESN to add the ESN of the BTS. (8) Run the SET BTSIP. In this step, set BSC IP to the same value as Device IP or Port IP of the IP-based interface board on the BSC. 3. l Optional: Run the command to add the Abis MUX. In this step, set theIP MUX Type to ABISMUX. Verify data at the physical layer and the data link layer.
Verifying Abis over IP 1. IP over FE/GE (1) Run the DSP ETHPORT command to check Port state and Link Availability Status. If Port state is Activated and Link Availability Status is Available , the link works normally. In this step, set Subrack No., Slot No., and Port No. to those of the peer interface board connected to the BTS. (2) In link aggregation mode, run the DSP ETHTRK command to check Status of ETHTRK. If Status of ETHTRK is set to UP, link aggregation is functional. Run the DSP ETHTRKLNK command to check Status of ETHTRKLNK sub-port. If Status of ETHTRKLNK sub-port is set to UP, the sub-port for the link aggregation group is functional. (3) Run the DSP ADJNODE command to obtain the state of an adjacent node, the number of paths to the adjacent node, and available bandwidth by checking related parameters, for example, Operation state. If Operation state is Available, the adjacent node is functional and the bandwidth is greater than 0.
8-200
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
(4) Run the DSP IPPATH check whether the IP path is available. If Operation state is Available and the available bandwidth is greater than 0, the IP path is functional.
IP over E1/T1 (1) Run the DSP E1T1 command to check whether the port is function by Port running state. (2) If the PPP link is used, run the DSP PPPLNK command to query Link state, Local IP address, and Peer IP address. (3) If the MLPPP link is used, run the DSP MPGRP command to query Link state, Local IP address, and Peer IP address. Run the DSP MPLNKcommand to query Link state and LCP negotiated state. (4) If the PPP link is used, run the PING IP. In this step, set Source IP address to the same value as Local IP address in the DSP PPPLNK command and Destination IP address to Peer IP address in the DSP PPPLNK command. If the statistics on PING packets can be received, the PPP link is functional. (5) If the MLPPP link is used, run the PING IP. In this step, set Source IP address to the same value as Local IP address in the DSP MPGRP command and Destination IP address to Peer IP address in the DSP MPGRP command. If the statistics on PING packets can be received, the MLPPP link is functional.
2.
Verifying the control plane on the Abis interface (1) Run the DSP LAPDLNK command to check whether the LAPD link is functional. If UsageStatus is Normal, the LAPD link is functional.
3.
Verifying the user plane on the Abis interface (1) Run the DSP ADJNODE command to obtain the state of an adjacent node, the number of paths to the adjacent node, and available bandwidth by checking related parameters, for example, Operation state. If Operation state is Available, the adjacent node is functional and the bandwidth is greater than 0. (2) Run the DSP IPPATH check whether the IP path is available. If Operation state is Available and the available bandwidth is greater than 0, the IP path is functional.
----End
8.118 Configuring the A over IP

This section describes how to configure and verify Ater over IP.
Prerequisite
l l l l
The license is activated. The FG2a/FG2c/GOUa/GOUc/PEUa/POUc is configured and installed. The BSC supports the communication through the device IP address or port IP address. If the device IP address is used for the communication, a static IP route is required between the peer device and the BSC even if the BSC is directly connected to the peer device. If the port IP address is used, the static route is not required.
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)

l
The IP-based A, Abis, Gb, or Ater interface board can be configured with up to 16 device IP addresses. The A over IP supports only IPv4.
Context
A license is required to implement A over IP. If the IP transmission is used on the A interface, the functions of the TCS are taken over by the MGW, and the BSC does not perform transcoding. The compressed speech coding scheme is still used, and thus the transmission bandwidth is reduced on the A interface. When an MS calls another MS using the same speech coding scheme in the network, the secondary speech coding/ decoding can be avoided. Thus, the speech quality is enhanced and the resources are saved. The A interface supports IP over FE/GE and IP over E1/T1.
Procedure
l Configuring A over IP 1. Configure the BSC attributes Run the SET BSCBASIC command to set basic attributes of a BSC. In this step, set Service mode to AIP(AIP). 2. 3. 4. Run the ADD BRD to add FG2a/FG2c/GOUa/GOUc/PEUa/POUc board. Configure the BSC clock by referring to Configuring the Clocks. Configuring the A over IP
IP over FE/GE (1) In MPS/EPS, perform the operations in Configuring the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer for the FG2a/FG2c/GOUa/GOUc Board. (2) Perform the operations in Configuring the Control Plane of the A Interface (over IP). (3) Perform the operations in Configuring the Mapping Between Service Types and Transmission Resources for the Adjacent Node. (4) Perform the operations in Configuring the User Plane of the A Interface (over IP).
IP over E1 (1) In MPS/EPS, perform the operations in Configuring the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer for the PEUa Board or Configuring the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer for the POUc Board. (2) Run the command. In this step, set Adjacent Node Type to A(A Interface). (3) Perform the operations in Configuring the Mapping Between Service Types and Transmission Resources for the Adjacent Node. (4) Perform the operations in Configuring the User Plane of the A Interface (over IP).
Verifying A over IP 1. Verify data at the physical layer and the data link layer.
IP over FE/GE
8-202
(1) Run the DSP ETHPORT command to check Port state and Link Availability Status. If Port state is Activated and Link Availability Status is Available , the link works normally. In this step, set Subrack No., Slot No., and Port No. to those of the peer interface board connected to the BTS. (2) In link aggregation mode, run the DSP ETHTRK command to check Status of ETHTRK. If Status of ETHTRK is set to UP, link aggregation is functional. Run the DSP ETHTRKLNK command to check Status of ETHTRKLNK sub-port. If Status of ETHTRKLNK sub-port is set to UP, the sub-port for the link aggregation group is functional.
IP over E1/T1 (1) Run the DSP E1T1 command to check whether the port is function by Port running state. (2) If the PPP link is used, run the DSP PPPLNK command to query Link State, Local IP address, and Peer IP address. (3) If the MLPPP link is used, run the DSP MPGRP to query Link State, Local IP Address, and Peer IP Address, and run the DSP MPLNK command to query Link State and LCP Negotiation State. (4) If the PPP link is used, run the PING IP. In this step, set Source IP Address to the same value as Local IP Address in the DSP PPPLNK command and Destination IP Address to the same value asPeer IP Address in the DSP PPPLNK command. If the statistics on PING packets can be received, the PPP link is functional. (5) If the MLPPP link is used, run the PING IP. In this step, set Source IP Address to the same value as Local IP Address in the DSP MPGRP command and Destination IP Address to the same value as Peer IP Address in the DSP MPGRP command. If the statistics on PING packets can be received, the MLPPP link is functional.
NOTE
2.
Verifying the control plane on the A interface (1) Run the DSP N7DPC command to check whether SCCP DSP state is Accessible. If SCCP DSP state is Accessible, the DSP of the SCCP link is functional. (2) If SCCP DSP state is not Accessible, run the DSP M3LKS command to check whether Operation status is Available and whether Activated status is Activated. If Operation status is Available and Activated status is Activated, the link set is functional. (3) If Activated status is Deactivated, run the DSP SCTPLNK command to check whether Operation state is Normal. If Operation state is Normal, the SCTP link is functional.
3.
Verifying the user plane on the A interface (1) Run the DSP ADJNODE to obtain the state of an adjacent node, the number of paths to the adjacent node, and available bandwidth by checking related parameters, for example, Operation state. If Operation state is Available, the adjacent node is functional and the bandwidth is greater than 0.
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
8-203
(2) Run the DSP IPPATH check whether the IP path is available. If Operation state is Available and the available bandwidth is greater than 0, the IP path is functional. ----End
8.119 Configuring UDP MUX for A Transmission

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118610 UDP MUX for A Transmission.
Prerequisite
l
The FG2a/FG2c/GOUa/GOUc/PEUa/POUc board is configured, and the CN supports UDP multiplexing. The feature GBFD-118602 A over IP or GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1 is enabled. The license for this feature is activated.
l l
Context
In A over IP, the RTP/UDP/IP packaging is applied to the data of the user plane, thus reducing the transmission efficiency. When this feature is enabled, however, multiple RTP packets are multiplexed onto one UDP packet. As a result, the proportion of the packet header to the total packet decreases, and thus the A interface transmission efficiency is increased. The license item for the UDP MUX for A Transmission (per TRX) function is switched on.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the ADD IPMUX command. In this step, set IP MUX Type to UDPMUX. To configure UDP multiplexing for multiple paths, run this command repeatedly.
NOTE
The parameters Max subframe length[byte], Maximum Frame Length[byte], and Maximum Delay Time[ms] need to be set based on actual networking.
Verification Procedure 1. Run the DSP IPMUX command to query the IP packet multiplexing status. The expected result: The value ofIPMUX Status is Enable. Run the RMV IPMUX command to remove IP multiplexing paths.
----End
8.120 Configuring the Gb over IP

This section describes how to configure and verify Gb over IP.
Prerequisite
l

8-204

l l l
The built-in PCU is configured. The FG2a/FG2c board is configured and installed. A cell is activated and supports GPRS.
Context
A license is required to implement Gb over IP.
Procedure
l Configuring Gb over IP 1. 2. 3. 4. Run the ADD BRD to add FG2a/FG2c board. Run the ADD SGSNNODE command to add an SGSN node. In this step, set Operator Name and SGSN Node ID. Run the ADD NSE command to add an NSE. In this step, set NSE Identifier, Subrack No., Slot No., Subnet Protocol Type, Operator Name, and SGSN Node ID. Configure the NSVL. (1) Run the ADD NSVLLOCAL command to add a local NSVL. In this step, set Local NSVL ID, NSE Identifier, Local IP Address, Local UDP Port No., Subrack No., and Slot No.. (2) Optional: When NSE is in static configuration mode, run the ADD NSVLREMOTE command to add a remote NSVL. In this step, set Remote NSVL ID, NSE Identifier, Remote IP Address, and Remote UDP Port No.. 5. Run the command to add a PTP BSSGP virtual connection (PTP BVC). In this step, set PTP BVC Identifier and Index Type. Then, specify Cell Name for the GPRS cell that needs to be bound, and set NSE Identifier for the NSE added in Step 3. Run the PING IP command. In this step, specify Subrack No., Slot No., Source IP Address, and Destination IP Address. If the statistic on PING packets can be received, the link is functional.
NOTE
Verifying Gb over IP 1.
If the NSE is in dynamic configuration mode, you need to set Source IP Address to the same value as Local IP Address in the ADD NSVLLOCAL and Destination IP Address to the same value as Server IP in ADD NSE If the NSE is in static configuration mode, you need to set Source IP Address to the same value as Local IP Address in the ADD NSVLLOCAL and Destination IP Address to the same value as Remote IP Address in ADD NSVLREMOTE
2.
Run the DSP GBIPROUTE command to check whether IP Path State is Normal. If IP Path State is Normal, the IP path is available. In this step, specify NSE Identifier. Run the DSP SIGBVC command to check whether SIG BVC State is Normal. If SIG BVC State is Normal, the SIG PVG is available. In this step, specify NSE Identifier.
NOTE
3.
----End
8.121 Configuring IP Fault detection based on BFD

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118609 IP Fault detection based on BFD.
Prerequisite
l

The FG2a/GOUa/FG2c/GOUc board is configured on the Abis/A/Gb interface. The device connected to the BSC supports BFD. The features that this feature depends on are configured. This feature depends on the following features: GBFD-118601 Abis over IP, GBFD-118602 A over IP, and GBFD-118603 Gb over IP. The license for this feature is activated.
Context
BFD is a method of detecting IP connection failures by periodically transmitting BFD packets between two nodes. With this feature, IP route reselection is triggered when the gateway or the peer entity is faulty, thus avoiding continuous packet loss or call drop. BFD applies to the following scenarios:
l
When the BSC is connected to a peer device (such as a BTS, MGW, or SGSN) through a router, BFD detects whether the router is available. When the BSC is connected to a peer device (such as a BTS, MGW, or SGSN) directly, BFD detects whether the peer device is available.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the STR IPCHK command. In this step, set the parameters Check type, Check mode, Peer IP address, and Multi hop BFD detect local ip based on the actual networking.
NOTE
If the Ethernet ports work in active/standby mode, set Check mode to CHECK_ON_PRIMARY_PORT; if the Ethernet port works in independent mode, set Check mode to CHECK_ON_INDEPENDENT_PORT. If Check type is set to SBFD, the single hop BFD is enabled. In this case, set Peer IP address to an IP address that is on the same network segment as the local IP address. If Check type is set to MBFD, the multi-hop BFD is enabled. In this case, set Multi hop BFD detect local ip to the device IP or port IP if the local board, and set Peer IP address to an IP address that is on a different network segment from the local IP address.
l l
Verification Procedure 1. Run the DSP IPCHK command to query the value of Check state. The expected result: The value of Check state is UP or DOWN.
8-206
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the STP IPCHK command to stop the function of IP Fault Detection based on BFD.
----End
8.122 Configuring Ethernet OAM

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118630 Ethernet OAM.
Prerequisite
l
The FG2a/FG2c/GOUa/GOUc board is configured for the Abis or A interface, or the FG2a/FG2c/GOUc board is configured for the Gb interface. The interconnected transmission devices support the Ethernet OAM protocol. The features that this feature depends on are configured. This feature depends on the following features: GBFD-118601 Abis over IP, GBFD-118602 A over IP, and GBFD-118603 Gb over IP. The license for this feature is activated.
Context
As a layer-2 protocol, Ethernet OAM can report the status of the network at the data link layer. Thus, the network is monitored and managed more effectively. The BSS supports two types of Ethernet OAM: point-to-point Ethernet OAM (IEEE 802.3ah) and end-to-end Ethernet OAM (IEEE 802.1ag).
Procedure
l l Activating the Ethernet EFM OAM function 1. 1. Run the ACT ETHOAMAH command to activate the Ethernet EFM OAM function. After EFM OAM is enabled, ALM-21371 ETHOAM 3AH Discovery Failure is reported if the transmission link is faulty or the peer end does not support the EFM OAM function. After EFM OAM is enabled, the alarm ALM-21374 ETHOAM 3AH Remote Loopback is reported if the loopback is successful because the loopback operation blocks the ongoing services. Run the DEA ETHOAMAH command to deactivate the Ethernet EFM OAM function. Verifying the Ethernet EFM OAM function
2.
Deactivating the Ethernet EFM OAM function 1.
l
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
Activating the OAM 1AG function

1. 2.
Run the ADD ETHMD command to add a maintenance domain (MD) of Ethernet OAM. In this step, set MD INDEX, MD LEVEL, and MD NAME. Run the ADD ETHMA command to add an Ethernet OAM maintenance association (MA). In this step, set VLAN ID, MA Index, and MA Name, and set MD INDEX to the value specified in Step 1. Run the ADD ETHMEP command to add a Connectivity Fault Management Maintenance association End Point(MEP). In this step, set MEP ID, set MEP Type to LocalMep(LocalMep) and Port Type to ETHER, and set MA Index to the value specified in Step 2.
NOTE
3.
The value of MEP ID at the interconnected device must be the same as that at the BSC6900.
4.
Run the ACT ETHCC command to activate the unidirectional connectivity check for the Ethernet OAM to check the connectivity between the local MEP and the peer MEP. In this step, set MA Index to the value specified in Step 2 and MEP ID to the value specified in Step 3. Run the PING MAC command. In this step, set MA Index and MEP ID to the values specified in the ADD ETHMEP, and set RMEP ID to the MEP ID of the peer device. The expected result: The number of received packets is the same as the number of sent packets.
Verifying the Ethernet OAM 1AG function 1.
2.
Run the TRC MAC command. In this step, set MA Index and MEP ID to the values specified in the ADD ETHMEP command, and set RMEP ID to the MEP ID of the peer device. The expected result: "Succeed in tracing the destination address" is displayed in the result.
Deactivating the Ethernet OAM 1AG function 1. 2. 3. 4. Run the DEA ETHCC command to deactivate the unidirectional connectivity test of Ethernet OAM. Run the RMV ETHMEP command to remove an Ethernet OAM MEP. Run the RMV ETHMA command to remove an Ethernet OAM MA. Run the RMV ETHMD command to remove an Ethernet OAM MD.
----End
8.123 Configuring PICO/Compact BTS Automatic Configuration and Planning

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional features PICO Automatic Configuration and Planning (feature ID: GBFD-510601) and Compact BTS Automatic Configuration and Planning (feature ID: GBFD-510701).
Prerequisite
l l
This feature is supported by only the PICO and compact BTS. The license is activated.
8-208

l
The initial parameters required for BTS auto-planning algorithm are set in online mode through the M2000 client.
Context
l l
The compact BTS refers to the BTS3900E. Before the auto-planning, the following parameters used for the planning algorithm must be configured in advance on the M2000 client: operator frequency data, BTS adjacency information, BSIC data, and CGI resource data. You can view the progress and result of the BTS GSM auto-planning and perform data analysis and fault location on the M2000 client. For details, see the M2000 Operator Guide. After being installed and powered on, the BTS3900B and BTS3900E can connect with the BSC automatically with the network automatic detection function. Operators do not need to configure radio parameters for cells. The M2000 obtains radio parameters based on frequency bands and scanning results of the uplink and downlink level of surrounding frequencies reported from the BTS, and then performs the automatic configuration and planning of the BTS39000B and BTS3900E. This feature can be applied in newly deployed or swapped sites. By using this function, site deployment duration is decreased and operator intervention is reduced. As a result, OM costs are reduced.
Procedure
l Activation procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSAUTOPLAN to add the BTS in autoplanning mode. The added BTS is enabled with the auto-planning function by default. (The auto-planning algorithm switch and auto-optimization algorithm switch are set to ON.)
NOTE
The added BTS that is in auto-planning mode will enable the auto-planning function automatically when it is powered on for the first time. If the first auto-planning scan succeeds, the BTS does not enable the auto-planning function automatically after the BTS is powered off again or reset. If the site data needs to be planned again, run the BSC6900 MML command RST AUTOPLAN. To enable this feature on a BTS that is configured as a common BTS on the BSC, run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then set BTS Configuration Mode to AUTO, BTS Type to BTS3900E_GSM or BTS3900B_GSM, and set CGI and RAC Plan Switch, Freq. and BSIC Plan Switch, and Neighbor Cell Plan Switch to ON. Then, run the BSC6900 MML command RST AUTOPLAN to plan the site data automatically. When the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG is executed to configure the this feature, the parameter CGI and RAC Plan Switch is not available if BTS Type is set to BTS3900E_GSM. If the feature is applied to the BTS3900E, a maximum of two carriers can be configured and the cells of the BTS3900E are configured in O2 mode.
Verification procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then check that CGI and RAC Plan Switch, Freq. and BSIC Plan Switch, and Neighbor Cell Plan Switch are set to ON. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then set BTS Configuration Mode to NORMAL.
Deactivation procedure 1.
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
8-209
CAUTION
1. After BTS Configuration Mode is set to NORMAL, all the auto-planning and autooptimization algorithms are deactivated. 2. The deactivation operation during the execution of the auto-planning function will result in the reset of the BTS. ----End
8.124 Configuring PICO Synchronization

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature PICO Synchronization (feature ID: GBFD-510602).
Prerequisite
l l
Neighboring cells of the PICO are available and the neighboring relations are configured. This feature is supported by only the PICO.
Context
l
In the GSM network, the 13 MHz frequency synchronization is mandatory among multiple BTSs to maintain the network QoS, such as the MS handover success rate. The clock synchronization function of the PICO implements the Um frequency synchronization with the neighboring macro BTSs through software. The output synchronization clock is 13 MHz.
Procedure
l Activation procedure 1. l Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK, and then set Clock Type to UM_CLK(Um Clock). Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSCLK, and then check thatClock Type is set to UM_CLK(Um Clock). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK, and then set Clock Type to INT_CLK(Internal Clock).
Verification procedure 1.
----End
8.125 Configuring Compact BTS Automatic Capacity Planning

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature Compact BTS Automatic Capacity Planning (feature ID: GBFD-510702).
Prerequisite
l l l
The license is activated. This feature is supported by only the BTS3900E. The initial parameters required for BTS auto-planning algorithm are set in online mode through the M2000 client.
Context
l l l
The Compact BTS Automatic Capacity Planning feature is license-controlled. The compact BTS refers to BTS3900E. Before the auto-planning, the following parameters used for the planning algorithm must be configured in advance on the M2000 client: operator frequency data, BTS adjacency information, BSIC data, and CGI resource data. You can view the progress and result of the BTS3900B GSM auto-planning and perform data analysis and fault location on the M2000 client. For details, see the M2000 Operator Guide. According to the traffic volume, the BSC adjusts the output power of the TRX in real time to achieve the balance between capacity and coverage of the network. A cell is initially configured with one TRX of 30 W power. With the increase of the traffic volume, another TRX in the cell is automatically activated, and thus these two TRXs share the 30 W power.
Procedure
l Activation procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then set BTS Configuration Mode to AUTO, BTS Type to BTS3900E_GSM, and Capacity and Coverage Optimize Switch to ON. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then check that Capacity and Coverage Optimize Switch is set to ON. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then set Capacity and Coverage Optimize Switch to OFF.
Verification procedure 1.
----End

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate VGCS/VBS.
Prerequisite
l

The test cell is configured with the VGCS function and VGCS ID at the MSC. Non-single channel originating is configured at the MSC. VGCS and VBS are enabled for the corresponding IMSIs at the HLR. Two test MSs, MS 1 and M2, that support VGCS and VBS are available.

Issue 06 (2010-05-31)

l
None The license for this feature is activated. The test cell has idle TCHs. The channel state monitoring of the test cell is started. For details, see Monitoring Channel Status.
Other prerequisites

Context
Compared with the GSM system, the GSM-R provides new features, such as VGCS, VBS, and enhanced Multi-Level Precedence and Preemption (eMLPP) service. The GSM-R can provide diversified voice dispatch services required in the private network. The cell does not support the VGCS/VBS by default, that is, the default value of NCH Occupy Block Number is 0. Configure the VGCS/VBS by setting NCH Occupy Block Number and NCH Start Block. When NCH Occupy Block Number is not 0, the BSC6900 informs the MS of the NCH information in system information type 1. The MS initiates a VGCS/VBS call after receiving the message indicating that the system supports the VGCS/VBS.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the SET GCELLGSMR command. In this step, set NCH Occupy Block Number and NCH Start Block.
NOTE
NCH Occupy Block Number cannot be set to 0. The sum of NCH Occupy Block Number and NCH Start Block must be smaller than or equal to the value of CCCH Blocks Reserved for AGCH. Run the LST GCELLIDLEBASIC command to query the value of Number of CCCH blocks reserved for the AGCH. After the command is executed, the BSC6900 sends related messages to the MS. VGCS and VBS can be originated in the group only after the MS receives these messages.
2. l
Run the LST GCELLGSMR command to check that NCH Occupy Block Number is not 0. That is, the VGCS or VBS is successfully configured in the test cell. Verifying VGCS 1. 2. Use MS 1 to perform VGCS in the test cell, and ensure that the service is performed properly. On the LMT, open the A Interface Trace dialog box and select BSSAP. The expected result: The messages VGCS/VBS Setup, VGCS/VBS Setup Ack, VGCS/VBS Assignment Request, VGCS/VBS Assignment Result, and VGCS/ VBS Talker Information are traced on the A interface. 3. 4. Check the status of TCHs in the test cell. You can see that besides the TCH for VGCS, another TCH is occupied and that the TCH is released five minutes later. Use MS 2 to perform VGCS with the same VGCS ID as MS 1 in the cell. The expected result: MS 2 is notified that the VGCS is ongoing. After MS 2 is added to the VGCS call, you can see that the current VGCS ID is displayed on the screen of MS 2.
8-212
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
5.
Press the PTT key on MS 2 to occupy the uplink, and check the traced messages displayed in the A Interface Trace window and those displayed on the screen of MS 1. The expected result: The messages Uplink Request, Uplink Request Ack, Uplink Request Confirmation, and VGCS/VBS Talker Information are traced on the A interface. The phone number of MS 2 is displayed on the screen of MS 1. In addition, you can hear the voice from MS 2 on MS 1.
6.
Press the PTT key on MS 2 to occupy the uplink, and at the same time press the PTT key on MS 1 to preempt the uplink. Preemption rejection is displayed on the screen of MS 1.
Verifying VBS 1. 2. Use MS 1 to perform VBS in the test cell, and ensure that the service is performed properly. On the LMT, open the A Interface Trace dialog box and select BSSAP. The expected result: The messages VGCS/VBS Setup, VGCS/VBS Setup Ack, VGCS/VBS Assignment Request, and VGCS/VBS Assignment Result are traced on the A interface. 3. 4. Check the status of TCHs in the test cell. You can see that besides the TCH for VBS, another TCH is occupied. Use MS 2 to perform VBS with the same ID as MS 1 in the cell. The expected result: You can see that MS 2 is notified that the VBS call is ongoing. After MS 2 is added the VBS call, you can see that the phone number of MS 1 is displayed on the screen of MS 2 and you can hear the voice from MS 1 on MS 2.
Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the SET GCELLGSMR command. In this step, set NCH Occupy Block Number to 0.
----End
8.127 Configuring GSM-T Relay

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510310 GSM-T Relay.
Prerequisite
l

The MS, MSC, and HLR need to support this feature. The BTS has been upgraded to a version that supports trunking services. The terminals support trunking services. None The license for this feature is activated.
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
8-213
Context
If a BSC supports GSM-T Relay, the BSC is connected to both the public MSC and the trunking MSC. By connecting the trunking services to the trunking MSC, the BSC separates the networking of trunking services and point-to-point call services.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. Run the ADD N7DPC command to add a DSP corresponding to the trunking MSC. Run the ADD GCNNODE command to add a CN node for the trunking MSC. In this step, set Default DPC to NO(Not Default DPC), Trunking MSC to YES(Yes), and Support Paging Message from Trunking MSC to YES(Yes). Run the SET GCELLGSMR command. In this step, set NCH Occupy Block Number to a non-zero value according to the actual requirement. Open the A Interface Trace dialog box on the LMT. Set DPC to the DPC of the trunking MSC. Initiate a successful VGCS call. The expected result: The A interface signaling of the VGCS initiator is displayed in the A interface tracing window. l Deactivation Procedure 1. ----End Run the MOD GCNNODE command. In this step, set Trunking MSC to NO(No).
3. l
8.128 Configuring HUAWEI II Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510501 HUAWEI II Handover.
Prerequisite
l
Context
Huawei II handover algorithm involves three types of handover: emergency handover, intra-cell handover, and inter-cell handover. All handover decisions are traversed in the handover decision phase. Unlike common handover algorithms, HUAWEI II handover algorithm is not performed immediately if the triggering condition of a handover is met during the traverse. Only the candidate cell lists for each handover decision type are generated independently. After all handover decisions are traversed, HUAWEI II handover algorithm takes the intersection from
the candidate cell lists corresponding to the handovers that meet the triggering condition, and then generates the final target cell list for the handover. Compared with common handover algorithms, HUAWEI II handover algorithm takes all results of handover decisions into account, thus obtaining more accurate results of handover decisions.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command. In this step, set Current HO Control Algorithm to HOALGORITHM2(Handover algorithm II).
NOTE
After the handover algorithm for the cell is set to HOALGORITHM2(Handover algorithm II), set Current HO Control Algorithm to HOALGORITHM2(Handover algorithm II) to set the parameters related to Huawei II handover algorithm when running the SET GCELLHOEMG, SET GCELLHOFITPEN, and SET GCELLHOIUO commands. Similarly, if Current HO Control Algorithm is set to HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I), set Current HO Control Algorithm to HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I) to set the parameters related to Huawei I handover algorithm when running the SET GCELLHOEMG, SET GCELLHOFITPEN, and SET GCELLHOIUO commands.
Verification Procedure 1. 2. Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command. In this step, set Current HO Control Algorithm to HOALGORITHM2(Handover algorithm II). Run the LST GCELLHOBASIC command to query the value of Current HO Control Algorithm. The expected result: The value of Current HO Control Algorithm is HOALGORITHM2(Handover algorithm II).
Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command. In this step, set Current HO Control Algorithm to HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I).
----End
8.129 Configuring Handover Re-establishment

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510502 Handover Re-establishment.
Prerequisite
l
None None The license for this feature is activated. An available neighboring cell is configured for the test cell. A TRX in the test cell supports handover re-establishment.
Other prerequisites
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
Context
When receiving the Error Indication message from the BTS during a handover, the BSC attempts to re-establish the call on the original channel instead of treating it as a call drop. Handover re-establishment provides the following benefits:
l l
Reducing the call drop rate and improving user satisfaction Improving network KPIs
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. l Run the SET GCELLSOFT command. In this step, set Activate L2 Reestablishment to YES(Yes). Configure two cells: cell 0 and cell 1. Configure these two cells as neighboring cell of each other. The two cells are operating normally on the same frequency band. On the LMT, open the Trace RSL Message on the Abis Interface dialog box of cell 0 and cell 1. Use the test MS to make a cell in cell 0. Run the ADD G2GNCELL command. In this step, set both Better Cell HO Watch Time and Better Cell HO Valid Time to 1, and set PBGT HO Threshold to 64. Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command. In this step, set Current HO Control Algorithm to HOALGORITHM2(Handover algorithm II). Run the SET GCELLCCTMR command. In this step, set both T200 FACCH/F and T200 FACCH/H to 5, set N200 of FACCH/Half Rate to 30, and set N200 of FACCH/Full Rate to 34. Rapidly decrease the BTS transmit power in cell 0 to initiate a better cell handover to cell 1. After the handover command is delivered, an Error Ind message is received from cell 0. The MS cannot receive the handover command. Then, increase the transmit power in cell 0. The transmission of the Error Ind message indicates that the number of timer T200 expires exceeds N200 plus one. View the result of the RSL message tracing on the Abis interface of cell 0. The expected result: The call is established successfully and the voice quality is good. The following messages can be traced on the Abis interface of cell 0: Handover Command, Error Indication, Establish Request, and Establish Confirm. The call of the MS is normal. l Deactivation Procedure 1. ----End Run the SET GCELLSOFT command. In this step, set Activate L2 Reestablishment to NO(No).
Verification Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
7. 8.
9.
8.130 Configuring RAN Sharing

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118701 RAN Sharing.
Prerequisite
l
The MSC is configured with two PLMNs, PLMN A and PLMN B. PLMN A belongs to operator A, and PLMN B belongs to operator B. Two test MSs are get ready. MS 1 is a subscriber of operator A and MS 2 is a subscriber of operator B. None The license for this feature is activated. A BTS is configured with two cells, cell 1 and cell 2. The two cells operate normally and have idle channels.
Other prerequisites
Context
With the RAN sharing function, different operators with independent core networks (CNs) can share the resources (such as BSC, BTS, antenna, and transmission resources) in a GBSS network.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. Run the SET BSCBASIC command. In this step, set Support RAN Sharing to YES (Yes). Run the ADD GCNOPERATOR command. In this step, set Operator Type to PRIM(Primary Operator) (assume that PLMN A belongs to the primary operator), set Operator Index, Operator Name, MCC, and MNC according to the actual conditions of PLMN A, and set other parameters according to the actual requirements. Run the ADD GCNOPERATOR command again. In this step, set Operator Type to SEC(Secondary Operator) (assume that PLMN B belongs to the secondary operator), set Operator Index, Operator Name, MCC, and MNC according to the actual conditions of PLMN B, and set other parameters according to the actual requirements. Run the ADD GCNNODE command. In this step, set Operator Name to the name of the operator of PLMN A and set other parameters according to the actual conditions. Run the ADD GCNNODE command again. In this step, set Operator Name to the name of the operator of PLMN B and set other parameters according to the actual conditions. Run the SET BTSSHARING command. In this step, select the test BTS and set Sharing Allow to YES(Yes). Run the MOD GCELL command. In this step, set Operator Name of cell 1 to the name of the operator of PLMN A. Run the MOD GCELLOSPMAP command. In this step, set OSP Code of cell 1 to the OSP allocated to the BSC6900 by the operator of PLMN A. Similarly, configure the attributes of cell 2. On the LMT, open the Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface dialog box and select RSL.
3.
4. 5.
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
2. 3.
On the LMT, open the Tracing Messages on the A Interface dialog box and select BSSAP. Use MS 1 to access cell 1 and make a call to a fix phone. The call is set up successfully. Check the signaling procedure of cell 1 in Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface and Tracing Messages on the A Interface. The expected result: The complete signaling procedure of a mobile-originated call of MS 1 is displayed.
4.
Use MS 2 to access cell 2 and make a call to a fix phone. The call is set up successfully. Check the signaling procedure of cell 2 in Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface and Tracing Messages on the A Interface. The expected result: The complete signaling procedure of a mobile-originated call of MS 2 is displayed.
Deactivation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Run the MOD GCELL command. In this step, set Operator Name of cell 2 to the name of the operator of PLMN A. Run the MOD GCELLOSPMAP command. In this step, set OSP Code to the OSP allocated to the BSC6900 by the operator of PLMN A. Run the SET BTSSHARING command. In this step, select the test BTS and set Sharing Allow to NO(No). Run the RMV GCNNODE command. In this step, set Operator Name to the name of the operator of PLMN B. Run the RMV GCNOPERATOR command to remove the operator whose Operator Name is SEC(Secondary Operator) (assume that the operator of PLMN B is the secondary operator). Run the SET BSCBASIC command. In this step, set Support RAN Sharing to NO (No).
6. ----End
8.131 Configuration the MSRD

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature Mobile Station Receive Diversity (MSRD).
Prerequisite
l
Activation
The cell supports the GPRS. The MS supports the MSRD.
Verification
Context
The MS cannot use DLDC and MSRD at the same time. A license is not required for the MSRD. The MSRD improves the signal receiving capability of the MS. Two antennas are used to eliminate interference, thus achieving enhanced channel diversity capability.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. l Run the SET GCELLPSCHM command. In this step, set MSRD PDCH Multiplex Threshold to 10 or MSRD MCS Threshold to MCS9. Assume that the interference is the same and dual carrier in the downlink are not be supported. Use the MS that supports MSRD to perform packet services. Check that the rate of this MS is more stable than the MS that does not support MSRD. This feature does not need to be deactivated.
----End
8.132 Configuring Dual Carriers in Downlink

This section describes how to configure, verify, and deactivate dual carriers in downlink.
Prerequisite
l l
The license is activated. The cell has sufficient resources and supports the Enhanced General Packet Radio Service (EGPRS). In addition, the cell is configured with more than two carriers. The DPUd board is configured. The MS used for verification supports dual carriers in downlink.
l l
Context
A license is required to activate dual carriers in downlink. The network supports the feature of allocating downlink channel resources on the two carriers at the same time. This improves the rate of the downlink packet data. The dual carriers in downlink function can improve the rate of the downlink packet data of a single MS (100% at the most). A single MS may take up more resources, and thus the number of MSs supported by the network is reduced.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the SET GCELLGPRS command. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu (Support as built-in PCU), EDGE to YES(Yes), and Support Downlink DualCarrier to SUPPORT(Support). Use the MS to perform streaming services. Run the DSP MSCONTEXT command to check the usage of occupied channels. Expected result: The information on the two downlink TFIs is displayed. This indicates dual carriers in downlink takes effect. l
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
1.
Run the SET GCELLGPRS command. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu (Support as built-in PCU) and Support Downlink Dual-Carrier to UNSUPPORT (Unsupport).
----End
8.133 Configuring the EGPRS2-A

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510803 EGPRS2-A. After a cell is configured to support the EGPRS2-A, the network can allocate the Temporary Block Flow (TBF) in EGPRS2-A mode to the MSs in the cell.
Prerequisite
l l l l l l
The license is activated. The DPUd board is configured. The cell supports the GPRS. The cell supports the Enhanced General Packet Radio Service (EGPRS) feature. The TRXs configured in the BTS supports the UL/DL EGPRS2-A feature. The Abis interface of the cell works in HDLC or IP mode.
Context
l l
A license is required to activate this feature. After a cell is configured to support the EGPRS2-A, the network can allocate the TBF in EGPRS2-A mode to the MSs in the cell. Impact on the performance: The UL/DL packet rate of a single MS is improved. The uplink data rate over the air interface can be increased to 76.8 kbit/TS and the downlink to 98.4 kbit/TS.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. l Run the SET GCELLGPRS command. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu (Support as built-in PCU) and EGPRS2-A to YES(Yes). Run the SET GCELLEGPRSPARA command. In this step, Uplink EGPRS2-A Fixed MCS Type and Downlink EGPRS2-A Fixed MCS Type to the coding types required by the test. Use the MS to perform the PING service, and Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface on the LMT. In this step. The uplink/downlink EGRPS2-A coding schemes set in Step 1 can be viewed. Run the SET GCELLGPRS command. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu (Support as built-in PCU) and EGPRS2-A to NO(No). Use the MS to perform the PING service, and Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface on the LMT. The output result shows that only the coding schemes from MCS1 to MCS9 are used.
2.
3. 4.
l
8-220
1. ----End
Run the SET GCELLGPRS command. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu (Support as built-in PCU) and EGPRS2-A to NO(No).
8.134 Configuring Latency Reduction

This section describes how to configure, verify, and deactivate latency reduction.
Prerequisite
l l l l l
The license is activated. The DPUd board is configured. The MS supports the latency reduction. The BTS supports the latency reduction. The cell supports the EDGE.
Context
A license is required to activate latency reduction. Latency reduction is introduced in the HDLC/IP transmission mode over the Abis interface to reduce the transmission latency, enhance user experience on the conversational service, and improve user satisfaction.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the SET GCELLGPRS command. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu (Support as built-in PCU), EDGE to YES(Yes), and Support Reduced Latency Capability to SUPPORT(Support). Use the MS to perform conversational services in the PS domain. Run the DSP PDCH command to query the status of the PDCH. Expected result: In the displayed result, the number of RTTI TBFs on the PDCH is not zero. l Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the SET GCELLGPRS command. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu (Support as built-in PCU) and Support Reduced Latency Capability to UNSUPPORT(Unsupport).
----End
8.135 Configuring the License Control for Urgency Function

This section describes how to configure and verify the "GBFD-511001 license control for urgency" .
Prerequisite
The license is activated, and the function item License Control for Urgency Function is opened.
Context
CAUTION
This function is performed only in scenarios where the traffic volume increases abruptly, for example, in a disaster. This function can be performed only three time for each R version and it is valid only in seven days since it is enabled.
l l
A license is required to implement the license control for urgency function. The license file includes function items and resource items. The restricted functions in the license file can be enabled by configuring license control for urgency function. In this way, the hardware capacity can reach the maximum.
Procedure
l Activating Procedure 1. l Run the SET LICENSECTRL command. In this step, Grace Protection Period Switch to ON. Run the DSP LICUSAGE command to view the resource items of the license. The returned result shows that all the values of the resource items reach the maximum. 2. Run the LST LICENSECTRL command to query the setting of Grace Protection Period Switch State. The returned result shows the Remaining Grace Protection Times, the Remaining Grace Protection Days, and the Grace Protection Period Switch State, which is ON. l Deactivating Procedure 1. ----End Run the SET LICENSECTRL command. In this step, Grace Protection Period Switch to OFF.
8.136 Configuring Access Control Class

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511002 Access Control Class (ACC).
Prerequisite
l l
A License is activated. The MS and its SIM card are compliant with the protocols related to ACC.
8-222
Context
This feature enables special users and some common users to access the network preferentially when the network traffic is excessively high. When the ACC function is enabled, the MS checks the access control class set in the SIM card based on the access control class included in the cell broadcast message. If the access control class is an allowed one, the MS can preempt the RACH to access the network. If the access control class is an forbidden one, the MS cannot access the network.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the ADD BSCACCCTRLP command to add an access control policy. In this step, set Access Control Policy Index, ACC Control Window Size, Starting Point of the Access Control Window, and Sliding Speed of the Access Control Window as required.
NOTE
A maximum of 32 access control policies can be set. You can run the command in Step 1 many times to set multiple access control policies. When the Access Control Policy is enabled and the system message is sent by the BSC, the access of the MSs of Class 10 to Class 15 is not affected regardless of the Access Control Policy configuration.
2.
Run the SET GCELLCCBASIC command to set basic call control parameters of a cell. In this step, set Access Control Allowed to YES(Yes), and then set ACC Control Policy to the Access Control Policy Index as specified in Step 1. Run the LST GCELLCCBASIC command to query basic call control parameters of a cell. Expected results: The value of Access Control Allowed is YES(Yes) and that of Access Control Policy is a specific one.
2.
Run the LST BSCACCCTRLP command to query an access control policy. Expected results: The values of Access Control Window Size, Starting Point of the Access Control Window, and Sliding Speed of the Access Control Window are those specified during configuration.
3.
Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface.

NOTE
The ACC field contains two octets and is 16 bits in length. Each bit indicates a level of the SIM users and its value is 0 or 1. When a bit is 0, the SIM users of a certain level are allowed to access the network. When a bit is 1, the SIM users of a certain level are forbidden to access the network.
Expected results: The information element (IE) RACH Control Parameters is included in the system message, and within the sliding window range the value of the bits in the ACC field of the RACH Control Parameters is 1 from the starting point onwards. 4. When an MS is used to make a call, the MS cannot access the network if the level of the SIM card of the MS belongs to the forbidden levels. If the level of the SIM card does not belong to the forbidden levels, the MS can access the network normally.
l
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
1.
Run the SET GCELLCCBASIC command to set basic call control parameters of a cell. In this step, set Access Control Allowed to NO(No) to deactivate the ACC function of the cell.
----End
8.137 Configuring Load Based Handover Enhancement on Iur-g

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511101 Load Based Handover Enhancement on Iur-g.
Prerequisite
l
Equipment requirements

GSM+UMTS multi-mode handsets are required. The multi-mode base station controller (MBSC) is required. The BSS and the RNS are connected properly through the Iur-g interface. Both the 2G network and the 3G network are deployed. IP transmission is applied on the Iur-g interface. The intra-MBSC Iur-g interface is configured. The license for MBSC load-based handover enhancement on Iur-g is activated if required. The inter-MBSC Iur-g interface is configured. The license for MBSC load-based handover enhancement is activated if required.
NOTE
Network requirements


l l l l
The licenses on the BSC and the RNC must be activated respectively. The RNC can be configured with a maximum of 32 neighboring BSCs. The BSC can be configured with a maximum of 16 neighboring RNCs. If the inter-MBSC Iur-g interface is configured, the data for this interface must be negotiated and planned.
Context
With the Co-RRM feature, the common measurement procedure and interaction between GSM and UMTS cells is implemented on the Iur-g interface. In this manner, the handover based on load is enhanced. The connections of the Iur-g interface are described as follows:
l
The Iur-g interface is configured inside the MBSC. That is, the intra-MBSC Iur-g interface is configured in GU mode. In this case, the Iur-g interface board is not required, and no data for this interface needs to be configured.
The Iur-g interface is configured between the MBSCs.

8-224
That is, the MBSC in GSM mode is connected to the MBSC in UMTS mode through the Iur-g interface, or the MBSC in GU mode is connected to the MBSC in GSM or UMTS mode through the Iur-g interface. In this case, data for this interface must be configured, and an IP-based Iur-g interface board, such as FG2a, FG2c, GOUa, and GOUc, must be configured in the two MBSCs that are connected to each other. The two interface boards can be connected directly to each other or through a relay device.
Procedure
l Activate Procedure 1. 2. Configure the neighboring cell relationship and the Iur-g connection. For details, see Configurations of Neighboring Cell Relation and Iur-g Connection. Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command to enable the inter-RAT handover. In this step, set Inter-RAT In BSC Handover Enable to YES(Yes). If multiple neighboring cells are planned, repeat this step. Run the SET OTHSOFTPARA command to set the load balance delta threshold. In this step, set CS 2G 3G Load Balance Delta Threshold to recommended value 110. Run the SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB command to set the 2G load adjustment coefficient. In this step, set 2G Load Adjustment Coefficient to recommended value 10. If multiple neighboring cells are planned, repeat this step. Click the Trace tab on the main page of the LMT. The Trace tab page is displayed. Choose Trace > GSM Services, and then double-click BSC Trace. The BSC Trace dialog box is displayed. Specify the parameter DPC, and then click Submit. If... You view that the RANSP_COMM_MEAS_RPRT message is reported, You do not view that the RANSP_COMM_MEAS_RPRT message is reported, l Deactivate Procedure 1. Run the SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB command to close the switch for load balancing and set the load adjustment coefficient. In this step, set Allow Inter-RAT Load HO in Access State to OFF. Example: SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, InterRatServiceLoadHoSwitch=OFF; ----End Then... The data configuration is successful.
3.
4.
Verify Procedure 1. 2. 3.
The data configuration fails.
Example
/*Enable the inter-RAT handover.*/
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INTERRATINBSCHOEN=YES; SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, INTERRATINBSCHOEN=YES; SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2, INTERRATINBSCHOEN=YES; SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=3, INTERRATINBSCHOEN=YES; SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=4, INTERRATINBSCHOEN=YES; /*Set the load balance delta threshold.*/ SET OTHSOFTPARA: G2G3GLdBlcDeltaThrd=110; /*Set the 2G load adjustment coefficient.*/ SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0 G2GLoadAdjustCoeff=10; SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1 G2GLoadAdjustCoeff=10; SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2 G2GLoadAdjustCoeff=10; SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=3 G2GLoadAdjustCoeff=10; SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=4 G2GLoadAdjustCoeff=10;
8.138 Configuring 2G3G Co-Transmission by TDM Switching

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature 2G/3G CoTransmission by TDM Switching.
Prerequisite
l l
The license for this feature is activated. Currently, the BTSs that support the 2G/3G Co-Transmission by TDM Switching feature are BTS3012, BTS3012AE, BTS3900 GSM, BTS3900A GSM, and DBS3900 GSM. The timeslot cross connection device closest to the BSC/RNC multiplexes and demultiplexes 2G and 3G timeslots, and then transmits the 2G and 3G timeslots to the BSC and RNC separately over two E1 cables. Multi-mode base stations are correctly installed and connected to other devices.
Context
Through the TDM switching, the BTSs and NodeBs in Huawei SingleRAN solution make full use of existing TDM transmission resources. With this feature, 2G and 3G networks can share the timeslot-based transmission channels to achieve the exchange of user data and control data. Thus, this feature reduces the OPEX of SingleRAN solution in TDM transmission mode.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the ADD BTSTOPCONFIG command to configure the TOP switching relation. In this step, set Port Type to TOPEXTOUTPORT(TOP Extended Out Port), and correctly set Originally E1/T1 Port No. and TS Mask used in the 3G network.
8-226
2. l
Then, configure the TOP in switching relation on the NodeB side. The method is the same as that on the BSC side. Use an MS to make a 2G call. The call service is normal. Use an MS to make a 3G call. The call service is normal. Use MSs to make 2G and 3G calls simultaneously. The call services are normal. Run the RMV BTSTOPCONFIG command to remove a TOP switching relation. In this step, clear the value of Backboard E1/T1 Port No..
----End
8.139 Configuring Multiple CCCHs

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature GBFD-511501 Multiple CCCHs.
Prerequisite
Context
A license is required to activate Multiple CCCHs. Multiple CCCHs enables timeslot 2, 4, or 6 of BCCH TRX to be configured as the BCCH physical channel. This increases the number of CCCHs within a cell, and improves the paging and random access capabilities of the cell.
Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the SET GTRXCHAN command. In this step, specify TRX ID and Channel No., and then set Channel Type to BCH(BCH).
NOTE
The main BCCH can be configured in only timeslot 0, and the extension BCCH can be configured in timeslot 2, 4, or 6. If an extended BCCH is configured, the CCCH parameter in the system message data needs to be configured accordingly. For example, if an extended BCCH is configured in timeslot 2, the CCCH parameter in the system message data needs to be configured as two uncombined CCCHs.
Verification Procedure 1. Run the SET GTRXCHAN command. In this step, specify TRX ID, set Channel No. to 2, and then set Channel Type to TCHFR(TCH Full Rate) or TCHHR(TCH Half Rate). Use the MS to make a call. Trace RSL messages on the Abis interface by referring to Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface. Expected result: The value of channel-no. in all paging messages is 0.
2. 3.
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)
8-227
4. 5. 6.
Run the SET GTRXCHAN command. In this step, specify TRX ID, set Channel No. to 2, and then set Channel Type to BCH(BCH). Use the MS to make a call. Trace RSL messages on the Abis interface by referring to Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface. Expected result: In some paging messages, the value of channel-no. is 2. Run the SET GTRXCHAN command. In this step, specify TRX ID and Channel No., and then set Channel Type to TCHFR(TCH Full Rate) or TCHHR(TCH Half Rate).
----End
8-228
Issue 06 (2010-05-31)

Good Document - GBSS Reconfiguration Guide (V900R011C00 - 06)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Good Document - GBSS Reconfiguration Guide (V900R011C00 - 06)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GBSS V900R011C00

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

About This Document

About This Document

About This Document

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

About This Document

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

About This Document

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

3 Checking the License.................................................................................................................3-1 4 Reconfiguring the BSC6900......................................................................................................4-1

5 Reconfiguring the Transmission Mode.................................................................................5-1

7 Reconfiguring the GSM Network...........................................................................................7-1

8 Configuring GSM Features......................................................................................................8-1

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

1 Changes in GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Changes in GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

1 Changes in GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

1 Changes in GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

1 Changes in GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

About This Chapter

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

3 Checking the License

Checking the License

This chapter describes how to check the newly granted license.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3 Checking the License

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

4 Reconfiguring the BSC6900

Reconfiguring the BSC6900

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4 Reconfiguring the BSC6900

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

4.1 Changing Signaling Points

4.2 Changing the Work Mode of a Board

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

4 Reconfiguring the BSC6900

/Change the work mode of the board in slot 14 of subrack 1/

/Set all subracks to effective mode/

/Reset subrack 1/

/Configure the control plane on the A interface/

/Configure the user plane on the A interface/